Design Requirements ADAL Youth Center - 231

Child Development Center (CDC)
SECTION 01 10 10
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR A CHILD DEVELOPMENT CENTER (CDC)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Design Requirements
1. General
2. Design Requirements
3. Sustainable Design
4. Geotechnical and Foundations
5. Sitework
6. Utilities
7. Landscape and Irrigation
8. Architectural
9. Structural and Comprehensive Interior Design Requirements
10. Structural Design
11. HVAC
12. Plumbing
13. Fire Suppression
14. Electrical Systems
15. Electronic Systems
16. Fire Detection and Alarm System
17. Corrosion Control and Cathodic Protection
18. Food Service Design
19. Outdoor Play Environment
20. Room Data Sheets
21. Fire Protection/Prevention Inspection Guide
SECTION 01 10 10
07/29/2009
Page 1
SECTION 01 10 10
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR LARGE CHILD DEVELOPMENT CENTER (CDC)
1. GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENT INTENT
Section 01 10 10 supplements UFC 4-740-14 and the drawings contained herein.

This section was developed to provide typical conditions for large size Air
Force Child Development Centers at any location. The requirements in this
section are based on a building occupancy of 304 children. In cases where
this section is applied to facilities of lesser size any code requirement
based on total building occupancy should be adjusted to reflect the actual
size of the facility as shown in the drawings that are part of this Request
for Proposal. Additional Base specific design and construction requirements
are included in Appendix A. In cases of conflict the following order of
precedence shall govern; UFC 4-740-14 in all cases except room sizes and
arrangements which are governed by the drawings, the clarification to NFPA 72
in paragraph 16.2.3 in section 01 10 10, then the Standard drawings, then the
site specific Appendix A and then section 01 10 10. Section 01 10 10
contains authorized deviations to UFC 4 -740-14 to include those referenced
above. In all specific cases of conflict section 01 10 10 shall govern.
1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
This project is for design and construction of a single story Child

Development Center in accordance with UFC 4-740-14; Design: Child Development
Centers, and the requirements of this document. Square footages are indicated
on the Base specific drawings. The contractor is responsible for final
design and obtaining all permits in accordance with this document and all
applicable building codes. This project shall allow fast track construction.
Construction shall not commence on any part of the work until after
completion and approval of specific design elements in accordance with
section 01 10 12; Design after Award. If the Contractor elects to do fast
track construction, approval for any part on the design by the government
does not constitute overall project design approval. The contractor shall be
responsible for all conflicts that arise from coordination of design and
construction. This project shall be designed and constructed in accordance
with sustainable design principles outlined by the LEED process. It is the
goal of this project to accumulate sufficient points for the LEED Silver
level of certification.
2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
2.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall prepare complete construction documents for all work
designed as required by the RFP. The construction documents to be prepared
include, but are not limited to construction drawings, specifications,
submittals, and design analysis as required in Section 01 10 12 Design
after Award. Materials and equipment shall be limited to those specified
except that where no specific material and equipment is specified or no
SECTION 01 10 10
07/29/2009
Page 2
basis of design is identified, the Contractor shall use materials and

equipment accepted within the construction industry and in compliance with
the Design Criteria. Base specific criteria will be provided in the
Appendix A.
2.2 DESIGN
The project shall be designed in accordance with the RFP using sustainable
design principles and efficient practices. The design of the building and the
materials selected shall be high quality, durable and easily maintained. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the professional quality, code
compliance, technical accuracy, and coordination of all designs, drawings,
specifications, and other documents or publications upon which the design and
construction are based.
The Contractor’s Architect shall work with Base’s Architect to define and
specify the exterior aesthetic. This includes but is not limited to the
selection of the exterior finishes and textures, the incorporation of
additional windows either on the exterior or as clerestories, the slope of
the roof and the entry walkway. The first appearance of this facility from
the parking lot to the entry is extremely important and the Contractor needs
to ensure that aesthetic is well designed. The Contractor is also responsible
for assisting the Base Architect in providing sketches and perspectives in
order to get the necessary approvals to proceed with the design and
construction of the facility.
If Appendix A is referenced in the Section 01 10 10 but no information is

provided in the Appendix the Contractor can assume that no further
information shall be provided.
2.3 SPECIFICATION INTENT
The intent of this specification section is to further describe the

performance requirements for appearance, function, materials, quality, and
types of construction to enable engineering, design, and construction to be
completed by the Contractor. In this specification section, design
requirements are provided for each element of the work which outlines the
parameters and design to which the Contractor shall design. In addition, the
UFGS specifications referenced throughout this section shall be used as the
basis for quality, materials, and construction and form part of the
contract.
2.4 COORDINATION BETWEEN THE VARIOUS DISCIPLINES
The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination between disciplines

in order to fulfill the requirements of this contract and to provide for a
complete, integrated, and functional design.
2.5 QUALITY OF WORK
Construction documents shall be of sufficient detail to afford a clear

understanding of the construction work required. The work shall be organized
in a manner that will assure thorough coordination between the various
SECTION 01 10 10
07/29/2009
Page 3
details on the drawings and the specifications. The Contractor shall

crosscheck all work until all conflicts have been reconciled. The design
shall comply with the base specific General Design Guidelines and
Architectural Compatibility Guidelines; see Appendix A for further detail.
2.6 RFP DESIGN AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA
Design and construction shall comply with UFC 4-740-14; the drawings;
appendices and requirements contained in this Request for Proposals (RFP).
The design and technical criteria contained and cited in this Section
establish minimum standards for design and construction quality. The
objective of this solicitation is to obtain functional, fully operational and
sustainable facilities that conform to the basic dimensions and
configurations presented in the RFP. Adjustments and enhancements to the RFP
floor and site plans are strictly limited to accommodate actual design and
construction conditions, and for the most part, they represent the functional
and organizational space arrangements of the building Users. The spatial
arrangements for the interior of the individual activity rooms and kitchen
are particularly important to the government. No deviations from the
criteria will be allowed unless prior approval by HQ USAF/A1SA is obtained in
writing from the Contracting Officer's Representative. However, the
Contractor is encouraged to look at optional equipment and use of space to
reduce square footage for support areas to reduce overall facility costs. All
questions or problems encountered by the Contractor in following criteria
shall be promptly submitted with recommendations to the Contracting Officer's
Representative for approval by HQ USAF/A1SA.
The primary governing document is the Unified Facilities Criteria for Child
Development Centers however, in the case of any conflicts that may arise
between the RFP and the UFC, contact Contracting Officer for guidance. These
spaces have been designed and approved through the RFP process and shall not
be deviated from. The Contractor is responsible for bringing these conflicts
to the attention of the Contracting Officer's Representative for approval.
A preliminary code research has been performed as part of the creation of

these documents. The Contractor will be responsible to perform a full code
research for the project and design and construct a facility in compliance
with applicable codes. The preliminary code review and life safety analysis
that occurred during the preparation of the RFP were cursory reviews to check
on overall design issues. The government does not believe the RFP documents
present inherent building code or life safety problems. The Contractor has
final design responsibility and shall be responsible for building code and
life safety compliance.
Architectural detail, materials and finishes are paramount to the success of

this project. Exterior materials and finishes shall be compatible with other
existing facilities on the base. All efforts have been made to specify
compatible products and construction materials.
Contractor is responsible to perform RADON testing of the entire facility

footprint and provide the government with a report of findings. All testing
shall be conducted in accordance with U.S. EPA protocols by a certified RADON
testing professional. Radon measurement shall not exceed the U.S. EPA
SECTION 01 10 10
07/29/2009
Page 4
Compliance level of 4.0 pCi/l. If the level of Radon is above the compliance
level, the government will issue a contract change to design and install a
system to mitigate the Radon to ensure the radon level in the completed
facility does not exceed the compliance level. If mitigating is required,
the contractor shall be required to conduct follow up testing of the
completed facility, under closed building conditions, to ensure the facility
is within EPA compliance guidelines. The contractor shall be responsible for
any further mitigation efforts at no cost to the government should the follow
up testing not be within EPA compliance guidelines.
The Contractor is responsible for providing documentation verifying that

children are not exposed to lead-based paint, volatile organic compounds,
heavy metals in the drinking water and molds. Areas that have been recently
painted, carpeted, tiled, or otherwise renovated shall be well ventilated
before they are used by children.
2.6.1 Section 01 10 10 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: Specification Section 01 10 10

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS defines the design and performance criteria. The
applicable building codes and standards shall be used as the minimum criteria
to develop the construction documents for areas of work not specifically
defined.
2.6.2 Section 01 10 12 DESIGN AFTER AWARD: Specification Section 01 10 12

DESIGN AFTER AWARD defines the format and submittal requirements in which the
design and the construction documents shall be prepared by the Contractor.
2.6.3 Technical Specifications: The contractor shall develop the technical

specifications from the Unified Facilities Guide Specification (UFGS)
System, Divisions 2 through 48. For the areas of work in which the UFGS
specifications have not been provided, the Contractor shall develop these
specifications as required. Technical specifications required for this
project are listed herein for each element of the work. However, this
listing is not limited to the other specifications that may be required for
all elements of the work.
2.7 DESIGN CODES, STANDARDS AND CRITERIA
The design shall comply with the base specific General Design Guidelines and
the Architectural Compatibility Guidelines of that base.
In addition to the specific codes, standards and criteria referenced

throughout this RFP, the Contractor shall prepare design and construction
documents for all elements of the project in accordance with UFC 4-740-14 and
the following codes using the most current editions. Where conflict between
RFP and building codes or there is a conflict between codes, UFC 3-600-01
shall apply. This list is not intended to be a complete list. All work
shall be designed and constructed to meet all applicable codes, standards and
laws. Reference other sections of this RFP and the UFGS specifications
referenced for use for other standards and references not listed below.
ABA Architectural Barriers Act

AFDS Air Force Design Guide, current edition
SECTION 01 10 10
07/29/2009
Page 5
ANSI American National Standards Institute Standards

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers, Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures, Latest edition.
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
DCID Director of Central Intelligence Directive 6/9, Physical
Security Standards for Sensitive Compartmented Information
Facilities
EIA Electronic Industries Association
ETL Engineering Technical Letters
IBC International Building Code
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IES Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook
IMC International Mechanical Code
IPC International Plumbing Code
MILHDBK Military Handbooks
NEC National Electrical Code, current edition
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NESC National Electrical Safety Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association Codes and Standards, most
current edition
SMACNA Sheetmetal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
TI’s Technical Instructions
TM’s Technical manuals
UFC Unified Facilities Criteria
UL Underwriter's Laboratories
The Contractor shall also follow all current national and state codes,
regulations and specifications involving civil, architectural, interior
design, structural, mechanical, electrical, and environmental disciplines
which are applicable to the engineering design and construction industry,
including OSHA Safety and Health Standards and Air Force policy on Ozone
Depleting Chemicals (ODC’s).
Use of the most current versions of the National Fire Codes and Life Safety
Codes, published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), the
International Building Code (IBC), and the Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)is
mandatory. In case of conflict between code requirements, the most stringent
criteria shall apply.
2.8 DESIGN UNITS
The design shall be developed using English units.
2.9 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
AASHTO American Association of Highway and Transportation Officials

ABA Architectural Barriers Act
ACI American Concrete Institute
A-E Architect-Engineer
SECTION 01 10 10
07/29/2009
Page 6
A/E/C Architect/Engineer/Contractor
AF Air Force
AFF Above Finish Floor
AF&PA American Forest and Paper Association
AFI Air Force Instruction
AFM Air Force Manual
AFCEE Air Force Center for Engineering and the Environment
AFCESA Air Force Civil Engineering Support Agency
AFSVA Air Force Services Agency
AHU Air Handling Unit
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
ANSI American National Standards Institute
API American Petroleum Institute
AR Army Regulation
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air
Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AT/FP Anti-terrorism/Force Protection
AWS American Welding Society
BCE Base Civil Engineer
BICSI Building Industry Consulting Service International
BMP Best Management Plan
BRAC Base Realignment and Closure
C Centigrade
CADD Computer Assisted Design and Drafting
CATV Cable Television
CCB Construction Criteria Base
CCTV Closed Circuit Television Security
CDC Child Development Center
Cfm cubic feet per minute
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
cfs cubic feet per second
cm centimeter
c.m. corrugated metal
CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America
CMU Concrete Masonry Unit
COM Customer’s Own Material
COR Contracting Officer’s Representative
CoS Center/s of Standardization
CP Cathodic Protection
CSV Comma-Separated-Values
CWE Current Working Estimate
D-B Design-Build
D-B-B Design-Bid-Build
DD Department of Defense
DDC Direct Digital Controls
DM Design Manual
DOD Department of Defense
DPW Directorate of Public Works
DX Direct Expansion
SECTION 01 10 10
07/29/2009
Page 7
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance

EC Engineering Circular
EM Engineering Manual
EMCS Energy Management and Control System
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EN-DA Architectural/Structural/Civil Engineering Section, Mobile
District
EN-DW Project Support Section, Mobile District
ENG Engineer Form designation
EN-GG Geotechnical and Dam Safety Section, Mobile District
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
ER Engineering Regulations
ETL Engineering Technical Letter
F Fahrenheit
FAR Federal Acquisition Regulation
FFE Furniture, Fixtures and Equipment
FPP Furniture Placement Plan
fps feet per second
FSC Federal Supply Class
FSN Federal Standard Number
FSS Federal Supply Schedules
FY Fiscal Year
GD Geographic District
gpm gallons per minute
HAG Historical Analysis Generator
HAP Hourly Analysis Program
HTW Hazardous and Toxic Waste
HVAC Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
IBC International Building Code
ICC International Code Council
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IES Illumination Engineering Society
IFGC International Fuel Gas Code
I-H In-house
IMC International Mechanical Code
IMCOM Installation Management Command
IOF Illustrated Order Form
IPC International Plumbing Code
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineer’s Association
IRC International Residential Code
IRP Installation Restoration Program
ISA Instrument Society of America
JOC Job Order Contract
LAN Local Area Network
LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
MAJCOM Major Command
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association
MCA Military Construction Army
MCASES Micro Computer-Aided Cost Estimating System
MCP Military Construction Program
MILCON Military Construction
MIL-HDBK Military Handbook
MO Maximum Order
SECTION 01 10 10
07/29/2009
Page 8
MS Microsoft
MT MILCON Transformation
MWPCA Massachusetts Water Pollution Control Association
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NOR Notice of Registration
NPDES National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
O&M Operation and Maintenance
OMA Operation and Maintenance Army
PACES Parametric Cost Engineering System
PAE Project Architect-Engineer
PCASE Pavement-Transportation Computer Assisted Structural
Engineering
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
PDF Portable Document Format
PIV Post Indicator Valve
PM Project Manager
PPTO Price Performance Trade Off
psi pounds per square inch
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
PVD Power, Voice and Data
QCP Quality Control Plan, Qualified Credentialed Professional
RA Requirements Analysis
RFP Request for Proposal
RFQ Request for Quote
RTA Ready-To-Advertise
SABER Simplified Acquisition of Base Engineering Requirements
SDI Steel Deck Institute
SID Structural Interior Design
SIOH Supervision, Inspection and Overhead
SGML Standard Generalized Markup Language
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National
Association
SOW Statement of Work
TIA Telecommunication Industry Association
TI Technical Instruction
TL Technical Letter
TM Technical Manual
TRACE Trane Air Conditioning Economics
UFC Unified Facilities Criteria
UG Underground
UL Underwriter’s Laboratory
UMCS Utility Monitor and Control Systems
USDOT United States Department of Transportation
UFGS Unified Facility Guide Specification
USACE U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
USGBC United States Green Building Council
VAV Variable Air Volume
WAN Wide Area Network
SECTION 01 10 10
07/29/2009
Page 9
2.10 CODES AND REFERENCES
The Contractor shall use the most current code and/or reference published.
• A policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets, AASHTO

• ACGIH-2092M, AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH),
Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice (Metric)
• ACGIH-2092S, AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH),
Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice
• ACI 117-06 – Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials
• ACI 302.1R-04 – Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
• ACI 318-05 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
• ACI 530-05 – Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
• AF CDC Criteria
• AF Policy CDC/School-Age (SA)/ Youth Programs (YP) Drinking Water
• AFCESA Inspection Guide for AF Child Development Facilities
• AFI 31-101, Physical Security Program
• AFI 32-1068 – Heating Systems and Unfired Pressure Vessels
• AFI 32-1084, Standard Facilities Requirements Handbook
• Air Force Base Architectural Compatibility Plan (ACP)
• Air Force Base General Plan
• Air Force Sustainable Design and Development Policy memo dated 31 July 2007
• Air Force Instruction 34-248, Child Development Centers
• AISC 325-05 – Steel Construction Manual, 13th Edition
• AISC 327-05 – Seismic Design Manual
• AISI – Cold Formed Steel Design Manual
• American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged
Fittings
• American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI 260.1
• ANSI Z358.1-2004 – American National Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower
Equipment
• ABA - Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
• ASCE 7-05 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
• ASHRAE Handbooks – Latest Edition
• ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004 – Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
• ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2004 – Energy Standard
• ASHRAE Guideline 0 - 2005
• ASME B 31.8, Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 10
• ASTM A 123, Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
• ASTM A 167, Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip
• ASTM A 240, Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip for Pressure Vessels for General Applications
• ASTM A 269, Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General
Service
• ASTM A 36/A 36M, Carbon Structural Steel
• ASTM B 32, Solder Metal
• ASTM D 520, Zinc Dust Pigment
• ASTM D2513, Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Piping
Systems
• ASTM D2683, Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for
Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing
• ASTM F -1951
• ASTM F-1292
• ASTM F-1487
• ASTM F-2049
• ASTM F-2075
• ASTM F-2373
• ASTM Standards – American Society of Testing and Materials
• AWS – Structural Welding Codes
• AWS A5.8/A5.8M, AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS), Filler Metals for Brazing and
Braze Welding
• Base Manuals; see Appendix A for further detail
• Caring for Our Children: National Health and Safety Performance Standards:
Guidelines for Out-of-Home Child Care, 2nd Edition
• CSA Directory, CSA INTERNATIONAL, (updated continuously online) Certified
Products Listings
• CSPC 325, Consumer Product Safety Commission Public Playground Safety Handbook
• DCID 6/9, Physical Security Standards for Sensitive Compartmentalized
Information Facilities
• Department of Defense Instruction Number 6060.2, Child Development Programs
• District Design Manual; see Appendix A for further detail
• ETL 04-3 – Design Criteria for Prevention of Mold in Air Force Facilities
• ETL 83-1 Design of Control Systems for HVAC
• EPACT 05 Energy Policy Act 2005
• FC 3-600-01: Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities
• FM Data sheet 2-8N – Installation of Sprinkler Systems
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 11
• Guiding Principles for Federal Leadership in High Performance and Sustainable

Buildings
• Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
• IBC – International Building Code, most current edition
• IMC – International Mechanical Code.
• IPC – International Plumbing Code
• Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
• MIL-HDBK 1013, Facilities Engineering Design and Construction
• MIL-HDBK-1190, Facility Design Manual
• MSS SP 69 – Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry Inc. – Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application
• MSS SP-110, MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS), Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
Flared Ends
• MSS SP-72, MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS) Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General
Service
• NAEYC Early Childhood Program Standards and Accreditation Criteria
• National Electrical Code
• National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) for Construction
Activities
• “Natural Playscapes” by Rusty Keeler
• NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
• NEMA ICS 6, Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures
• NEMA LD 3, High-Pressure Decorative Laminates
• NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, most current edition
• NFPA 101 – National Fire Protection Association 101, Life Safety Code, most
current edition
• NFPA 13 – Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
• NFPA 14 – Hose Systems
• NFPA 220, Standard on Types of Building Construction, most current edition
• NFPA 54 – Natural Gas Fuel Code
• NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
• NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
• NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code
• NFPA 720, Standard for the Installation of Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detection and
Warning Equipment
• NFPA 88A, Standard for Parking Structures
• NFPA 90A – Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 12
• NFPA 90B – Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air

• NFPA 96, Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations
• NSF 2, Food Equipment
• NSF 35, High Pressure Decorative Laminates for Surfacing Food Service Equipment
• NSF 7, Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers
• NSF Product Listing, NSF Product Listings of Food Equipment and Related
Products, Components, and Materials
• PDC-TR 06-08 – Single Degree of Freedom Structural Response Limits for
Antiterrorism Design
• SDI Diaphragm Mnl – Diaphragm Design Manual
• SDI Pub No 29 – Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, and
Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution
• SJI – Steel Joist Institute, Standard Specifications and Load Tables
• SMACNA Guidelines – Sheet Metal and Air-conditioning Contractors' National
Association
• SMACNA HVAC Duct Const Stds, HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible
• State Department of Transportation Standards
• The National Association for the Education of Young Children (NAEYC) Early
Childhood Program Standards and Accreditation Criteria
• TI 800-01, Child Development Centers
• TM 5-813-1/AFM 88-10 Vol. 1, Water Supply Sources and General Considerations
• TM 5-822-2/AFM 88-7 Chapter 5 General Provisions and Geometric Design for
Roads, Streets, Walks, and Open Storage Areas
• UFC 1-200-01 – General Building Requirements
• UFC 3-110, Design: Architectural
• UFC 3-210-01A, Area Planning, Site Planning, and Design
• UFC 3-210-05FA, Landscape Design and Planning Criteria
• UFC 3-210-06A, Site Planning and Design
• UFC 3-210-10, Low Impact Development
• UFC 3-230-10A, Water Supply: Water Distribution
• UFC 3-230-17FA, Drainage in Areas Other than Airfields
• UFC 3-240-04A, Wastewater Collection
• UFC 3-240-07FA, Sanitary and Industrial Wastewater Collection: Gravity Sewers
and Appearances
• UFC 3-250-01FA, Design: Pavement Design for Roads, Streets, Walks and Open
Storage Areas
• UFC 3-250-04FA, Design Standard Practice for Concrete Pavements
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 13
• UFC 3-250-08FA, Standard Practice for Sealing Joints and Cracks in Rigid and
Flexible Pavements
• UFC 3-310-01 – Structural Load Data
• UFC 3-400-01 – Design: Energy Conservation
• UFC 3-400-02 – Engineering Weather Data
• UFC 3-410-01FA – Design: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
• UFC 3-410-02FA – Design: Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
Control System
• UFC 3-410-02A Change 1 – 2007 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
Controls System
• UFC 3-420-01FA – Design: Plumbing Systems
• UFC 3-430-05FA – Design: Gas Distribution
• UFC 3-520-01 Interior Electrical Systems
• UFC 3-530-01 Design: Interior and Exterior Lighting and Controls
• UFC 3-570-02A Cathodic Protection
• UFC 3-580-01 Telecommunications Building Cabling Systems Planning and Design
• UFC 3-600-01 – Design: Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities General
Design Requirements
• UFC 4-010-01 – DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings
• UFC 4-010-02 – DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standoff Distances for Buildings
(FOUO)
• UFC 4-010-02, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings
• UFC 4-020-01FA – Security Engineering Project Development (FOUO)
• UFC 4-021-01 Mass Notification Systems
• UFC 4-030-01, Sustainable Development
• UFC 4-740-14 Unified Facilities Criteria for Child Development Centers
• UL 1046, Grease Filters for Exhaust Ducts
• UL 197, Commercial Electric Cooking Appliances
• UL 207, Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical
• UL 471, Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers
• UL 489, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker
Enclosures
• UL 710, Exhaust Hoods for Commercial Cooking Equipment
• UL Elec Equip Dir, Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory
• Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards, FED-STD-795
• USDA – Child and Adult Care Food Program Guidelines
3. SUSTAINABLE DESIGN
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 14
The Contractor shall design and construct this facility to meet the United States
Green Building Council (USGBC) LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design)
rating of Silver certification for New Construction per the current accepted USGBC
rating system. At a minimum for the base bid the Contractor shall provide the LEED
Checklist at each design submittal demonstrating that the sufficient number of
prerequisites, credits and points are achievable to meet a LEED Silver Certification.
BID OPTION: The Contractor shall be responsible for leading and coordinating the
process of registering and certifying the project with USGBC. This includes but is
not limited to the completion of all letter templates and required documentation, as
well as the submission for certification with USGBC. The Contractor shall determine
the credits and points which will be the best approach to achieve the LEED Silver
certification. The Contractor shall have a LEED Accredited Professional on their team
to lead, manage and coordinate all of the LEED activities. Contractor shall comply
with Air Force Sustainable Design and Development Policy memo dated 31 July 2007,
Guiding Principles for Federal Leadership in High Performance and Sustainable
Buildings, Executive Order 13423 and Energy Policy Act 2005.
4. GEOTECHNICAL AND FOUNDATIONS
4.1 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The Geotechnical support for design documentation shall be written in either English
or metric units, consistent with the RFP requirements for the overall project design.
The RFP geotechnical design requirements contained in the following “Geotechnical and
Foundations” paragraphs and in the provided Appendix A represent minimum requirements
to be used for preparing project design and construction documents.
4.1.1 Conflicts: Where conflict occurs between project-specific Appendix A

requirements and the requirements contained herein-below, the Appendix A requirements
shall govern. The more stringent/conservative of the RFP geotechnical design
requirements, the AFB Facility Design Standard where applicable, the Contractor’s
Final Geotechnical Report recommendations, or the applicable Unified Facility Guide
Specification (UFGS) Section requirements and notes, as approved by the Contracting
Officer, shall govern when preparing the final construction drawings and
specifications. Legible copies of the completed exploration logs and summarized
laboratory test results, and a map showing locations of all explorations, shall be
included with the final construction documents.
4.1.2 Geotechnical Engineering Firm: The Contractor shall secure the services of a
competent and reputable Geotechnical Engineering consulting firm to provide the
geotechnical basis of design for foundations, pavements, retaining walls, utility
earthwork, grading, and all other geotechnical related items. The Geotechnical
Engineering Firm shall be familiar with seismic, geologic and geotechnical conditions,
hazards and issues in the geographic region where the project is located. The
Geotechnical Engineering Firm shall have at least five (5) years of experience in the
region. All geotechnical engineering work products (Report, specifications, details,
etc) shall be reviewed and approved by a Senior Civil or Geotechnical Engineer.
Approving engineers shall affix their stamp indicating professional registration in
the State where the Base is located. Lastly, the firm shall provide all necessary
engineering support during construction.
4.2 EARTHWORK
Material shall be classified in accordance with ASTM D 2488 (visual/manual only)
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 15
and/or ASTM D 2487 (laboratory), and compaction efforts shall be specified by ASTM
standards referenced in the applicable UFGS Section. ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor)
shall be specified for all design and construction compaction testing; ASTM D698
(Standard Proctor) will not be allowed for determining the laboratory moisture-density
relationships. Fill and backfill for buildings, utilities, and paved areas shall be
placed in maximum 8-inch loose lifts when compacted with heavy rollers, and in maximum
4-inch loose lifts when compacted with hand-operated equipment. Borrow material will
be obtained off site and disposal of materials will be off site unless indicated
otherwise by the Contracting Officer’s Representative; see Appendix A for further
detail. All costs in connection with borrow material and disposal of materials shall
be at the contractor's expense. All liability of any nature resulting from borrowed
operations including transportation of, and those resulting from disposal of material
shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
4.3 SOIL TREATMENT
Just prior to placing capillary water barrier below concrete slab on grade, and just
prior to backfilling around concrete or masonry foundations for structures, soil
treatment shall be applied to the prepared subgrade soils. All termiticide and
pesticide applications shall be made by state licensed and certified pest control
personnel and in strict accordance with manufacturer's label instructions. The
contractor shall formulate, treat, store and dispose of the pesticides in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions, and both State and Federal regulations.
4.4 CAPILLARY WATER AND VAPOR BARRIERS
Floor slabs-on-grade of all buildings shall be underlain by a minimum 6-inch (loose

thickness) aggregate capillary barrier consisting of ASTM C 33 Size No. 57 coarse
aggregate or approved equivalent, compacted by at least two passes of a minimum
500-lb vibratory plate compactor.
Floor slabs-on-grade to receive a covering or coating of any kind shall be underlain

by a minimum 20-mil ASTM E 1745 Class A poly sheeting vapor barrier, which shall be
placed on the aggregate capillary barrier as specified in UFGS Section 03 31 00.00 10.
Prior to placing slab reinforcing and concrete, cover the vapor barrier sheeting with
a 2-inch to 3-inch layer of damp concrete sand.
4.5 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS
The contractor shall be responsible for the determination of actual soil conditions
present at the site, and shall be responsible for the final design of appropriate
foundation and pavement system(s). Design shall be based off of the contractor
procured geotechnical investigation. The contractor shall be responsible for
obtaining available utility maps and identifying all known utilities and for
acquiring all required public, private, and/or Base “dig” permits prior to performing
explorations.
4.5.1 Existing Geotechnical Subsurface Information: Results of geotechnical subsurface

investigations performed by the government, if available, are provided in the Appendix
A. The contractor shall be responsible for verifying subsurface conditions on site.
Site conditions encountered differing from the subsurface investigation provided shall
be brought to the attention of the COR for resolution. Preliminary Geotechnical Study
recommendations and existing soils data provided in the Appendix A are for information
only to assist the Contractor with preparation of their bids.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 16
4.5.2 Contractor Performed Subsurface Investigation: The geotechnical investigation

shall include subsurface explorations and appropriate laboratory testing of
representative samples consistent with the minimum requirements specified herein and
as further described in the Appendix A. The Contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer shall
prepare an investigation program to include auger or CPT borings, excavated test pits,
and/or other approved methods appropriate for the materials being investigated and
project conditions. Explorations shall be uniformly spaced beneath proposed
buildings, pavements, utilities, and other critical features, and shall extend to at
least the depths stated in the Appendix A. When not stated, explorations in
unconsolidated materials (i.e. soils) shall extend to at least 10 feet below planned
footing or pile tip elevation but no less than 15 feet below existing ground surface
for buildings, and to at least 4 feet below the estimated pavement subgrade or utility
excavation depth. Greater depths shall be accomplished as determined by the
Contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer. The actual locations of the proposed building(s)
and major project features shall be determined by the Contractor prior to performance
of field work. Date, equipment used, and Firm and operator names shall be recorded on
each log of exploration. Approximate horizontal and vertical locations shall be
recorded on the exploration log, utilizing State Plane Coordinates or other Datum
system as specified in the RFP. The depth to water, when encountered, shall be
recorded on the exploration log at the time when encountered, and at the completion of
the exploration. When auger borings are selected, they shall include Standard
Penetration Testing (SPT) performed in accordance with ASTM D 1586. SPT samples shall
be visually described at 2.5 foot intervals to a depth of 10 feet and at 5 foot
intervals thereafter in accordance with ASTM D-2488. Soil borings shall be backfilled
in accordance with the more strict of local Regulations, Appendix A requirements, or
the following:
a) Each boring shall be measured for depth before it is sealed to ensure freedom
from obstructions that may interfere with effective sealing operations.
b) All borings shall be sealed by backfilling with concrete, grout, neat cement
or a bentonite/cement mixture.
c) All backfill material shall be placed into the borehole from the bottom to the
top by pressure grouting with the positive displacement method (tremie method).
d) Each borehole sealed shall be given time allowing the backfill material to
settle and set in the borehole. If the backfill material settles 2feet or more
below ground surface (BGS) than the contractor shall place more backfill
material, as described above, in the borehole to the top. If the backfill
material is less than 2-feet BGS than the contractor may backfill the borehole
using properly compacted native material.
e) A measurement of the borehole’s theoretical volume, the amount of grout
introduced into the borehole and the depth of the top of the grout or cement
backfill shall be included on the boring log.
The contractor shall obtain soil samples for testing as required for the computation
of bearing capacities, settlement calculations, lateral earth pressure calculations,
temporary and permanent dewatering designs, or for any other purpose as determined by
the Contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer. Testing shall be performed in accordance with
ASTM methods whenever available, or in accordance with recognized and approved
published laboratory methods. Minimum testing of engineering properties shall include
classification in accordance with ASTM D 2487, Modified Proctor in accordance with
ASTM D 1557, and California Bearing Ratio (for project having pavements) in accordance
with ASTM D 1883. Minimum testing for soils chemistry properties shall include pH,
sulfate content, chloride content, and resistivity. Additional testing shall be as
determined by the Contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 17
4.5.3 Soil expansion: The Contractor’s geotechnical engineer is responsible for

evaluating the potential for expansive-type soil and the need to tie door landings
into the building foundation.
4.6 CONTRACTOR’S FINAL GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
The Contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer shall provide a final geotechnical report

complete with recommendations specific to the geotechnical design requirements at the
site. The report shall include complete and legible exploration logs, the results of
laboratory tests, a plan showing the location of each exploration as performed, and
foundation design and site development recommendations. The Contractor’s Geotechnical
Engineer shall use the data from their final geotechnical investigation to prepare the
report and to confirm the specified foundation design and site development
recommendations as described herein.
The Contractor’s final geotechnical report shall, at a minimum, include the

following items:
4.6.1 Previous Construction Activity: A discussion of previous construction

activity should address any existing fills or subsurface openings, if
encountered.
4.6.2 Subsurface Conditions: Subsurface conditions expected at the site shall be

discussed, based upon stratigraphic sequence observed and local geology. Figure(s)
shall be provided displaying exploration data and generalized cross section(s). A
general description of the engineering properties or parameters determined from the
investigation and applied to design recommendations shall be provided. Prevailing
groundwater elevations observed and those recommended for design shall be noted.
4.6.3 Grading Recommendations: Provide grading recommendations taking into

consideration the grading plan for the site. If over excavation of unsuitable
materials and replacement with structural backfill is warranted, provide vertical and
horizontal extent of the over excavation, and a description of materials to be used
for structural backfill.
4.6.4 Compaction Requirements: Provide general criteria for acceptable fill and borrow
material, including recommendations for material usage at the site in regard to
placement and compaction requirements, as well as any recommended treatment (e.g. lime
or cement stabilization) of subgrade and/or fill materials as applicable. Compaction
criteria, including acceptable gradations, moisture control, maximum lift thickness,
compactive effort, and need for proof rolling shall be discussed, including criteria
for both granular and cohesive fill, if applicable. See paragraph 4.2 “EARTHWORK”
herein-before for applicable requirements.
4.6.5 Foundation Design: Provide final recommended foundation types based on local
practice, availability to meet schedule and economics, as well as the ability to carry
the required loading. Discuss the site-specific advantages and disadvantages for
installation of each of the candidate and recommended foundation types at this
specific project site. For additions or other construction adjacent to or near
existing structures, address how existing structures may be affected by new
construction (excavation, vibration, etc.). Include all necessary special requirements
including but not limited to monitoring, under-pinning, structural attachments and/or
seismic separation, and/or special backfill.
For shallow foundations, include net allowable bearing pressures for spread footings
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 18
and mats at the recommended bearing depths, as appropriate for the site. Note whether
any overstressing is allowed under short-term loading such as wind or seismic. Provide
estimated total and differential settlement for foundations using these bearing
pressures. Note factors of safety included or recommended. Provide subgrade modulus
for design of mat foundations. Provide all necessary slab-on-grade design and
construction information (e.g. subgrade modulus, subgrade preparation, capillary water
and vapor barriers, etc). Provide recommendations for resistance to lateral loads,
such as passive earth pressures and sliding friction for the base of foundations.
Provide recommended groundwater level for determination of buoyancy and means to
resist buoyant forces.
For deep foundations, include type (driven pile, drilled caisson, auger-cast pile,
etc), material (wood, concrete, steel, etc), diameter, depth and any recommended
manufacturing and/or installation requirements. Provide allowable design loading
capacities for vertical downward loading, and vertical upward loading for piling, as
appropriate to the site conditions. All factors of safety utilized in developing the
allowable load capacities shall be outlined in detail. Provide design soil profile
information for input into the LPILE Plus (or equivalent) computer program for lateral
loading analysis of deep foundations. Provide recommendations regarding negative skin
friction (down drag) forces acting on the deep foundations as a result of the proposed
site grading operations.
4.6.6 Pavement Subgrade Recommendations: Provide recommendations for flexible and

rigid pavement design(s) including design CBR and modulus of subgrade reaction and
the required material descriptions and compaction effort for subgrade and fill
materials. Guidance shall be offered on the types of base course materials available
in the area and design strengths.
4.6.7 Lateral Earth Pressures: Design lateral earth pressures shall be provided for
below-grade vertical walls of both the flexible and rigid type. It is preferred that
these earth pressures be provided as equivalent fluid pressure values, however,
equations may be developed for the same. Any assumptions relating to the construction
method or type of backfill shall be outlined in detail; e.g., granular, cohesive,
drained or undrained conditions. Active, passive, and at-rest coefficients used in
determining these pressures shall be noted.
4.6.8 Existing Fill (If present): Discuss the engineering properties of any existing
fills in regard to foundation design, including any necessary treatment/compaction or
removal and replacement.
4.6.9 Slope Stability and Excavations: The report shall address the recommended
inclination of both temporary excavation and permanent slopes. OSHA soil types shall
be identified and temporary slopes required for excavation and the need for sheeting
and shoring shall be addressed. Major deep structures or significant grading will
addressed in Appendix A if required.
4.6.10 Seismic Hazards: Perform a review of geologic information, and provide a

discussion of site seismicity and its impact on the proposed development. Include
a description of mapped faults which may impact the Site, the IBC Site Soil Class,
and liquefaction potential with applicable recommendations.
4.6.11 Excavation Requirements: A section of the final geotechnical report shall

address the nature and suitability of the soils and rock which may be exposed during
foundation excavation and site grading. The effort and type of equipment utilized to
perform excavations is dependent upon the size and depth of the excavation as well as
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 19
the nature of the materials that will be encountered. Thus, the discussion shall be
in regard to the structures described, as well as utility trenches.
4.6.12 Dewatering: The report shall determine and fully describe any necessary
temporary and/or permanent project dewatering requirements. If temporary construction
dewatering is anticipated due to but not limited to perched water or a high water
table, the Contractor shall prepare and present a dewatering plan. The Contractor and
their Geotechnical Engineer shall be responsible for securing all the required
information necessary for the design of the system during the final geotechnical
investigation. Any necessary permanent dewatering and/or foundation drainage
requirements shall be fully detailed and specified in the final construction
documents. Non-gravity (pumped) systems shall include a comprehensive Operation &
Maintenance Plan.
4.6.13 Expansive, Dispersive, Liquefiable or Collapsing Conditions: An evaluation of

the expansive (swelling), dispersive, liquefiable, or collapsing nature of subgrade
materials shall be made, and any necessary special design features required to resist
or reduce these tendencies shall be described in the report and incorporated into the
foundation and structural design.
4.6.14 Evaluation of Karst or Sink Hole Potential: An evaluation of the potential of

subgrade materials to develop karst features, solution channels or sink hole
formations shall be made, and any necessary special design features required to
resist or reduce these tendencies shall be discussed. The Contractor’s Geotechnical
Engineer shall define and discuss the relative risk for sinkhole development and/or
the presence of voids within the subsurface materials encountered at the Project
Site.
4.6.15 Corrosion Potential: The final geotechnical report shall include all pH tests,
salinity tests, resistivity measurements, etc., required to design corrosion control
and grounding systems. The raw field data shall be provided in the final geotechnical
report. The contractor shall design all corrosion control and grounding systems
required for the project. Provide recommended concrete cover and cement type for
construction.
4.6.16 Storm Water Retention: As a part of the contractor’s final geotechnical

investigation, the contractor shall be responsible for securing all the required
information necessary, e.g. boring and soil infiltrometer test, as applicable for the
design of storm water retention ponds and drainage swales in accordance with State
and local stormwater regulations.
4.7 SPECIFICATIONS
The Contractor shall edit and submit the following UFGS specification sections
at a minimum as applicable:
02 32 00 Subsurface Drilling, Sampling and Testing (if required by the

Appendix A)
31 00 00 Earthwork
31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing
31 31 16 Soil Treatment for Subterranean Termite Control
32 11 23 Aggregate Base Course (omit “GCA” requirements)
31 6X XX (choose appropriate Piling specification, if applicable)
5. SITEWORK
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 20
Refer to Section 2.10 for all codes and references.
5.2.1 The site work design required for this project shall include, but may not
necessarily be limited to the items listed within this section.
5.2.2 Demolition and Removal: The Contractor shall provide surveying as necessary to
locate work items prior to initiating demolition work. All demolition of site work
shown on the plans is approximate. Demolition limits shall be determined by the
contractor. Erosion and sediment control Best Management Practices (BMPs) shall be in
place and approved by the Contracting Officer’s Representative prior to initiating
demolition work. BMPs shall be maintained through the entirety of the project. The
topographic survey drawing provided in the RFP presents existing conditions as known
at the time of the survey. All demolition debris shall be removed from the site. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all disposal permits and regulation requirements.
5.3 CIVIL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
5.3.1 General: A conceptual project site plan has been provided for the Child
Development Center (CDC) facility; see Appendix A for further detail. Contractor
shall provide a complete set of construction plans and specifications signed and
sealed by a civil engineer registered in the state of the facility. Contractor
shall be responsible for determining the finished floor elevation, and final
location of, but not limited to, site grading and drainage, fire/emergency access
drives, service and delivery access drives, sidewalks, parking, drop-off lane, and
trash and recycle dumpster pads.
5.3.2 Handicapped Access: Ramps shall be provided for handicapped access, if

necessary due to grades. The site and facility access for the physically disabled
shall be as required by ABA.
5.3.3 Termite Control: Soil treatment for subterranean termite control shall be
provided as necessary.
5.3.4 Facility Sign: Facility sign shall be provided in this contract. Sign shall
indicate “Child Development Center” and be approved by the Contracting Officer’s
Representative. Sign shall abide by Base Architectural Compatibility standards; see
Appendix A for further detail.
5.3.5 Force Protection: The Contractor shall at a minimum, incorporate Force

Protection for the CDC Facility per criteria based on a "Primary Gathering"
classification in UFC 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings.
This shall include, but not be limited to, setback distance referenced herein.
Additional forms of force protection may be required by Base; see Appendix A.
5.3.6 Barrier Gate: Remote operated barrier gate shall be installed at the drop-off
lane access points; entrance and exit, service drive access points; kitchen and
mechanical, and fire/emergency access points a minimum of 82 feet away from the face
of the facility. Gate arm shall extend full width of drives. Gate arm is not
required to be crash rated. Alternate forms of access control may be required by
Base; see Appendix A for further detail.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 21
5.3.7 Bicycle Rack: A bicycle rack shall be provided near the facility. Bicycle rack
must fully comply with Base Architectural Compatibility standards; see Appendix A for
further detail. Contractor is responsible for working with the Base CDC Director to
place the bicycle rack in the appropriate location.
5.3.8 Sidewalks: Pedestrian sidewalks are required for the proposed facility. A
sidewalk shall connect the parking lot to the facility entrance. Sidewalk shall be
provided for emergency evacuation. Sidewalk shall be provided for access to exterior
mechanical, electrical, communication, and other service rooms. A functional system
of walks connecting operational areas, parking areas, streets and other walks as
pedestrian traffic demands shall be maintained. Walks subject to use by the physically
handicapped meeting accessibility requirements shall be maintained. Minimum walk width
of five (5) feet shall be maintained. Sidewalk directly outside of and adjacent to
courtyard exit door shall be increased as necessary to accommodate door swing. Walks
shall be concrete unless otherwise directed.
5.3.8.1 Pedestrian Evacuation Sidewalk Route: Paved gathering points a minimum of 75

feet away from any point on the facility shall be provided for fire/emergency
evacuation. Sidewalk shall be provided from the main entrance, corridor exits,
activity room exterior doors and outside of outdoor play environment fences. Sidewalk
shall also be provided through the outdoor play environments to personnel gate.
Emergency evacuation paved gathering points shall be sized as follow: a minimum of one
(1) square foot shall be allowed per child, four (4) square foot shall be allowed per
teacher/staff, and 20 square foot shall be allowed for wheeled vehicles; cribs and/or
buggies. All under-two rooms; infant and pre-toddler, use wheeled vehicles for
evacuation and use two (2) per room.
Evacuation route shall not require the crossing of emergency vehicle access drives,
parking lots, or streets. Sidewalks shall accommodate a minimum radius of 10 feet to
allow for crib evacuation. Curb cuts a minimum of 44 inches in width shall be
installed as necessary to allow for crib evacuation. Reference drawings for
clarification. A sidewalk shall be provided from the evacuation pad where the
infant/pretoddlers will be taken to an area where these children can be picked up in a
vehicle. They are transported by cribs so will need a clear smooth path.
Reference electrical section for site lighting requirements of evacuation route. Size
of the evacuation pad is dependent upon how many children will be taken to that
location. The Contractor shall work with the Base CDC to determine the appropriate
size for the pads.
5.3.9 Vehicular Circulation: A one-way dedicated drop-off lane shall be provided as

dictated by Base requirements. Direction of travel shall accommodate exit from
passenger side of vehicle such that passengers shall not be required to pass in front
of or behind the vehicle to access the entrance walk. Parent parking shall be oriented
for one-way travel. Reference drawings for clarification. Drop-off lane is optional;
see Appendix A for further detail as to whether this is included in the base bid
requirements.
5.3.10 Optional - Drop-off Lane: Drop-off lane shall not permit parking or use by
parents. Drop-off lane is for staff and base use only. Drop-off lane shall be a
minimum of 20 foot wide to accommodate fire/emergency vehicles. See Appendix A for
further detail as to whether this is included in the base bid requirements.
5.3.11 Parking Lots: The parking lot shall have a minimum of 22 foot wide drive aisles
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 22
for two-way traffic and a minimum of 12 foot wide drive aisles for one-way traffic. A
minimum of 82 feet between any parking and the CDC Facility shall be maintained.
Parent parking shall be angled parking. Each parent parking space shall discharge
directly onto sidewalk that is connected to the main sidewalk entrance to eliminate
need to cross drive aisles to enter the CDC Facility. Staff parking shall have the
option of being configured for 90 degree parking.
5.3.11.1 Parking Spaces: Parking spaces for parent and staff shall be provided.
130 spaces are required, with a minimum of 16 parent spaces. If facility requires
less than the Standard number of activity rooms and facilitates less than 304
children, the Base shall determine the required number of staff parking spaces.
Add additional spaces to staff parking at a rate of 1 space per every 12 children.
Parent spaces shall be calculated at a rate of 1 space per every 20 children. As
necessary, see Appendix A for further detail for final number of spaces required.
Handicapped parking spaces shall be provided at a rate that meets Base standards.
5.3.11.2 Parking Lot Signage: Handicapped spaces shall be signed and marked per Base
standards; see Appendix A for further detail.
5.3.11.3 Parking Lot Pavement Design: The design of the parking lot pavement shall
be accomplished by the Contractor and shall be in compliance with Base and State
DOT standards; see Appendix A for further detail. The design life of pavement
shall be for 20 years.
5.3.12 Fire/Emergency Access Drive: Fire/emergency access shall be provided around the
facility. The design of the fire/emergency access drive shall be accomplished by the
Contractor and shall be in accordance with UFC 3-600-01 and NFPA 101.
5.3.12.1 At least one all-weather fire/emergency ground access shall be provided to

allow emergency vehicles to have unimpeded access to the building. The all-weather
ground access shall be paved, start from the road, and terminate no farther than 33
feet from the building. Existing roadways around the site shall be used to the
greatest extent possible when evaluating the fire/emergency access to the site. The
drop-off lane shall be the access drive for the main entrance of the building. Where
no drop-off lane is constructed, the parent parking aisle closest to the facility
shall be the access drive for the main entrance of the building. The access points
shall be coordinated with the Base fire department. Drives shall be at least 20 feet
wide and one shall be no less than 150 feet from fire hydrant connection. The
geometric layout shall be maintained to accommodate a fire truck with the following
characteristics:
• Length: 45 feet
• Width: 10.2 feet
• Turning Radius: 33 feet
5.3.12.2 Fire/Emergency Access Drive Pavement Design: The design of the

fire/emergency access drive pavement structure shall be accomplished by the
Contractor and shall be in accordance with Base standards, State DOT standards,
UFC 3-600-01 and NFPA 101; see Appendix A for further detail for Base specific
standards. Pavement structure shall be designed to accommodate an 80,000 pound
vehicle and design life of 20 years.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 23
5.3.13 Service Access Drive: Service access drives shall be provided for service and
delivery vehicles, and shall be separate from public areas. Service and delivery
vehicle access drives must take into account needs to deliver food to the kitchen,
occasional supplies to the facility, and provide access to major mechanical equipment
pad. Geometry of the drive shall be designed to accommodate the needs of Base specific
vehicles. A back-up spur for drives that exceed 100 feet in length shall be provided.
Service area shall be screened by natural or artificial means from view from
pedestrians, vehicles, and the outdoor play environment.
The design of the service access drive pavement structure shall be accomplished by
the Contractor and shall be in compliance with Base and State DOT standards; see
Appendix A for further detail for Base specific standards. Pavement structure
shall be designed to accommodate the dimensions and frequency of Base specific
vehicles and a design life of 20 years.
5.3.14 Pavement Markings: Pavement markings shall adhere to Base requirements; see
Appendix A for further detail.
5.3.15 Trash and Recycle Dumpsters: Contractor shall be responsible for the final
location of trash and recycle dumpsters. Dumpsters shall be accessible to kitchen and
service area. A minimum of 82 feet between the dumpsters and the CDC Facility shall
be maintained.
The design of the trash and recycle dumpster pavement structure shall be
accomplished by the Contractor. Pavement structure shall be designed to
accommodate the dimensions and frequency of Base specific vehicles and a design
life of 20 years. Pavement shall not be asphalt concrete.
5.3.15.2 Trash and Recycle Dumpster Enclosures: A screen wall enclosure shall be
provided by the contractor. The screen walls shall visually match the Base design
guide and be constructed of materials to match the new facility exterior walls. See
architectural section for further requirements.
5.3.16 Curbing: Curbing design when required for driveway and parking lots shall
comply with Base standards and with ABA; see Appendix A for further detail for Base
specific standards.
5.3.17 Fencing: Fence shall be provided at the exterior perimeter of the outdoor play
environments. See Appendix A for further detail for any additional requirements.
Fencing shall be black or dark green vinyl coated chain link per UFC 4-470-14; 6-5.1.
Exposed galvanized wire, which has a highly institutional appearance, is not allowed.
Fence shall be a minimum height of six (6) feet. Fence posts shall be installed to
face the outside of the outdoor play environment. Woven end of fence shall be
installed on top with the links not exceeding the top rail. Top rail fence covers
shall encase the top of the fence. A means shall be employed to ensure that no gap is
between the bottom of the fence and the ground. Spaces between fence components and
facility shall not exceed 3.5 inches. No more than two (2) threads of the inside bolt
shall be visible. When attaching the fence fabric the head of bolt shall face the
inside of the outdoor play environment.
A double wide gate a minimum clear width of 12 feet wide shall be installed for
maintenance and emergency vehicle access into each outdoor play environment.
Contractor shall coordinate emergency vehicle access with the Base fire department.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 24
Personnel gates a minimum of 44 inches wide shall be installed allowing access out of
each outdoor play environment. The personnel gates shall swing out and shall be
outfitted with handles that allow opening the gate in one motion. Handles shall not
exceed 48 inches in height above the ground.
Use bollards, raised planters, or other devices to protect outdoor play environments
where located adjacent to access drives.
Where additional force protection measures are required, use knees walls or other Base
approved devices to protect outdoor play environments; see Appendix A for further
detail. Berms and ditches shall not be permitted.
5.4 GRADING
5.4.1 Permits: Erosion and sediment control BMP’s shall be in place and approved by
the Contracting Officer’s Representative prior to initiating any work. Dewatering
projects that discharge to surface waters or storm water systems are required to
operate under the coverage of NPDES and/or similar permits. The Contractor shall
obtain the necessary permit(s) for any groundwater discharge off site and shall
operate in compliance with the permit. See 6.4 Utilities, Permits for further
information.
5.4.2 Access Drives: Grades for all access drives shall be as outlined in TM 5-822-2
and shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Centerline grade changes in excess
of 1% will be accomplished by means of vertical curves. The length of vertical curves
will be determined in accordance with Site Planning and Design. Profiles are mandatory
for vertical control of centerline gradients. Drives will be shown by the use of half-
plan/half-profile type drawings.
5.4.3 Walks: The grade of walks shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Steps
in walks are not acceptable. Walks and ramps serving facilities that are to be
accessible to and usable by the physically handicapped shall meet all accessibility
requirements.
5.4.4 Parking Lots: The grade of parking lots shall be in accordance with UFC 3-210-
02, POV Site Circulation and Parking and shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
5.4.5 Outdoor Play Environments: Grades for all Outdoor Play Environments shall be in
accordance with UFC 3-210-06A, Site Planning and Design, UFC 4-740-14 Child
Development Centers, and as indicated in the Outdoor Play Environment section.
Positive drainage must allow water to drain away quickly after rain events.
5.4.6 Finish Grade Contours and Spot Elevations: Finish grade contours at one foot
intervals and spot elevations shall be provided by the Contractor to construct all
site development features to elevations within the above grading criteria and
tolerances as specified in the guide specifications. Spot elevations on the drawings
should be sufficient so that interpolation between contours is not required for
structures, grading or paved areas; some examples are: corners of paved areas, low
points, high points, flow lines of swells or ditches, changes in degree of slope and
grading at corners of the facility to ensure positive drainage away from the facility.
The use of cut or fill symbols in lieu of finish grade contours is not permitted.
5.5 SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 25
01 57 20.00 Environmental Protection

01 57 23.00 10 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures (if not included)
02 41 00 Demolition (as applicable)
32 10 00 Bituminous Concrete Pavement or
32 12 16 Hot-Mix Bituminous Pavement (as applicable)
32 13 14 Concrete Pavements for Small Projects
32 16 13 Concrete Sidewalks and Curbs and Gutters
32 17 24.00 10 Pavement Markings
32 31 13 Chain Link Fence and Gates
6. UTILITIES
6.2 GENERAL UTILITY DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The utility design required for this project shall include, but may not
necessarily be limited to the items listed within this section.
6.2.1 Demolition and Removal: The survey information provided presents existing
conditions and locations of existing structures and utilities at the time the survey
was performed. Utilities not shown on the plans may be present on-site and it is the
responsibility of the Contractor to obtain information for these utilities. The
Contractor shall provide surveying as necessary to locate the utility items prior to
initiating demolition work. All demolition of utilities shown on the plans is
approximate. Limits of demolition shall be determined by the Contractor to ensure
utilities remain operable throughout construction. Abandoned or existing utility lines
found to be under the facility footprint or interfere with the project shall be
coordinated with the Contracting Officer’s Representative.
6.2.2 Demo Permitting: The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining a Base
digging permit prior to demolition of any utility or excavation on site. The
Contractor may utilize the utilities during construction operations as approved by
Base; see Appendix A for further detail. Erosion and sediment control BMP’s shall be
in place and approved by the Contracting Officer’s Representative prior to initiating
demolition work. All demolition debris shall be removed from the site. The Contractor
shall be responsible for all disposal permits and regulation requirements.
6.3 UTILITIES
6.3.1 Utility Layout: Government supplied surveys and construction documents related
to the location of utilities shall not represent actual installed conditions. The
Contractor shall verify actual locations of all placed utilities and shall coordinate
with the Government regarding any future planned utility installations that affect the
work. Coordination of all site work on the project, including utility work, is the
responsibility of the Contractor. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm the
specific locations of all existing utilities prior to commencing work. All utilities
shall be installed as shown on plans. With the exception of main storm drain
culverts, placing utilities and culverts under existing roads shall be by jack and
bore unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative. All
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 26
sanitary sewer, storm water, water supply, gas, and electrical construction shall be
in strict compliance with local and Base requirements. The Contractor shall obtain
all required Base, City, County and State permits for installation and operation of
all utilities. Any anticipated utility outages shall be coordinated with the
Contracting Officer’s Representative at least 72 hours in advance. Any utilities or
equipment that needs to be relocated to construct the facility shall be accomplished
in such a manner as to minimize the impact on the existing facilities.
No physical connections shall exist between sewer and water supply systems. Unless
otherwise required by the District Design Manual:
• Sewer and water lines shall be at least 10 feet apart horizontally, except where
the bottom of the water pipe is at least 12 inches above the top of the sewer;
the horizontal spacing may be a minimum of six (6) feet.
• Where conditions require a sewer to cross above a water line, the sewer pipe
shall be concrete encased for 10 feet each side of the crossing
• The cover for pipes will be at least three (3) feet deep where possible to
protect the pipe from superimposed live loads of ordinary traffic. Depth may be
greater if required by local codes and agencies.
6.3.2 Utility Connections: All utility connections shall be coordinated through

the Contracting Officer's Representative.
6.3.3 Device Location: Backflow prevention valves, post indicator valves,

transformers, electric switches, telephone/cable boxes, manholes, etc., shall be
placed in locations not immediately apparent to the facility users or personnel
passing by the site. New utility lines shall not be located within five feet of the
footprint of any known future facility. Surface features including storm drainage
inlets, utility clean-outs, valve covers, and manhole covers shall not be located in
the outdoor play environments.
6.3.4 Marking of Utility Lines: Every linear foot of underground metallic piping shall
be identified with plastic marking tape specifying the type of pipe buried under it.
Every linear foot of underground non-metallic piping shall be identified with metallic
tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of underground
utilities. The metallic tape shall be detectable by electronic detection instruments
and shall indicate the type of pipe buried under it. The tape shall be buried 12
inches above the pipe.
Tape Color Utility

Red Electric
Orange Telephone, telegraph, television and communications
Blue Water systems
Green Sewer systems
Yellow Gas or other dangerous materials
6.3.5 Metering: Meter all utilities (gas, water, and electric, as applicable) to each
facility. For Government owned utilities, install meters that are wireless data
transmission capable as well as have a continuous manual reading option. All meters
will be capable of at least hourly data logging and transmission and provide
consumption data for gas, water, and electricity. All meters shall be able to
communicate with the base utility monitoring control service. Gas and electric
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 27
meters will also provide demand readings based on consumption over a maximum of any
15 minute period. Configure all meters to transmit at least daily even if no
receiver for the data is currently available at the time of project acceptance. For
privatized utilities, coordinate with the privatization utilities for the proper
meter base and meter installation.
6.3.6 Road Crossings: Roads and driveways shall not be crossed by open cut unless
approved by the Contracting Officer’s Representative. If the open cut method is
performed, one lane of the street shall remain open to traffic at all times.
Contractor shall provide steel matting sufficient to carry traffic loading over the
excavated area. Utility structures shall be designed to accommodate the traffic
loadings for the area in which the structures are placed. Requests for lane closures
for open cuts shall be made in writing prior to commencement of work within a number
of calendar days to be determined by Base.
6.3.7 Excavations: All excavations, trenches, open manholes, etc., will be properly
shored, braced, barricaded or guarded. The Contractor shall provide barricades and
maintain warning lights or other illumination from sunset to sunup at all excavations
that are adjacent to pedestrian or vehicle thoroughfares or as directed but the
Contracting Officer’s Representative.
6.3.8 Safety: Contractor personnel will not enter manholes, tunnels, tanks, or
confined spaces until such entry complies with the requirements of OSHA. Government
personnel will not enter manholes, tunnels, tanks, or confined spaces until a confined
space entry permit has been obtained from a government representative.
6.4 PERMITS
Permits required for this project shall include, but may not necessarily be limited to
the items listed within this section. Any permit work done by the Contractor shall be
at no additional cost to the Government.
6.4.1 Storm water Management Permit: Party responsible for storm water management and
storm drainage system permitting and plan review is located in the permit matrix of
the Appendix A for further detail.
6.4.2 Sanitary Sewer Permit: Party responsible for sanitary sewer system permitting
and plan review is located in the permit matrix of the Appendix A.
6.4.3 National Pollutant Discharge Elimination Systems (NPDES) Permit: Party

responsible for NPDES permitting and plan review is located in the permit matrix of
the Appendix A.
The Contractor shall develop and implement a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan
(SWPPP) to be in compliance with the permit. The (SWPPP) shall be prepared in
accordance with and meet the intent of the latest version of the National Pollutant
Discharge Elimination Systems Permit (NPDES). The plan shall be submitted to the
Contracting Officer’s Representative to be reviewed by the Base Civil Engineering
Squadron. The Contractor shall implement, maintain, and update the SWPPP, as required,
throughout the project until a Notice of Termination for permit coverage is submitted
upon final stabilization of the project site. The Contractor shall maintain a copy of
the SWPPP on-site at all times during construction and shall make the plan and all
supporting documents and reports available for inspection upon request by the
Government and/or Regulatory Agency.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 28
Upon completion and acceptance of the SWPPP the contractor shall complete and submit a
Notice of Intent (NOI) to the NPDES Stormwater Notices Center to obtain permit
coverage. The Contractor shall clearly define the requirements for the NPDES permit.
Site plans shall conform to the applicable requirements of an NPDES permit by
incorporating designs that control runoff and erosion. The Contractor must include
with the NOI the appropriate processing fee payable to the Department of Environmental
Protection.
No site work will commence until the NOI has been submitted and accepted by the State.
A copy of the NOI and a brief description of the project shall be posted at the
construction site in a prominent place for public viewing.
Upon satisfactory completion of final stabilization of the project site and acceptance
by the Government, the Contractor shall submit a Notice of Termination of permit
coverage to the NPDES Stormwater Notices Center for the project.
6.4.4 Air Quality Permit: Party responsible for air quality permitting and plan
review is located in the permit matrix of the Appendix A, if applicable.
6.4.5 Above Ground Storage Tanks (AGST): Party responsible for ABST permitting and
plan review is located in the permit matrix of the Appendix A, if applicable.
6.4.6 Drinking Water Permit: Party responsible for drinking water permitting and plan
review is located in the permit matrix of the Appendix A.
6.4.7 Clean Water Act: Party responsible for Clean Water Act permitting and plan
review is located in the permit matrix of the Appendix A.
6.5 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM AND STORMWATER MANAGEMENT
6.5.1 Design: The Contractor shall design and construct the new storm drainage system.
This system shall be designed and constructed to, but may not necessarily be limited
to, the items listed within this section. The Contractor shall evaluate the flow of
storm water runoff to and from the site and insure that the flow of water will be
properly moved from the site to the stormwater sewer system.
The design shall be based on a 10-year frequency with ”no ponding.” The CDC Facility
shall be designed so that the finished floor elevation (FFE) is above the 100-year
flood elevation.
The storm drainage system pipe shall be designed for the anticipated traffic loadings.
The roof drainage system shall drain to roof drain pipe(s) and underground into the
storm drainage system. Profiles shall be required for the underground storm drainage
systems.
6.5.2 Layout: The drainage system layout shall be designed to best meet the drainage
requirements of the facility. All low points in grade have an inlet as to avoid
ponding water. The system shall take into consideration topography, ultimate
development of drainage area, possible future extension, outfall locations, and
coordination with existing drainage systems and other existing or future underground
utilities.
6.5.3 Street Drainage: Street drainage shall be accomplished by the use of curb and
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 29
gutter and curb inlets. Curb gaps will be considered in areas where roadside ditches
are used. The center one-third of the street should not convey runoff during the
passing of the design storm. Inverted crown sections for the streets shall not be used
without prior approval. Curb inlets should not be located in the radius of street
intersections, at curb returns, or where pedestrian traffic is most likely to occur.
6.5.4 Stormwater Manholes: Storm water manholes shall be provided at junctions of

gravity pipes and at each change in pipe direction, size or slope. Manholes shall be
located in areas that are readily accessible for operation and maintenance purposes.
A steel ladder shall be provided where the depth of a manhole exceeds 12 feet.
Manhole covers shall be level with pavement or two (2) inches about grade in grassy
areas, and shall be cast iron and have the word “STORM” marked on them. Manhole
structure, frames and covers shall meet anticipated vehicle loadings. Contractor shall
provide detail to Contracting Officer’s Representative for approval.
6.5.5 Underground Systems: Profiles of pipes shall show all existing and new
underground utility crossings and pertinent surface features.
6.5.6 Sizing of Inlets: The design of inlets shall in accordance with “Procedure for
Design of Storm Drainage Systems for Other than Airfields” and State DOT Standards,
whichever is most stringent.
6.5.7 Sizing of Pipes: New underground storm drainage pipes shall sized using the
“Procedure for Design of Storm Drainage Systems for Other than Airfields.” The
Contractor shall verify that pipes are properly sized for all piping materials
included in the project specifications taking into account the coefficient of friction
(n) that varies with material type. Separate backwater computations should be
performed for each pipe material to ensure that pipe sizes are compatible with
material options. Variations in pipe sizes required by such computations shall be
indicated on the plans.
6.6 WASTEWATER
6.6.1 General: The Contractor shall design and construct a new wastewater removal
system for the new facility. The wastewater system shall be designed and constructed
to, but may not necessarily be limited to, the items listed within this section.
The Contractor shall construct the wastewater system within the tolerances of the
state and local regulations and shall obtain all required permits for construction.
The system shall provide a minimum of one lateral for the new facility with a
cleanout provided at the entrance of the lateral to the facility. New sanitary sewer
lines shall be laid on adequate slopes in order to obtain the proper cleansing
velocities.
6.6.2 Wastewater Collection and Conveyance System: The contractor shall comply with
state and local regulations that apply, shall be compatible with the wastewater to be
conveyed and the materials specified shall withstand the effects of the wastewater and
not deteriorate as a result of pollutants in the wastewater.
6.6.3 Wastewater Piping: Sanitary Sewer lines shall be tested for leakage by low
pressure air testing, infiltration tests or exfiltration tests.
6.6.4 Sanitary Sewer Manholes: Sanitary Sewer Manholes shall be provided at junctions
of gravity sewers and at each change in pipe direction, size or slope. Manholes shall
be located in areas that are readily accessible for operation and maintenance
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 30
purposes. A steel ladder shall be provided where the depth of a manhole exceeds 12
feet. Manhole covers shall be level with pavement or two (2) inches above grade in
grassy areas and shall be cast iron and have the word “SEWER” marked on them. Manhole
structure, frames and covers shall meet anticipated vehicle loadings. Contractor shall
provide detail to Contracting Officer’s Representative for approval. No sanitary
sewer manholes are allowed within the limits of outdoor play environments.
6.6.5 Connections to Manholes and Lift Stations: Flexible manhole pipe connectors
shall be used at all connections to new or existing manholes and/or lift stations.
The connectors shall meet ASTM C-923 requirements.
6.6.6 Grease Interceptor: Contractor to provide and install a grease interceptor for
the kitchen. See plumbing section for further requirements.
6.7 WATER
6.7.1 General: Contractor shall design and construct a new water supply and fire
protection systems. These systems shall be designed and constructed to, but may not
necessarily be limited to, the items listed within this section.
The Contractor shall provide water service lines, water distribution lines (as
required) and connection to the existing water mains. The water utility facilities
shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the criteria contained herein.
The design of the water distribution mains and service lines shall provide an
adequate quantity of water at sufficient pressure for domestic and fire suppression
use. It is anticipated that the Contractor will connect the new water lines to the
existing water distribution system and that sufficient pressure and quantity are
available for domestic and fire protection uses. The Contractor shall determine
minimum pressures required in accordance with applicable plumbing and fire protection
criteria. Facility supply lines shall be sized to meet peak demands.
The Contractor shall coordinate construction connections and water meter

installations with regulatory authority(ies). The Contractor is responsible for
all necessary connections, permits, and fees required to tie into the water
system.
6.7.2 Meters: Potable domestic water service lines shall be equipped with suitable
meters. See plumbing section for water metering requirements. Metering of fire
service and fire suppression water lines is not required, unless specified otherwise
in Appendix A.
6.7.3 Valves: Curb stops or valves shall be installed near the point of connection to
the main and on both the inlet and outlet sides of the water meter and backflow
preventer. Valve connections shall be as required for the piping in which they are
installed. Flanges shall not be buried.
6.7.4 Backflow Preventer: Provide a backflow preventer on fire protection and

domestic water service lines. The domestic water backflow preventer shall be outside
the facility and screened from public view. The fire protection backflow preventer
shall be inside the facility. See the Mechanical portion of this specification for
all backflow prevention device requirements.
6.8 FIRE PROTECTION WATER
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 31
6.8.1 General: The site fire protection system shall be designed in accordance with
UFC 3-600-01. The Contractor shall connect the fire protection water to the water
distribution system at the site. A fire flow test shall be performed by the Contractor
on the nearest fire hydrant to the project site. The Contractor shall provide the
adequate water flow and pressure for the interior and exterior (hose stream) demand
for fire protection of the CDC Facility. Fire hydrant connection shall be no less than
150 feet from fire/emergency vehicle access points.
6.8.2 Fire Hydrants: New hydrants shall be served by the base domestic water
distribution system. The contractor shall provide fire hydrants as required by UFC 3-
600-01. Fire hydrants shall be compatible with existing equipment in use at the Base.
Hydrants shall be painted the installation's standard colors as directed by the
Contracting Officer’s Representative. Fire hydrants located in areas of vehicular
traffic shall be protected by bollards.
6.9 GAS SYSTEM DESIGN (If Applicable; See Appendix A for further detail)
6.9.1 General: The contractor shall provide a gas distribution system complete with
a meter outside the facility, connected to the existing Base gas distribution
system, and constructed in accordance with local codes, utility company and
installation requirements. The contractor shall coordinate all taps to existing gas
mains and the installation of service lines up to the regulator on the gas meter
with the Base Civil Engineering Office.
If connecting to existing steel piping system, provision shall be made to ensure that
the integrity of the cathodic protection is not compromised. Shutoff valves shall be
provided on the exterior of the facility. A gas regulator shall be provided located
at least 15 ft from the air conditioning system equipment. The facility service
entrance shall be installed at a height sufficient to allow for installation of the
gas meter.
6.9.2 Drips: Drips shall be installed at the low points, immediately following
reduction from high pressure to medium pressure (at supply points) and at occasional
low points throughout the system to provide for blowing out the lines.
6.9.3 Valves: Plug valves shall be installed so that interruptions to service

can be confined in the facility.
6.9.4 Service Lines: Lines shall be placed with a minimum of three (3) feet of earth
cover, and shall not be placed under any facility. Protective casings shall be
provided to protect the lines from superimposed street or heavy traffic loads.
6.9.5 Testing: Prove that the entire system of gas mains and service lines is gas-
tight by an air test, in accordance with ASME B 31.8, Gas Transmission and
Distribution Piping Systems. The test shall continue for at least 24 hours between
initial and final readings of pressure and temperature.
6.10 SPECIFICATIONS
02 41 00 Demolition
33 11 00 Water Distribution
33 30 00 Sanitary Sewers
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 32
33 40 01 Storm Drainage System

33 51 00.00 20 Natural Gas Distribution (as applicable)
33 51 01.00 10 Gas Piping System
7. LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION
7.2 GENERAL LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The landscape and irrigation design required for this project shall include, but
may not necessarily be limited to the items listed within this section.
The Contractor shall provide layout surveying as necessary to locate the new landscape
and irrigation items prior to initiating demolition work. The survey drawing provided
in the RFP presents existing topographic conditions. Erosion and sediment control Best
Management Practices (BMPs) shall be in place and approved by the Contracting
Officer’s Representative prior to initiating demolition work. BMPs shall be maintained
through the entirety of the project. All demolition debris shall be removed from the
site. The Contractor shall be responsible for all disposal permits and regulations
requirements.
7.3 LANDSCAPE FEATURES
Contractor shall be responsible for the landscape design, and shall be in accordance
with Base standards. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper care and watering
of grass, shrubs, trees and ground cover from the beginning of the operation and
continuing until the Government accepts the facility. Shrubs, trees, ground cover and
sod shall require a one year warranty. Thorny vegetation, poisonous vegetation,
vegetation with berries, and artificial turf shall not be permitted.
7.4 SOD/SEED
Turf preparation shall include eradication of unwanted vegetation and the use of a
pre-emergent granular herbicide. Provide for a soil test that includes pH, potassium,
phosphorus, calcium, magnesium, nematode count, and soil amendment recommendations (N-
P-K). Fertilizer and other soil amendments shall be applied as recommended in the soil
test to provide healthy sod. The area within the limits of construction shall present
a neat and finished appearance. Artificial turf shall not be permitted.
7.5 LANDSCAPE PLANTINGS
7.5.1 Existing Vegetation: Contractor shall maintain as much of the existing

vegetation as possible. Vegetation to stay shall be protected during
construction.
7.5.2 Plant Bed Preparation: Contractor shall include eradication of unwanted

vegetation and the use of a pre-emergent granular herbicide in plant bed
preparation.
Topsoil shall be from 5-10 percent organic matter with a maximum particle size of
¾ inch and maximum of 3 percent retained on the ¼ inch screen. Planting soil shall
be 100 percent on-site top soil.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 33
Roll type polypropylene weed control fabric shall be provided that is woven and
needle punched. Weed fabric shall be 99 percent opaque with a minimum weight of 5
ounces per square yard and minimum thickness of 20 mils.
7.5.3 New Vegetation: Quality plant material shall be as specified by the American
Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI 260.1. Thorny vegetation, poisonous vegetation,
and vegetation with berries shall not be permitted.
7.6 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
7.6.1 This project shall include, where required, a complete operating landscape
irrigation system where plants, shrubs and grassed areas are located.
7.6.2 Outdoor Play Environments: An irrigation system is required in the outdoor play
environments. Irrigation water shall be potable. Sprinkler heads shall be flush with
the ground surface when not in use.
7.6.3 If it is determined than an irrigation system is needed outside of the outdoor

play environments, the system shall connect to the base water distribution system,
stormwater collection basins or irrigation well.
7.6.4 System Design and Components: The piping design and layout shall be coordinated
with the landscaping plan to provide adequate irrigation requirements/coverage to
protect and maintain the health of all areas of plants, shrubs, and grassed areas
installed within the design boundaries. System selection shall consider minimum
maintenance and operational skill requirements, without waste of water, including the
piping, valves, sprinkler heads, controller and wiring, and all of the other system
appurtenances that help to make a complete and operable landscape irrigation system.
The systems elected shall be divided into zones and shall be automatically controlled.
The system shall have rain/moisture detection capability to prevent watering during
and after rain events where adequate rain has fallen. The system shall be metered. A
backflow preventer shall be provided where the system connects to base water
distribution system. Rain sensors shall be incorporated into the irrigation system
controller. Drip irrigation shall be used for all planting beds. The systems shall be
designed and installed by an experienced firm licensed for irrigation design and
installation in the State and County.
7.7 SPECIFICATIONS
31 00 00 Earthwork
31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing
32 05 33 Landscape Establishment
32 84 23 Underground Sprinkler System
32 92 19 Seeding and/or
32 92 23 Sodding
32 93 00 Exterior Plants
8.0 ARCHITECTURAL
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 34
8.2 GENERAL
The new Child Development Center (CDC) shall provide a new single story facility
including associated outdoor play environments required to support child care needs
of the Air Force Base. The size and location are Base specific and will be
determined by the Air Force.
The new Child Development Center (CDC) Facility shall be designed to reflect a
residential or more home-like setting rather than an institutional atmosphere.
The new Child Development Center (CDC) Facility shall meet ABA handicap
accessibility requirements.
The Facility shall comply with the requirements of the Unified Facilities Criteria
(UFC 4-010-01) DOD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings, 8 October 2003,
including change 1 dated 22 January 2007. This information may be found at
http://www.hnd.usace.army.mil/techinfo/engpubs.htm
8.3 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
The functional requirements of the Child Development Center (CDC) Facility are
indicated below and/or on the drawings. Deviations to the orientation, square foot
areas, and functional adjacencies must be submitted for approval during the design
phase of the project. Approval will come from AISA through AFSVA/SVPY and AFSVA/SVXF.
The CDC shall be designed as a large sized single story facility as classified by the
Unified Facilities Criteria. The initial standard floor plan will accommodate
approximately a maximum of 304 children unless indicated otherwise in Appendix A: five
preschool activity rooms of 24 children each, six toddler activity rooms of 14
children each, six pre-toddler activity rooms of 10 children each and five infant
activity rooms of 8 children each. Note: the pretoddler and infant activity rooms are
the same size.
To the greatest extent possible, the facility shall be designed to represent a non-
commercial residential style, in environment, finish, and comfort.
The activity rooms are arranged for direct access to the appropriate outdoor play
environment areas without traveling through the corridors. Each activity room is sized
appropriate to the age level and the space requirements provided by the standard
design. All activity rooms have child scale toilet areas and hand washing stations,
food preparation areas, diapering areas, personal cubby storage and general storage
for bulk items and supplies and a nursing area for storage of car seats, cots, gliders
and staff lockers. An area of the floor plan is reserved for a centrally located
multi-purpose room as an option to be included where appropriate for the locale or
mandated by the CDC demographics.
A reception desk in the entry lobby serves as the central control point for checking
in children, receiving visitors, staff entry, and the observation of the corridors.
Behind the reception desk, a small work area is available for staff administration and
photocopy. Also visible from the reception desk are six closed circuit TV monitors;
unless noted otherwise in Appendix A, located on the wall across the main corridor for
staff and parent viewing for scanning all corridors, exits, selected rooms or spaces
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 35
and the exterior. These monitors are located a maximum of 12’ from the staff viewing
the monitor to the monitor.
Along the entrance corridor are areas that are Optional Buggy Storage areas. The
windows at these areas shall have the sill start at the same height as the chair rails
along the corridors and extend up from there. The Contractor shall work with the Base
Architect to determine whether this glass is clear, fritted or textured at these
areas.
Adjacent to and visible from the reception desk is an isolation room. The isolation
room has a child toilet with low height partition, a child lavatory, and electrical
connections for an under counter refrigerator. The isolation room is to have floor to
door head height storefront window system for visual monitoring of the room from the
reception desk.
The Contractor shall purchase and install compact refrigerators in each of the
activity rooms and isolation room as part of the base bid MILCON purchase as per UFC
4-740-14 Table B-2.
Accessible from the lobby is a small parent resource area, single user unisex toilets
for the convenience of visitors and staff, storage area and office areas/conference
areas for the Director, Assistant Director and a Facilities Supervisor.
Space is also provided for the Training and Curriculum Specialist office adjacent to a
training room, a staff break area, women’s toilet (multiple fixtures), unisex toilets
(five – total required located throughout the Facility), a central Janitor Closet,
central storage areas (located in each wing), two laundry rooms (one located close to
the infant activity rooms and the other near the central connector support spaces), a
commercial kitchen (Janitor Closet located in Kitchen Area), mechanical, electrical
and communication rooms. Accessible from the exterior are unconditioned storage rooms
for play equipment adjacent to each outdoor play environment area.
The Contractor shall purchase and install commercial stackable washer/dryers and floor
dryer as part of the base bid MILCON purchase as per UFC 4-740-14 Table B-2.
All facilities will be designed according to the Architectural Barriers Act (ABA).
Multi-purpose Room (Optional): Some facilities are authorized an additional Multi-

purpose Room as an indoor play environment at locations where there are extended
periods of extreme heat or cold. Verify location of installations authorized to have a
Multi-purpose room with HQ AFSVA when programming the project. The conceptual floor
plan allows for the conversion of the open grass area between pre-school activity
rooms and the connector to a Multi-purpose room. Verify the size of the mechanical
and electrical systems when this area is authorized for the facility. See Appendix A
for further detail and/or Bid Schedule for whether is this included in the project.
8.4 EXTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
8.4.1 Exterior Walls: Exterior walls of the new Child Development Center (CDC)
Facility shall be designed using cavity load-bearing reinforced concrete masonry,
reinforced or prestressed concrete, exterior metal wall panels or a combination of
these systems. The exterior wall shall use a combination of face brick and precast or
stone wainscots, lintels, headers, cornices or accents as incorporated by discretion
of the Designer of Record. Exterior cavity wall assemblies shall be designed to
achieve maximum energy efficiency and thermal and moisture protection. The inner
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 36
wythe of the cavity wall system may be either CMU or cold-formed steel studs as
appropriate. If cold-formed studs are used they shall not be load bearing. Cavity
walls shall be insulated of thickness and type required to achieve maximum R-value
ratings required by geographic location and to support LEED certifications credits.
Provide flashings and sheet metal coverings to insure a watertight building.
Exterior wall system shall consist of materials defined by the base Architectural
Compatibility Standards, State Historic Preservation Office (SHPO), and other
standards as may apply.
8.4.2 Exterior Louvers: Exterior louvers and grilles shall be a 3-coat fluoropolymer
coating system on aluminum, sight and rain proof, continuous, horizontal and
drainable. Louvers and grilles shall be furnished with factory fabricated insect
screens, insulated blank-off panels and frames.
8.4.3 Roof: The roof of the Child Development Center (CDC)Facility shall be a standing
seam metal roof system over rigid insulation that is mechanically fastened to the
metal roof deck and anchored to roof framing members, a built-up membrane roofing
system over rigid insulation and metal roof deck on steel framing, a modified
bituminous membrane roofing system over rigid insulation and metal roof deck on steel
framing, or a single-ply membrane roofing system over rigid insulation and metal deck
on steel framing.
The roof slope shall be a minimum of 1/4-inch per foot for a low slope roof and a
maximum of 4 in 12 for pitched roofs or as defined by the base Architectural
Compatibility Standards, State Historic Preservation Office (SHPO), and other
standards as may apply.
The metal roof system finish shall be a 3-coat colored Kynar finish. The roof
insulation and roof system shall provide a minimum R-value of R-30. The roof system
and insulation shall be installed to meet FM I-90 and UL-90 uplift requirements. The
roof system shall be provided with a 20-year warranty.
The roof overhang shall be 4’-0” and used for solar control. The roof overhang shall
have soffit panels.
The roofing system shall consist of materials defined by the base Architectural
Compatibility Standards and other standards as may apply.
8.4.4 Exterior Doors and Frames: Exterior main entry vestibule, personnel-type doors
and frames shall be commercial grade aluminum with a 3-coat fluoropolymer coating
system.
All doors shall include aluminum thresholds and aluminum housed weather seals.
All exterior doors and frames except aluminum doors and frames shall be insulated
seamless steel doors set in welded steel frames with a painted finish. All exterior
steel doors and frames shall be G60 galvanized minimum.
All exterior doors with the exception of the main entry door, the kitchen doors, and
exterior equipment doors outside of fenced areas shall be equipped with audible alarms
with notification back to the entry service desk. The activity room doors exiting
onto the outdoor play environments do not need to be alarmed.
Door Hardware: Exterior door hardware shall be provided for all doors. Hardware
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 37
components and keying shall meet ABA and requirements for accessibility, and NFPA
exiting requirements. Additionally, most exterior doors require special door hardware
as specified in UFC 4-740-14. All hardware shall be coordinated with Child
Development Center (CDC) Facility and Air Force Base Security representatives. Doors
shall include child proof hinge protection (fingerguards) to a height of 60 inches on
both the inside and the outside of the door.
8.4.5 Exterior Windows and Storefronts: Exterior windows and Storefronts in the Child
Development Center (CDC) Facility shall be minimum performance class heavy commercial
(HC)grade aluminum, thermally improved to achieve a minimum Condensation Resistance
Factor (CRF) of 45. All frames to have a Kynar 500 3-coat fluoropolymer finish coating
system. The upper panel of windows located in activity rooms shall be operable (tilt-
in type). Aluminum window units and storefront systems shall comply with paragraph B-
3 to Appendix B to UFC 4-010-01.
Glass and Glazing: All exterior glazing for doors and windows shall be tinted sealed
edge insulating units. Insulated glass units shall have an inside laminated pane in
accordance with paragraph B-3 to Appendix B to UFC 4-010-01 with an exterior tempered
pane, tinted of color defined by the base Architectural Compatibility Standards and
other standards as may apply.
8.4.6 Clerestory Roof Construction (optional): See Bid Schedule to determine if this
option is applicable. All corridors and lobby areas shall have clerestory
construction including roof framing and window system to match the main building
construction.
The Clerestory roof construction shall consist of materials defined by the base
Architectural Compatibility Standards and other standards as may apply.
8.4.7 Screenwalls: Screenwall construction shall include painted, pre-finished or

stucco finished reinforced concrete masonry, prestressed precast concrete, or metal
panels attached to steel framing. Screenwalls shall be provided at all dumpster
locations and at all outdoor mechanical/electrical equipment yards and building
service areas as indicated on the drawings.
The screenwall construction shall consist of materials defined by the base

Architectural Compatibility Standards and other standards as may apply.
8.5 INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
8.5.1 Interior Walls: Interior walls shall be constructed of gypsum board assemblies
using conventional cold-formed metal studs and concrete masonry units (normal
weight). Non load bearing steel stud framing shall be galvanized studs, rigid
channels, resilient furring channels, C-studs or Z furring channels as required by
design conditions spaced at 16-inches on centers. Comply with ASTM C 645. Metal
studs size to be 2 1/2-inches for furred masonry walls. Metal stud size to be a
minimum of 3 5/8-inches or 4-inches for office, administrative, and storage areas
located between activity rooms. Metal studs size to be a minimum of 6-inches for all
interior corridor walls and activity room demising walls. Stud gauge shall be as
required by height and loading, but shall not be less than 25 gauge for interior
walls and 20 gauge for perimeter walls. Use fire-rated, Type X, water-resistant or
glass reinforced board as conditions dictate. Comply with ASTM C 36. Minimum gypsum
board panel thickness to be 5/8-inch.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 38
Provide fire rated walls where required by governing codes or standards. Walls at
laundry rooms shall be a minimum of 1-hour fire-resistive construction. The 1-hour
fire rated walls in the laundry room shall extend to the metal roof deck.
See paragraph 13.8 for hazardous classification zones.
Provide acoustically rated walls at the following locations: demising walls of all
activity rooms, toilet room walls, corridor walls, kitchen walls adjacent to
corridor, laundry room walls, mechanical rooms, nursing rooms, Isolation room,
training room walls, and all administrative offices. Acoustically rated walls shall
meet a minimum (STC) sound transmittance coefficient rating of 45.
Demising walls and corridor walls shall extend up to underside of metal roof deck.
Concrete masonry walls shall be provided at mechanical rooms, electrical rooms,

communication room, laundry rooms and at the kitchen.
General: All walls to receive mounted items must have blocking to receive anchoring
devices capable of sustaining forces anticipated as a result of attaching the item.
Grab bars must sustain a pulling force of 350 pounds exerted in any direction.
Provide blocking for wall-mounted audio-visual equipment, plumbing fixtures and

associated accessories and flat panel displays.
8.5.2 Interior Doors and Frames: Interior doors shall be solid core wood with vision
panels per UFC 4-740-14 and steel frames. Vision panels are not required at the doors
of adult toilets, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, communications rooms and
security rooms. Door frames shall be hollow metal, welded type. Provide fire rated
doors and frames in rated walls. Additional security requirements may require the use
of hollow metal doors. Doors shall be ¾-hour fire rated in 1 hour fire walls.
Steel doors and frames shall be painted.
8.5.2.1 Door Hardware: Provide heavy-duty commercial type door hardware for all doors.
The doors within the activity rooms that children have access to shall be knob-type
where it does not conflict with ABA. All others shall be lever-type handles to comply
with ABA. Hardware components and keying shall meet ABA and requirements for
accessibility, and NFPA requirements. All doors that children have access to shall
include child proof hinge protection (fingerguards) to a height of 60 inches on both
the interior and exterior side of the door.
Door locks and panic devices shall be mounted 48” above finish floor.
All hardware shall be coordinated with Child Development Center (CDC) Facility and Air
Force Base Security representatives.
8.5.2.2 Door Hardware Groups:
Hardware shown is for single and double doors.
HW-1 (Office, Conf. Rm., Training) Hinges

Lockset
Wall Stop
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 39
Door Silencer
HW-2 (Activity Rooms-exterior) Hinges

Exit Device
(flush type - full door width, heavy-
duty touch-pad panic type)
Cylinder
Closer/Stop/mechanical hold-open
Protection Plate
Threshold
Weatherstripping
HW-3 (Activity Rooms-Interior) Hinges

Passage Latch-set
Closer/Stop
Protection Plate
Door Silencer
HW-4 (Janitor, Storage, Laundry (no hold-open) Hinges

Activity Room Storage) Lockset
Closer/Stop/hold-open
Protection Plate
Wall Stop
Door Silencer
HW-5 (Unisex Toilet) Hinges

Lockset
Closer
Wall Stop
Door Silencer
HW-6 (Women’s Toilet) Hinges

Door Pull
Push Plate
Closer
Protection Plate
Wall Stop
Door Silencer
HW-7 (Corridor – exit doors-exterior) Hinges

Exit Device
(flush type - full door width, heavy-
duty touch-pad panic type)
Cylinder
Closer
Stop
Protection Plate
Threshold
Weatherstripping
HW-8 (Mechanical, Electrical – exterior pairs) Hinges
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 40
Flush Bolts
DustProof Strike
Cylinder
Closer / Stop
Protection Plate
Threshold
Weatherstripping
HW-9 (Kitchen, Communication – exterior) Hinges

Lockset
Closer / Stop
Protection Plate
Threshold
Weatherstripping
HW-10 (Kitchen, – interior Hinges

Adjacent to corridor) Lockset
Closer / Stop(magnetic hold
Open)
Protection Plate(both sides)
Marble Threshold
Gaskets
HW-11 (Security Room) Hinges

Lockset
Protection Plate
Wall Stop
Door Silencer
HW-12 (Main Vestibule Entry - exterior) Hinges

Exit Device
(flush type - full door width,
heavy duty touch-pad panic type)
Cylinder
Closer
Threshold
Weatherstripping
Automatic swing type aluminum doors
HW-13 (Nursing Room) Hinges

Latchset
Protection Plate
Wall Stop
Door Silencer
HW-14 (Main Vestibule Entry – interior) Automatic sliding type

aluminum doors
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 41
8.5.2.3 Keying Requirements: The Contractor shall provide and install permanent cores
and keys for locksets, auxiliary locks, and exit devices. The Contractor shall
provide temporary cores and keys for the Contractor’s use during construction, and
for testing the locksets. All doors with the exception of mechanical, electrical,
and communication rooms shall be on a master key system which is compatible with the
Base Grand master keying system. The Contractor shall provide [2] keys per door plus
[2] master keys.
8.5.3 Interior Aluminum Automatic Sliding Doors: main entry vestibule interior doors
shall be automatic sliding-type commercial grade aluminum doors with a Kynar 3-coat
fluoropolymer finish coating system.
8.5.4 Interior Windows and Borrowed Lites: Interior window and Borrowed Lites in the
Child Development Center (CDC) Facility shall be fabricated from the same frame
sections as the door frames, safety glazed from the inside of the room.
8.5.5 Access Doors: Provide 16 gauge sheet steel frames primed for field finish in
all areas. Provide flange suitable for adjacent material. Doors shall be flush panel
type 14-gauge sheet steel factory primed for field finish in all areas except toilet
and kitchen areas where #4 satin finish stainless steel shall be used. Cylinder or
tamper proof locks and fire ratings as conditions dictate.
8.5.6 Cabinets: Materials and construction of cabinets and counters shall be in

accordance with Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) quality standards "AWI Custom
Grade". Countertops shall be solid surface material with back and end splashes to
match. Countertops shall have curved edges (no sharp edges)in accordance with UFC 4-
740-14.
Cabinets shall be all plywood with plastic laminate finish units. Cabinets shall
have magnetic locks. No keyed locks are allowed. No base cabinet shall be provided
under sinks (extend flooring material under sink to wall).
Laundry chute at base cabinets of food prep stations shall have swing doors (top
hinged) at vertical face of cabinet and with door for laundry basket access.
8.5.7 Toilets: ABA compliant toilets shall be provided in the facility where shown.
Child toilets shall comply with UFC 4-740-14. Provide sound deadened walls around
and between toilet rooms.
8.5.7.1 Toilet Accessories (Adult): Toilet accessories shall be furnished as

indicated below. All accessories shall be stainless steel commercial grade quality
products.
a. Each adult toilet stall shall have a jumbo roll toilet tissue holder and coat
hook on door. Each handicapped accessible stall shall have a double roll toilet
tissue holder, coat hook on door, and wall mounted grab bars. All women's toilet
stalls and unisex toilets shall have sanitary napkin disposal units and
dispensers.
b. Lavatories shall be set in the solid surface countertop. Soap dispensers in

countertops shall be recessed type.
c. At countertop lavatories, a mirror extending the "full width" of the countertop

shall be provided ("full width" may be shortened approximately 1" on both ends
to accommodate side fasteners). Provide stainless steel frame around mirrors.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 42
One semi-recessed handicapped accessible paper towel dispenser/disposal units

shall be furnished adjacent to the main lavatory areas. Provide a surface
mounted paper towel dispenser adjacent to all countertop lavatories in unisex
toilet rooms.
8.5.7.2 Toilet Accessories (Child): Toilet accessories shall be furnished as

indicated below. All accessories shall be stainless steel commercial grade quality
products.
a. Each child toilet stall shall have a toilet tissue dispenser mounted 14” above
the finish floor within children’s reach.
b. Lavatories shall be set in the solid surface countertop.
c. At countertop lavatories, a mirror extending the "full width" of the countertop

shall be provided ("full width" may be shortened approximately 1" on both ends
to accommodate side fasteners). Provide stainless steel frame around mirrors.
Mirrors shall be shatter-proof.
8.5.7.3 Toilet Partitions and screens: Partitions, doors and screens shall be
stainless steel or solid polymer material with stainless steel fittings and hardware.
Toilet partitions shall be floor mounted or overhead braced type.
8.5.8 Janitor's Closets: Janitor Closets shall be equipped with a 24” x 24” x 12”
floor mounted service sink, shelving, and storage space for a portable mop bucket. All
janitors’ closets shall have one utility rack w/holders for mops and brooms. Provide
ceramic tile at both walls to a minimum height of 48” above the mop sink and 1-foot
beyond the edges of the mop sink.
8.5.9 Lockers: Furnish and install 3 staff lockers per activity room (3 double-tier
lockers at nursing rooms for a total of 6 staff lockers shared by two activity
rooms). Lockers (staff) shall be double-tier type, 12” wide, 15” deep, and 36”
high. Provide lockers of mild cold-rolled steel with baked enamel finish or wood.
Provide with base, sloped tops and end panels. Door shall be a sliding latch type
with an integral hasp for a padlock. Lower lockers shall be mounted in a 4-inch
base integral to the lower lockers or furred up from the floor.
8.5.10 Specialties:
a. First Aid Cabinet – provide wall-mounted plastic cabinets to be located at

outdoor play environments (mount one cabinet on face of each wing for total
required – six) – no larger than 18” x 18” deep mounted at 60” AFF.
b. Medicine Cabinet – provide a wall-mounted medicine cabinet (lockable) at

Isolation Room.
c. Fire Extinguisher and Cabinet – provide a semi-recessed fire extinguisher

cabinet at kitchen.
8.5.11 Finishes:
Refer to Section 9.5 Interior Finish Assignment for all finishes.
9. STRUCTURAL INTERIOR DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 43
9.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Structural Interior Design (SID) is defined and described in paragraphs 9.3 of this
section.
9.3 STRUCTURAL INTERIOR DESIGN (SID)
9.3.1 Design Requirements: The Child Development Center (CDC) projects shall be
finished as in accordance with this narrative. This narrative provides general
guidance only. Site specific directives shall be provided in an Appendix A to this
document. The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive package which includes the
following:
• Narrative of the Structural Interior Design Objectives

• Interior Color Boards
• Exterior Color Boards
Related drawings to be included in the package shall be:
• Room Finish Schedule

• Interior Finish Plans
• Interior Signage Plans
• Interior Elevations, Sections and Details - indicating specific materials,
color and finish placement
Edited UFGS 09 06 90 Color Schedule and associated guide specifications to define all
aspects of the SID shall be included as part of the Construction Documents. Suitable
materials and treatments are desired and shall be chosen based upon maintenance
requirements, costs, availability, color and texture as well as visual compatibility
of the surrounding buildings. The Government shall have final approval authority for
the overall design, materials, finishes and colors used for the project.
9.3.2 Descriptive Narrative: The interior design has a direct impact on the quality of
life for the children and caregivers. The Structural Interior Design (SID) for the
Child Development Center (CDC) should reflect an environment that is welcoming,
comfortable and safe, while projecting an image of a “home away from home” through the
use and placement of commercial grade building related interior finishes, materials,
colors, textures and patterns. The environment shall be child oriented and designed as
if thru the eyes of a child. Provide access to as much natural light as possible. The
SID commercial interior finishes shall be durable and cost effective to maintain over
the life of the facility and shall incorporate materials that LEED sustainable design
credits can be obtained as defined by United States Green Building Council(USGBC).
Appearance retention is of high importance. Materials and finishes shall support the
health, safety and welfare of the children and staff members, yet support sustainable
design practices. Consider the recycled content requirements included in the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) list of guideline items. The complete list of
guideline items and their recycled content requirements can be found on the
Environmental Protection Agency Website. Products listed below contain recycled
content material, and/or are developed to be recycled. Such products will contribute
to the acquiring of LEED credits.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 44
• Carpet
• Rubber/Resilient Flooring, Base and Accessories
• Porcelain/Ceramic Tile
• Recycled materials in cabinet finishes including; solid surface counters
• Wallcovering
• Paint
• Acoustical Ceiling Tile
Other sustainable design issues considered in the development of the SID are low-
emitting materials such as paint, adhesives and sealants.
The basic style for the CDC shall have residential / home like characteristics in both
the interior architecture and interior commercial grade finishes. Smaller scale
elements and features shall be used, so as not to overwhelm the children and create a
more welcoming facility. The Interior Finishes as listed in paragraphs 9.6 and 9.7
describe the performance level of finishes to be specified within the facility. The
overall interior design color palette shall be based on characteristics of the
regional area of the CDC and shall be specified by the Contractor’s Interior Designer
as determined through interviews conducted with the CDC Management Team and Training
and Curriculum Specialists. Approved products shall be identified in the Final SID.
The Contractor’s Interior Designer shall integrate and relate the interior design and
interior architectural elements of the CDC and provide interiors that are age
appropriate for the children. The ages of the children attending the facility are;
Infant – under 12 months, Pre-Toddler – 12-24 months, Toddler – 24-36 months and Pre
School 3-5 years. The Contractor’s Interior Designer shall have a minimum of 5 years
experience designing Child Development Centers. The designer shall consider the
creative use of space, form, material, light, color, texture and pattern to enhance
the learning experience in a timeless interior design pallet.
9.3.3 Building Standard Finishes: The interior color scheme for all
CDCs shall have light neutral colors while bringing in warm accents of color. Accent
colors shall be used throughout the building to add:
• Interest to the basic neutral walls

• Define functional areas
• Enhance general path way finding and the interior architecture
These facilities shall be designed for LEED certification with the level of
certification to be defined in the Appendix A. Refer to Section 2, Sustainable Design,
of this document for LEED requirements and ways to achieve points. Accent colors
shall be incorporated in small doses, avoiding entire walls of graphics and designs.
Color selections for accents shall coordinate and enhance the architecture, but not
take away from the display of the children’s work.
The use of display areas as a design element provides opportunities to display

children’s work for both adult and children viewing in common lobbies, corridors,
inside activity rooms and offices. Display of artwork shall be incorporated at both
the children and adult height as a design feature utilizing; Plexiglas protected
sleeves (allowing interchangeability) and/or with tackless strips inside classrooms to
protect the walls.
Introduce textures throughout the CDC. The use of textures promotes a “hands-on”
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 45
learning experience for the children and encourages creativity. Soft textures relay
quiet behavior and hard textures relay large motor activity areas. Textures can be
brought in through the use of:
• Carpet
• Resilient flooring
• Wallcovering
• Millwork
The use of literal themes, cartoon or fairy tale characters is prohibited. The
general purpose is to promote a welcoming, “home-like” environment for the children
and staff with the durability needed in a multiuse child development facility.
The use of organic shapes should be incorporated to create softer transitions between
surfaces. This concept can be used with floor finishes and wall finishes, creating a
fun and interactive way to integrate interior finish palettes throughout the facility.
The use of rigid wallcovering wainscot at a height of 48” is only allowed for areas
which require a higher soil resistance and easily cleaned. Areas requiring such
products are:
• Corridors
• Lobby/Waiting Area
• Activity Rooms
• Toilet and Toilet Areas within Activity Rooms
Wall finishes shall have a seamless transition to areas that do not require as high of
performance products.
Acoustical treatments shall be applied in classroom modules and adjacent areas in

order not to exceed a sustained noise level of 45 decibels.
9.4 ROOM SPECIFIC FINISHES AND ARCHITECTURAL REQUIREMENTS
Refer to Section 20 Room Data Sheets for individual room finishes. Rooms requiring
additional directives are listed below.
9.4.1 Lobby / Waiting Area: The Lobby / Waiting Area includes a vestibule entry and
parent / child waiting area adjacent to the parent’s resource area. The Lobby area
should be welcoming and comfortable with good lighting and access to natural light.
Wall Finishes shall be durable and have acoustical properties. A wainscot of high
impact resistance material shall be installed at a height of 48” with either chair
rail or top cap. Paint with low Voc’s shall be installed above the wainscot. Only
rigid wallcovering wainscot is allowed to 48” AFF.
Flooring in the Lobby and Vestibule shall be durable and low maintenance. The use of a
rectified Porcelain tile will minimize grout lines and give a clean appearance and
require minimal maintenance. Terrazzo Tile is another option for the Lobby area;
eliminating grout joints, yet providing longevity to the Lobby flooring and ease of
maintenance. A recessed walk-off mat/grate shall be installed in the entry vestibule
to reduce the tracking of dirt and carrying contaminates through the facility. Refer
to Appendix A for location of CDC which dictates surface specified in this area.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 46
Wall display of children’s recent work or informational material should be provided

through Tackable Acoustical Panels and Tackless Display rails. Tackless display rails
can be incorporated at chair rail height, providing child height display.
CCTV monitors shall be located within the Lobby area for staff viewing. Monitors
shall display images from security cameras located within classrooms throughout the
facility. Monitors shall be installed 96” AFF maximum of 12’-0” opposite from the
reception desk measured from the viewing area of the reception desk to the monitors.
9.4.2 Reception / Work Room – Copy Area: The Reception / Work Area shall provide a
location for administrative staff to research and study while tending to visitors,
arriving parents and children. The work area shall include space for a full-time
manned reception desk, general storage and various office equipment. Much of the
storage requirements shall be incorporated into millwork. Refer to Appendix A for
further detail for specific CDC requirements.
The Reception Desk shall be constructed to ABA requirements so as to allow children

and physically challenged adults to have visibility to those working at the counter
upon entry. This requires a portion of the desk not to exceed 31” in height. A phone
shall also be accessible to meet ABA requirements. Refer to conceptual plans within.
The Reception Desk shall include space for the following:
• 3 Staff personnel
• 6 adults at front of desk ( on lobby side of desk)
• 1 Adult in wheelchair at front of desk
• file storage
• personal storage
• fax/copier/scanner
• computer on turn table
• Point of Sale (POS) terminal
• Provide space, power and data for Time Clock for staff
The Reception desk shall be made of durable materials which are recognized for their
appearance retention.
Such materials are:
• plastic laminates
• high impact resistant panels
• ¼” solid surface panels
• Solid Surface work surface and transaction counter
The use of multiple colors and textures is encouraged to draw interest to the
reception area and create a focal point in the Lobby Area.
Staff personnel shall have immediate access to the Isolation Room where sick children
can be separated when required. Staff shall have direct view to a child within the
room should he/she need assistance.
The Work Area shall have direct access to a security equipment room, which includes
security monitoring equipment and shall be located within close proximity to the
Reception Desk.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 47
CCTV Monitors shall be located opposite of the reception desk for abuse prevention.
Refer to electrical Section 01 10 10 para 15.8 for requirements of this equipment.
See also conceptual plans for layout of reception area.
Refer to Room Data Sheets for interior room finishes.
9.4.3 Administration Offices/Conference Meeting Areas: Director and all

administrative offices shall be visible and accessible to staff and parents. The
Director’s office shall be located directly off the Lobby / Waiting area with direct
vision to the lobby area. All doors shall have full height vision panels as well as
wall vision panels where possible.
9.4.4 Break Room:

Requirements for the Break Room are as follows:
• Locate in close proximity to staff toilets

• Provide café height solid surface counter top at wall for additional seating
• Provide space for kitchen equipment required by staff
• Provide area for the collection and separation of recycle materials –
plastic, aluminum, and paper
Refer to Room Data Sheet for interior room finishes.
9.4.5 Training Room:

Requirements for the training room are as follows:
• Whiteboard with projection capable surface

• Ceiling mounted projector (LCD)
• Flat panel display monitor for CCTV viewing
• Exterior emergency access in the event a child is in the room.
9.4.6 Isolation Room / Toilet:

Requirements for the Isolation Room are as follows:
• Fully visible to the staff manning the reception area, yet screened from view
of visitors in the corridor or public areas
• Provide single occupant child-sized handicap accessible toilet and lavatory
• Lockable Medicine Cabinet mounted at a height which is out of reach from
children
• Electric connection for undercounter Size refrigerator
• No door is required between isolation child room and isolation toilet area
• 1/4” Solid Surface panels shall be located in toilet area at a height of 48”
minimum
9.4.7 General Storage: Provide built-in shelving for general storage purposes.
Shelving shall accommodate storage for paper goods, supplies, literature and toys.
Storage shall be located in activity rooms and in designated locations off corridors.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 48
9.4.8 Kitchen:
Requirements for the Kitchen are as follows:
• Kitchen floor finish shall be smooth, slip resistant, easily cleanable and
seamless with integral wall base surface designed for kitchen use. Refer to
Paragraph 9.6.4 for specifications.
• Provide impact resistant wall surface full height.
• Provide ceiling finish designed for food service areas that is easily
cleaned.
• Install Stainless Steel wall panels under hood area.
• Provide equipment and storage per Section 18 of this document.
• Provide wall protection where cart storage is located in the room in form of
stainless steel crash rail.
• Kitchen is the only room required to have a fire extinguisher.
• All doors into the kitchen from corridors shall have vision panels.
• Provide office area for cook with visibility to exterior service door.
• Magnetic hold open device for doors connected to the alarm system.
Refer to Room Date Sheet for interior room finishes.
9.4.9 Laundry:
Requirements for the Laundry Room are as follows:
• Laundry finishes shall be durable, slip resistant flooring that slopes to a

floor drain.
• Gypsum board ceiling shall be designed for high moisture environment.
• Provide (3)commercial grade stackable front loading machines.
• Provide 1 ABA accessible Dryer.
• Provide location for freestanding laundry tub with adjacent folding counter
and storage area for supplies. Wall cabinets shall be hung for additional
storage above counter.
9.4.10 Janitor’s Closet:

Requirements for Janitor’s Closet are as follows:
• Provide door with vision panel

• Provide moisture resistant walls
• Provide floor mop sink
• Walls adjacent to the mop sink area shall have a minimum 48”H ceramic wall
tile.
• Flooring shall be concrete and sloped to floor drain.
• Provide lockable storage for cleaning chemicals.
• Provide Wall mounted rack for the mops and brooms.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 49
9.4.11 Toilet Facilities (Staff Restroom / Public Restroom:

Requirements for Toilet Facilities area as follows:
• Provide one designated Women’s Restroom with multiple fixtures.

• Handicap accessible.
• Unisex restrooms for both the staff and public restrooms.
Floor finishes shall include non porous flooring which is durable and slip resistant –
epoxy resin flooring system. Wall finishes at lavatories and toilets areas shall be
6” ceramic wall tiles. Tiles shall be installed to a height of 48”AFF. All adjacent
walls and soffits shall be painted with durable paint. Ceilings shall be high
moisture resistant acoustical ceiling tiles and moisture resistant gypboard.
9.4.12 Corridors:
Requirements for Corridors are as follows:
• Corridors should be a minimum of 6’-6” to maximum of 8’-0” wide. If square

footage is an issue corridors shall be 6’-6”.
• Ceiling height shall vary with a minimum height of 9’-0”. This minimum
creates the opportunity to incorporate natural lighting through clerestory
windows.
• Wall finishes in corridors shall be durable, rigid wallcovering wainscot
48”AFF and capped off with wainscot trim and/or tackless art display rail.
• Wall above the wainscot shall be durable low VOC paint.
Flooring shall be Rubber goods. Rubber flooring provides a durable and cost effective
solution while incorporating acoustical properties and slip resistance which are
inherent to the product. Floor patterns with a minimum of 3 accent colors shall be
used to visually break the long corridor and incorporate a sense of way finding to the
facility.
Windows shall be 2’-0” wide; floor to ceiling
Art display areas shall be incorporated at both child and adult height. Provide
interior architectural features at each activity room entry with different color
accents designed for the activity modules to aid in way finding and personalization
for the child as they identify with their home away from home activity room.
Corner guards shall be installed on all corners at a height of 48” AFF. Material
shall be durable and impact resistant. Material shall coordinate with wainscot.
9.4.13 Child Activity Rooms and Modules:

General Requirements for Child Activity Rooms are as follows:
For each module provide an entrance area that is distinctive and welcoming with views
into the activity room from the corridor and the entrance.
Provide bench area outside the activity room for parents to sit down, with built-in
storage for booties and disposal of booties. Benches shall be located only at the
Infant and Pre-Toddler Activity Rooms.
Hard surface flooring such as rubber flooring shall be located around wet areas and in
traffic pathway into and outside of room. Sheet goods are preferred to minimize
number of seams. The use of accents colors shall promote creativity and enhance the
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 50
learning experience for the children.
Soft flooring surfaces such as carpet from SafeLandings or equivalent shall be

specified. Play/Learning Areas requiring fall protection and noise reduction shall be
located on soft flooring surfaces. Incorporate the use of accent colors where
possible.
Provide water resistant, easily cleaned, rigid wallcovering wainscot 48”AFF in

activity areas.
All play areas within the room shall be designed to minimize the amount of blind
spots. All rooms shall require a minimum of 1 convex mirror.
Examine noise relationships between areas. Zone quiet activities away from noisy
activities.
Food Prep and Toilet Areas shall have non-porous wainscot at a height of 48” AFF, such
as ¼” solid surface wall panels.
Millwork shall have magnetic locks and be located within arm’s reach of primary work
surface counter.
Diaper changing stations shall have safety devices on either side of changing surface
consisting of raised edge of 3” above changing mat.
Refer to UFC 4-740-14 Chapter 7 for technical specifications of changing stations.
Counter tops shall be non porous work surface that is anti-microbial such as solid
surface with integral back splash and end caps. All counter surfaces shall have
radius edges. Holes shall be provided in top of counter for trash. Trash holes at
child sink shall be within the reach of a child.
Cubby Storage shall be anchored to the walls/floors to prevent tipping. Cubbies shall
be pre-manufactured with separation for individual storage so clothing/coats do not
touch. Contractor shall work with the Child Development Center (CDC) Director and
Training and Curriculum Specialist on what type of cubbie storage to purchase. They
will want to match the other portable cubbies used for toy display with those selected
for personal belongings. Contractor shall purchase/build/install the cubbie storage
per UFC 4-740-14 Table B2.
Infant and Pretoddler Activity Rooms

- 2 units of 5
- stationary – attached to the wall
- 48”w x 15”deep x 35” high (may slightly differ it purchased commercially)
- storage on top (may call tray unit)
- provide 2 safety hooks in each cubbie
Toddler Activity Rooms

- provide 3 units of 5
- provide bench as part of unit
- storage on top and bottom (may call tray unit)
Preschool Activity Rooms
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 51
- provide 4 units of 6
- provide bench as part of unit
- storage on top (may call tray unit)
Provide maximum window views to outside. Window sills shall be finished in solid
surface material with radius edge, and shall be 10-12”AFF x 12”D with maximum .75”
protrusion into the room.
No window treatment for solar control, such as horizontal blinds or floor length
blinds/draperies that children can grab and pull down shall be specified. Solar
control shall be provided by exterior overhangs and / or tinted windows. Only window
valances, which are purely decorative and are installed at the top of the windows
shall be installed to enhance a home like atmosphere. The valance shall not exceed a
hanging length of 18” with the bottom edge a minimum of 60” AFF and shall comply with
the applicable requirements stated in the Life Safety Code and standards indicated in
the Appendix A.
Ceiling heights in activity rooms shall be 9’-0”.
9.4.14 Activity Rooms
9.4.14.1 Infant Activity Room Requirements:
• Infant gross motor area with soft finishes that are easily cleaned
• Low grab bars 18”AFF x 60”L x 1” Dia. for infants to use to pull themselves
up and aid in walking.
• Provide impact resistant mirrors from floor to 30” AFF in select areas so
infants can see themselves.
• Flooring shall be 2/3 soft area (carpet) and 1/3 hard surface area (rubber).
• Provide two Caregiver work areas including an “L” shape food preparation area
and an “L” shape diaper changing area as shown on conceptual plans.
• Provide space for cribs along perimeter wall with 36” separation between
cribs. Do not place cribs 90 degrees to wall which provides inaccessible area
for caregivers when infants / toddlers crawl under cribs.
• Locate Evacuation cribs closest to exterior exit door.
• Infant activity learning areas shall meet the requirements of safety and
government guidelines. No learning area should be single purpose.
• Provide Steps (pull out) in diaper changing area for all activity rooms.
Prefabricated stairs are not allowed.
9.4.14.2 Pre-Toddler/Toddler/Pre-School Activity Room Requirements:
• Provide age appropriate activity learning areas. All gross motor skill areas
need to have 6’ clearance around perimeter.
• Wood working play, dramatic play / cooking play areas and water play areas
are not to be located in corners of room; cut off from view.
• Provide Steps (pull out) in diaper changing area for all activity rooms.
Prefabricated stairs are not allowed.
• Quantities of toilet and sinks vary with age group; provide quantities per
conceptual plans.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 52
• Provide two Caregiver work areas including an “L” shape food preparation area
and an “L” shape diaper changing area as shown on conceptual plans.
9.4.15 Nursing / Storage Room:

Requirements for Nursing/Storage Room are as follows:
• Locate space within activity room. Can be shared with adjacent room.
• Provide space for moving chair to be used by nursing mothers.
• Provide plastic laminate clad cot and car seat storage per conceptual plans.
• Provide Staff locker storage within this area.
• Door to this room shall have vision panel.
9.5 INTERIOR FINISH ASSIGNMENTS
Refer to Room Data Sheets for finish materials/products. The following performance
criteria shall be used in the selection of materials/products and shall be considered
as minimum levels of performance. The contractor shall provide the coordinating UFGS
specifications for each product selected and approved.
9.6 FLOORING MATERIALS
9.6.1 Hard Surface Flooring:
9.6.1.1 Porcelain/Ceramic Tile (Lobby)

• Minimum 12” through body porcelain tile, rectified edge for minimal 1/16”
grout lines. Rectangular tiles are acceptable with a minimum edge length of
12”.
• Breaking Strength shall meet ASTM C648 of >350 lbf.
• Shall meet Chemical resistance test ASTM C650.
• Slip resistance shall exceed 0.6 for wet and dry conditions, meeting ASTM
C1028-89 standards.
• Comply with ANSI A137.1 and the recommendations of Tile Council of America
(TCA) Handbook for Ceramic Tile installation.
• Provide grout-setting bed under ceramic tile.
• Only dark grout allowed.
9.6.2 Resilient Flooring:
9.6.2.1 Rubber Tile Flooring ( Corridors, Toileting and other high traffic areas
requiring resilient flooring)
• 24” x 24” tile, .125” thick

• Meet ASTM D 412 standards of no less than 1200 psi
• Acoustical standards shall meet ASTM E 492 of 40 IIC
• Slip resistance standards shall meet or exceed ASTM D 2047 static coefficient
of friction of 0.8
• Static Load Limit passes ASTM F 970 at 250 PSI
• Homogeneous composition tile meets ASTM F 1344, Class 1-A and 1-B Standard
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 53
Specifications.
• 5 year Limited Warranty
• Requires minimal maintenance – no waxing
• Installed with Low VOC adhesives.
9.6.2.2 3mm Cushioned Rubber Flooring (Activity Rooms)
• 55” wide sheet goods

• Meet ASTM D 412 standards of no less than 300 psi
• Acoustical standards shall meet ASTM E 492 of 45 IIC
• Slip resistance standards shall meet or exceed ASTM D 2047 static coefficient
of friction of 0.8
• Homogeneous composition meeting ASTM F 1860 requirements
• 3 layer vulcanized construction – rubber wear layer, elastic cushion middle
layer, and polyester backing
• 10 year Limited Warranty
• Require minimal maintenance – no waxing
• Heat Welding Rod recommended for Water tight installations
9.6.2.3 Resilient Wall Base

• Minimum 10cm (4”) high rubber base
• Cove base shall be installed at hard flooring locations where integral base
is not installed.
• Straight base shall be installed at all carpet areas
9.6.2.4 Resilient Adhesives
• Water-based Acrylic adhesive

• Low VOCs
• No special ventilation requirements
• No Flash Point
• Contains no ingredients above the OSHA minimum reporting threshold listed by
IARC, NTP, or OSHA.
9.6.3 Carpet:
9.6.3.1 Carpet Tile
• CRI labeled with bonded construction

• 18” x 18” or 24” x 24” square, multi-level, or level pile height
• Full loop or a combination cut/loop pile. Fully cut pile carpet is not
acceptable.
• 100% branded nylon continues filament (type 6 or 6.6)
• 4,000 APD(Average Pile Density per Air Force Carpet Stds ETL 07-4
• 26 ounces per square yard as determined by ASTM D 418
• Solution dyed
• Backing containing recovered carpet
• Integrated moisture barrier
• Antimicrobial and electrostatic properties shall be guaranteed for the life
of the carpet.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 54
• Carpet Tile shall have an ARR of > 3.5.
9.6.3.2 Shock Absorbing Carpet System (Activity Rooms)
• Meet CPSC Guidelines

• Meet ASTM F 1292 and ASTM F 2373 at 3 ft. critical fall height.
• Meets ABA requirements
• Impact-absorbing mat/padding
• Contains Anti-microbial properties
• Solution dyed
• Integrated moisture barrier
9.6.4 Resinous (Epoxy) Flooring (Kitchen, and Restrooms)
• Flooring System shall be seamless smooth troweled applied flooring System

• Slip resistance shall exceed 0.6 for wet and dry conditions. Additional slip
resistant texture shall be added to the kitchen for additional slip
resistance.
• Provide minimum 4” integral cove base with cap strip.
• Prepare and clean substrate according to resinous flooring manufacturers
written instructions.
• Manufacturer’s representative shall be on site during application.
9.7 WALL FINISHES
9.7.1. Ceramic Wall Tile
Janitor Closets shall receive 10 cm x 10 cm (4”x4”), glazed ceramic wall tile

located at mop sinks.
• Breaking strength of 100-230 lbs.

• Chemical resistant
• Available in Matte or Semi-Gloss finish
• Moisture Absorption equal or greater than 20%
9.7.2 Paint / Protective Coating System
• Provide manufacturer’s best quality paint material of various coating types

for the proposed condition.
• All interior paints
• Paint material containers not displaying the manufacturer’s product
identification are not acceptable.
• All paints and associated material are to be single sourced.
• Block fillers, primers and undercoat products for each coating system are to
be obtained from the same manufacturer.
• Materials shall be ready mixed except for field catalyzed coatings.
• Field tinting of materials is not acceptable.
• Accessory materials, such as putty, spackle, thinners, reducers and shellacs
shall be of the highest quality and fully compatible with each other and with
primary coating materials.
• Provide “Green Seal” products.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 55
9.7.3 High Impact Rigid Wallcovering (only allowed as wainscot)
• High Impact Vinyl/Acrylic rigid sheet wallcovering in .040 and .060

thickness.
• Sheets shall be installed in a minimum length of 8’-0”.
• Standard texture and colors shall be specified with matching Wainscot trim.
• Use manufacturer’s recommended standard adhesive.
• Product shall be PVC-free
9.7.4 GFRP Panels (Kitchen)
• Panel shall be high strength polyester resin combined with fiberglass

reinforcement.
• Product shall be moisture resistant.
• Panels shall be manufactured according to industry standard ASTM D-3841-2001
and ISO 9002 Certified.
• Panels shall be installed full in one piece with a width of 4’-0”.
• Shall be resistant to stain and rust proof.
9.8 INTERIOR SIGNAGE REQUIREMENTS
Interior Room Identification Signage is an important element in making the facility

inviting to children and adults. The signage shall be fully integrated with the
Architecture and SID.
• All Room Identification signage shall be from one manufacturer.

• Room identification signs shall be by room number only.
• All room numbers shall be permanent. The Contractor shall work with the Base
CDC Director to determine the room numbering system and plan. The numbers
shall be in chronological order and flow logically through the facility. Room
numbers on drawings are for construction only.
• Multiple window inserts for room identification and caregivers names to
accommodate the flexibility for personnel or room functions change.
• Activity Rooms shall have inserts to provide photo of each caregiver.
• Building Service signs for all permanent spaces such as mechanical,
electrical, communication and janitorial rooms shall have permanent room
numbers and permanent corresponding room name messages. Other rooms which
require permanent room numbers and names are; Kitchen, Laundry Room,
Isolation Room, Break Room and Training Room.
• Secondary Directional signs shall list room numbers with corresponding
directional arrows.
• Where possible, use international symbols in addition to messages.
• The main lobby shall have a wall mounted building directory.
• Each corridor shall have emergency/fire evacuation plan signs located at key
areas to insure life safety.
• A minimum of 4 evacuation plan signs shall be provided. All emergency/fire
evacuation plan signs shall be approved by the COR before production and
installation.
• All signs shall meet ABA requirements.
• Direction Signs shall be located at the entrances into all connecting
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 56
corridors.
• Each door throughout the facility, with the exception of store front doors
shall received a room sign with a permanent room number.
• Glass mounted signs shall be installed with a backer sheet that matches the
front of the sign so no attachment method is visible.
• Identify doors to receive a permanent room name and/or a window insert at
final design submittal of the interior signage schedule.
• Provide exit door tactile signage as required by NFPA 101.
9.9 FIXTURES / FURNISHINGS & EQUIPMENT (FFE)
The Base CDC shall be responsible for the FF&E.
10. STRUCTURAL DESIGN
10.1.1 Codes and References
10.1.2 The Structural Engineer shall be responsible for the design of the complete
structural building system. A complete structural system for the building shall
include foundations, walls, roof framing, roof diaphragms, lateral load stability,
framing and connection of any architectural features, and the support of mechanical
and electrical equipment. In addition, the Structural Engineer shall be responsible
for the design of all lesser related structures such as utility vaults, pits,
retaining walls, etc., although they may be shown on other disciplines’ drawings.
Structural design of the building shall be compatible with the architectural design.
Structural design shall be in accordance with the criteria, requirements, and guidance
provided in IBC, as modified by UFC 1-200-01, and the following requirements. The
Structural Engineer shall design exterior door landings as part of the building
foundation in areas subject to expansive-type soils.
10.1.3 Wood shall not be used for any structural members. Plywood shall not be used
for wall sheathing, structural roof sheathing, or floor decking.
10.1.4 Where dissimilar metals are in contact, or where aluminum is in contact with
concrete, mortar, masonry, wet or pressure-treated wood, or absorptive materials
subject to wetting, the surfaces shall be protected with a coat of bituminous paint or
asphalt varnish.
10.1.5 Variations from level or from slopes specified for roof decks, floors,
ceilings, beam soffits, lintels, sills, horizontal grooves, or other conspicuous lines
shall be as follows: for overall length of line or surface of 10 feet or less, + 1/8-
inch; up to 20 feet, + 1/4-inch; up to 40 feet, + 3/8-inch.
10.1.6 Where raised or depressed floors are provided, structural slab elevations
shall be adjusted so that all finished floor levels are the same.
10.1.7 A minimum safety factor of 1.5 shall be provided against uplift, sliding,
overturning, and buoyancy.
10.1.8 This project shall consider the principles of sustainable design under the
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 57
guidance provided by the U.S. Green Building Council in its Leadership in Energy
and Environmental Design (LEED) Green Building Rating System.
10.2 DESIGN LOADS
10.2.1 Load Requirements
Structural designs shall be in accordance with IBC, ASCE 7, UFC 1-200-01, UFC 3-310-
01, and the applicable industry codes or specifications for the particular material
involved. In the event of conflict, the most stringent criteria shall apply.
10.2.2 Building Classification
Category III per IBC for a building with day care facilities with an occupant load
greater than 250. Primary gathering building per UFC 4-010-01 since routinely
occupied by 50 or more DoD personnel in an established or predictable pattern of
activity that terrorists could recognize and exploit.
10.2.3 Dead Load
Weight of structure, coverings, access floors, raised floors, ceilings, and

permanent contents, plus 5% of steel member weights to account for connections.
10.2.4 Collateral Load
10 psf on roof and floors to account for suspended ceiling and miscellaneous
mechanical, plumbing, and electrical system loads.
10.2.5 Roof Live Load per IBC
20 psf, reducible for structural members with influence areas greater than 200
square feet.
10.2.6 Other Live Loads
In accordance with Appendix B of UFC 3-310-01. The following floor areas shall be
designed using the stated uniform loads, as a minimum:
Offices, Administrative Areas 100 psf

Storage, unless noted otherwise 125 psf
10.2.7 Wind Loads per IBC and ASCE 7
Basic wind speed and exposure category shall be in accordance with the Appendix A.
Importance factor shall be 1.15 for an Occupancy Category III structure. Internal
pressure coefficient shall be ±0.18 for an enclosed building.
10.2.8 Snow Loads per IBC and ASCE 7
Ground snow load, exposure factor, and thermal factor shall be in accordance with the
Appendix A. Importance factor shall be 1.1 for an Occupancy Category III structure.
Contractor's design shall account for roof slope, unbalanced snow loads, snow drifts,
sliding snow, and rain-on-snow surcharge load, as applicable.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 58
10.2.9 Seismic Loads per IBC and ASCE 7
Spectral response coefficients and site class shall be in accordance with the
Appendix A. Importance factor shall be 1.25 for an Occupancy Category III
structure.
10.2.10 Blast Loads per UFC 4-010-01, UFC 4-010-02 (FOUO) and UFC 4-020-01FA (FOUO)
At the controlled perimeter, and at parking and roadways where there is no

controlled perimeter:
Design basis threat: Explosive weight I.
Level of protection: Low (moderate damage, glazing fractures and may come out
of the frame at a reduced velocity).
At all parking, roadways and trash and recycle containers:

Design basis threat: Explosive weight II.
Level of protection: Low (moderate damage, glazing fractures and may come out
of the frame at a reduced velocity).
10.3 BUILDING SUBSTRUCTURE
10.3.1 Foundations and Floor Slab: Contractor’s geotechnical engineer shall make
recommendations for foundations, floor slabs, and the support of underground
utilities. Preliminary recommendations are provided in the Preliminary Geotechnical
Study in the Appendix A. These recommendations are for information only and the
Contractor shall be responsible for the final design of the foundations. See Section
01 10 10, paragraph 4, GEOTECHNICAL AND FOUNDATIONS, for additional requirements.
10.3.2 All slabs-on-grade shall be underlain by capillary water and vapor barriers as
described in Section 01 10 10, paragraph 4.4, CAPILLARY WATER AND VAPOR BARRIERS.
Structural fill or backfill for slabs and foundations shall be placed in 8-inch loose
lifts and compacted to 95 percent of modified Proctor density (ASTM D1557) at a
moisture content from minus 2% to plus 2% of the optimum moisture content. Slabs-on-
grade shall be isolated from foundations to prevent cracking of the slab due to
differential settlement. Positive drainage away from the exterior perimeter of the
proposed building shall be maintained.
Contractor’s geotechnical engineer shall make recommendations on the need to tie door
landings into the building foundation based on the presence of expansive-type soil.
10.4 BUILDING SUPERSTRUCTURE
10.4.1 Building Framing
The building superstructure shall be reinforced or prestressed concrete, reinforced

masonry, structural steel, cold-formed steel, or a combination of these. Exterior
walls shall comply with base architectural compatibility standards in accordance with
the Appendix A. All lateral-force-resisting elements shall be coordinated with
architectural requirements and layouts.
10.4.2 Roof System
The roof shall typically be structural metal deck supported by structural steel or
cold-formed steel framing. The steel supporting framing shall be open web joists, wide
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 59
flange beams, wide flange girders, trusses, or a combination of these. Minimum roof
slope shall comply with base architectural compatibility standards in accordance with
the Appendix A.
10.5 CONCRETE
10.5.1 Strength: Specified compressive strength f'c shall be a minimum of 3,000 psi at
28 days for all structural concrete, except as otherwise specified in the Appendix A.
Slabs-on-grade to receive vehicular traffic shall have a specified minimum flexural
strength of 650 psi at 28 days. Mix designs shall include recycled materials, such as
fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace slag, to the maximum extent possible.
Reinforcement shall comply with ASTM A615, Grade 60 minimum. Structural plain concrete
is not permitted.
10.5.2 Reinforcing: The reinforcing of concrete walls, continuous footings, and tie
and bond beams shall be continuous and therefore, typical details showing the
arrangement of reinforcing at corners and intersections of these members shall be
shown on the drawings.
10.5.3 Slabs-on-Grade: In no case shall a slab-on-grade be less than 4 inches thick.

Thickened slabs shall be required for walls and partitions that have a vertical load
of 300 pounds/foot to 950 pounds/foot. A separate, isolated wall footing shall be
provided for walls having a vertical load in excess of 950 pounds/foot. A minimum of
0.15 percent welded wire mesh or reinforcing bars shall be provided in each direction
in slabs, placed 1 inch clear from the top of slab. Welded wire fabric in flat sheets
or deformed reinforcing bars shall be used.
Slabs-on-grade shall be placed in lanes. The area bounded by crack control joints
shall not exceed 625 square feet, and the distance between parallel crack control
joints shall not exceed 25 feet. Crack control joints may be construction joints,
contraction joints, expansion joints, or isolation joints. Reentrant corners in slabs
shall be minimized, and where unavoidable, they shall be reinforced with two #4 bars,
4 feet long, placed diagonally to the corner. Discontinuous joints shall be minimized,
and where unavoidable, they shall be reinforced with two #4 bars, 4 feet long, placed
opposite the end of the discontinuous joint. No joints shall be located under ceramic
tile floors. Slabs-on-grade shall include exterior door landings in areas subject to
expansive-type soils.
The flatness of the floors shall be carefully controlled and the tolerances shall be
measured by the straightedge system as specified in ACI 117, using a 10-foot
straightedge, within 72 hours after floor slab installation. The listed tolerances
shall be met at any and every location at which the straightedge can be placed.
Bullfloated 1/2 inch

Straightedged 5/16 inch
Float Finish 3/16 inch
Trowel Finish 3/16 inch
Tolerances may also be measured by the F-number system in accordance with ACI 117.
10.5.4 Embeds: Exterior steel embedded in concrete for such purposes as exterior
railing, handrails, fence, base plates, anchor bolts, etc. shall be hot-dipped
galvanized unless otherwise directed.
10.5.5 Waterstops: Rubberized, keyed waterstops shall be provided in all construction
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 60
joints below grade between the exterior and interior of the building.
10.6 STEEL
10.6.1 Base Plates: All column base plates shall be placed on a minimum of 2 inches of
cementitious non-shrink grout. All column base plates and anchor bolts shall be
completely encased in concrete. All below-grade steel shall be completely encased in
concrete or coated with coal-tar epoxy.
10.6.2 Connections: in general, shop connections for structural steel shall be

welded, and field connections shall be made with high-strength bolts (ASTM A325) in
bearing-type connections. All connections other than standard AISC shear connections
shall be designed by the Structural Engineer and fully detailed on the final plans.
Connection angles shall be a minimum 5/16-inch thick and bolts shall be a minimum of
3/4-inch in diameter.
10.6.3 Bracing: If braced frames are used as all or part of the main lateral force
resisting system, the stability of the structural system shall not depend on any
single member or connection. Redundancy shall be provided either by using multiple
bays of tension-only X-bracing members or by using bracing members that are capable
of both tension and compression if bracing is placed in a single bay.
10.6.4 Steel Certificate: If a structural steel frame is provided, the fabricating

plant furnishing the structural steel shall be certified under the AISC
Certification Standard for Steel Building Structures. The erection plan shall be
reviewed, stamped and sealed by a structural engineer licensed by the jurisdiction
in which the Project is located.
10.6.5 Lintels: Steel lintel angles over masonry veneer openings shall have a minimum
thickness of 5/16-inch and shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM
A123. Provide a minimum coating grade of 100. Field clean, prime and finish paint
other steel lintels.
10.6.6 Joists: Joists shall be anchored to steel supports by bolting or field

welding. Provide embedded steel plates in masonry work. Where top chords are
extended, provide required section modulus of extensions on the drawings.
10.6.7 Cold-Formed Steel Framing: All cold-formed steel framing shall be formed from
steel that conforms to the requirements of ASTM A653, Grade 33 or higher, having a
minimum yield strength of 33 ksi. Minimum uncoated steel thickness (design thickness
times 0.95) shall be 0.0329-inch (20-gage). All cold-formed steel framing shall
receive a G-60 galvanized coating. All cold-formed steel framing connectors shall
receive a G-90 galvanized coating. Cold-formed steel framing units acting as
structural lateral-load-resisting elements are prohibited.
10.7 METAL DECK
10.7.1 Roof Deck: Metal roof deck material shall be galvanized steel and have a
minimum thickness of 0.0295-inch (22-gage). A structural metal roof deck shall be
provided under all roofs. Where metal deck is used, show required section modulus
and moment of inertia on drawings. Steel roof deck shall have a G-90 galvanized
coating thickness.
10.7.2 Construction: Structural metal roof decks shall be attached to structural
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 61
supports and to adjoining units using mechanical fasteners, such as screws or powder
actuated or pneumatically driven fasteners. Welding shall not be used to attach roof
decks.
10.8 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS AND CONCRETE MASONRY VENEER UNITS
10.8.1 Walls: All masonry walls shall be designed as reinforced masonry, neglecting
the tensile strength of masonry, to resist all applicable vertical and horizontal
loads. All exterior masonry walls shall satisfy the minimum vertical and horizontal
reinforcement requirements of UFC 4-010-01. All masonry shall be running bond only.
10.8.2 Vertical Reinforcement: Minimum thickness of structural masonry walls shall be

8 inches (nominal). Reinforcement shall comply with ASTM A615, Grade 60 minimum.
Minimum bar size shall be #4. Three vertical reinforcing bars shall be provided
continuously from support to support at each wall corner, and one vertical reinforcing
bar shall be provided at each side of each opening, at each side of each control
joint, at the end of each wall, and elsewhere in the wall panels at a maximum
horizontal spacing of 48 inches. This minimum reinforcement shall be of the same bar
size as the vertical reinforcement provided for flexural stresses.
10.8.3 Horizontal Reinforcement: Joint reinforcement shall be provided at the top of

the first course and at a maximum vertical spacing of 16 inches. In addition,
horizontal reinforcement in continuous masonry bond beams shall be provided at the
bottom course, within 16 inches of the top course, and at a maximum vertical spacing
of 48 inches. Horizontal reinforcement shall also be provided above and below all
wall openings. These bars shall extend a minimum of 40 bar diameters, but not less
than 24 inches, past the edges of the opening. The minimum horizontal reinforcement
shall be two #4 bars per bond beam. Lintel units shall not be used in lieu of bond
beam units.
10.8.4 Control Joints: Concrete masonry walls shall have vertical control joints as
follows.
a. At a maximum spacing of 24 feet or 3 times the wall height, whichever is

less,
b. At changes in wall height or thickness,
c. At approximately 1/2 the maximum spacing from wall intersections,
d. At points of stress concentration, and
e. At control joints in foundation walls and in floor slabs that support masonry
walls.
Control joints shall not be located at wall openings.
10.8.5 Inspection: A qualified masonry inspector approved by the COR shall perform
inspection of the masonry work. Minimum qualifications for the masonry inspector shall
be 5 years of reinforced masonry inspection experience or acceptance by a state,
municipality, or other governmental body having a program of examining and certifying
inspectors for reinforced masonry construction. The masonry inspector shall be present
during preparation of masonry prisms, sampling and placing of masonry units, placement
of reinforcement (including placement of dowels in footings and foundation walls),
inspection of grout space, immediately prior to closing of cleanouts, and during
grouting operations. The masonry inspector shall assure Contractor compliance with the
drawings and specifications. The masonry inspector shall keep a complete record of all
inspections and shall submit daily written reports to the Quality Control
representative reporting the quality of masonry construction.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 62
10.8.6 Caps: A precast concrete cap shall be provided on top of all masonry parapet
walls and masonry screen walls. Metal flashing shall be provided under the precast
concrete cap.
10.9 ANTITERRORISM FORCE PROTECTION
10.9.1 General: The structural design shall incorporate all applicable requirements
of UFC 4-010-01. The facility is considered a primary gathering building since 50 or
more DoD personnel will routinely occupy it with a population density of greater than
one person per 430 gross square feet. Consequently, the conventional construction
standoff distances are as follows:
• 148 feet to the controlled perimeter, which is the installation fence, or to

parking and roadways where there is no controlled perimeter.
• 82 feet to parking and roadways within a controlled perimeter, and to trash and
recycle containers.
A 10-meter (33-feet) zone of unobstructed space, in which placement of any explosive

device would be observable by building occupants, shall surround the facility.
Electrical and mechanical equipment and landscaping located within this area shall be
configured to provide no opportunity for concealment of explosive devices. Building
overhangs with inhabited space above them shall not be used.
10.9.2 Blast Effects: The inhabited portions of the facility shall provide both of the
following:
• A Low level of protection, as defined by UFC 4-010-01, against explosive weight

I, as specified by UFC 4-010-02 (FOUO), at the actual standoff distance to the
controlled perimeter, or to parking and roadways where there is no controlled
perimeter. This is the minimum requirement specified by UFC 4-010-01, which
means that analysis and design for the corresponding blast effects are not
required if the site design provides all of the conventional construction
standoff distances.
• A Low level of protection, as defined by UFC 4-010-01, against explosive weight
II, as specified by UFC 4-010-02 (FOUO), at the actual standoff distance to any
parking, roadways, and trash and recycle containers. This is the minimum
requirement specified by UFC 4-010-01, which means that analysis and design for
the corresponding blast effects are not required if the site design provides all
of the conventional construction standoff distances.
10.9.3 Exterior Walls and Roof: Structural and non-structural elements subject to
blast effects shall be designed in accordance with recognized principles of
structural dynamics, including appropriate strength increase factors and response
limits, as outlined in PDC-TR 06-08.
10.9.4 Windows and Skylights: All glazing shall meet the requirements of UFC 4-010-
01, the additional blast effects provisions specified above, and the following:
10.9.4.1 Supporting Structural Elements: Unless dynamic analysis is employed to

evaluate blast effects, design supporting structural elements and their connections
using their nominal strengths and a factored design load equal to eight times the
glazing resistance determined using ASTM E1300. Distribute the design load to the
structural elements only from the tributary area of the glazing. It is not necessary
to account for reactions from the supporting structural elements in the design of the
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 63
remainder of the structure.
10.9.4.2. Submittals: Demonstration that each different size and type of window or
skylight system and its connection to the structure meets the minimum antiterrorism
requirements specified herein shall be submitted to the Government for approval.
Demonstration shall be by either Design Analysis or Standard Airblast Test results, as
described below:
1) Design Analysis prepared and signed by a licensed professional engineer. The

analysis shall include calculations verifying the structural performance of each
window or skylight system proposed for use under the specified blast loads. The
window components and anchorage devices to the structure, as determined by the
analysis, shall be reflected in the shop drawings.
2) Standard Airblast Test results. In lieu of a design analysis, Standard Airblast

Test results may be submitted to demonstrate conformance with the minimum
antiterrorism requirements. Standard Airblast Test shall be conducted by arena
test or shock tube method in accordance with ASTM F1642 by an independent
testing agency regularly engaged in blast testing. Results shall be included in
a test report providing information in accordance with ASTM F1642, as prepared
by the agency performing the test. The test results shall demonstrate the
ability of each window or skylight system proposed for use to withstand the
airblast loading parameters and achieve the hazard level rating specified. For
proposed systems that are of the same type as the tested system but of a
different size, the test results may be accepted, provided that the proposed
size is within the range from 25% smaller to 10% larger in area, when compared
with the tested assembly. The test shall be performed on the entire proposed
window or skylight system, which shall include, but not be limited to, the
glazing, framing system, operating devices, and all anchorage devices. Anchorage
of the window or skylight frame or subframe shall replicate the method of
installation to be used for the project. The minimum airblast loading parameters
for the test shall be the peak positive reflected pressure and positive phase
reflected impulse that correspond to the applicable design basis threat and
standoff distance. The hazard rating for the proposed window systems, as
determined by the rating criteria of ASTM F 1642, shall not exceed the “Very Low
Hazard” rating. Results of systems previously tested by test protocols other
than ASTM F1642 may be accepted, provided that the required loading, hazard
level rating, and size limitations stated herein are satisfied.
10.10 SPECIFICATIONS
The Contractor shall edit and submit, as applicable, the following UFGS sections, as
well as any others required for construction of the Project:
03 11 13.00 10 Structural Concrete Formwork

03 15 13.00 10 Expansion Joints, Contraction Joints, and Waterstops
03 20 01.00 10 Concrete Reinforcement
03 31 00.00 10 Cast-in-Place Structural Concrete
03 45 00 Precast Architectural Concrete
03 45 33 Precast Structural Concrete
03 47 13 Tilt-Up Concrete
03 51 01 Precast Roof Decks
04 20 00 Masonry
05 12 00 Structural Steel
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 64
05 21 13 Deep Longspan Steel Joist Framing

05 21 16 Longspan Steel Joist Framing
05 21 19 Open Web Steel Joist Framing
05 21 23 Steel Joist Girder Framing
05 30 00 Steel Decks
05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
05 50 13 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications
11. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
The HVAC systems shall be designed to the latest industry standards, codes, and
Government regulations included in this solicitation as well as UFC 3-600-01. The
HVAC systems for this facility shall also be designed to be energy efficient and
provide a safe and comfortable environment for the children and staff utilizing the
facility.
Equipment shall be selected based on Life Cycle performance and not solely on initial
cost in accordance with sustainable design principles and UFC 3-400-01. HVAC systems
serving the child activity rooms shall be designed to provide individual temperature
control to these spaces. Outside air shall be provided in accordance with ASHRAE
62.1 and take precedence over UFC 4-740-14. Equipment shall be located to minimize
maintenance disruptions within the child activity rooms.
Design documents shall be submitted and approved in accordance with Section 01 10 12

prior to commencing work on the HVAC systems. The Contractor shall be responsible
for the professional quality and technical accuracy of all HVAC design documents and
shall insure construction meets all requirements of the approved design. Drawings,
specifications, and other design documents upon which construction is based shall be
coordinated with other disciplines to insure compatibility of all building systems.
HVAC systems shall be designed for occupancy between 6 a.m. and 7 p.m., Monday through
Friday. During unoccupied periods, operation of the dedicated outdoor air system can
be enabled to maintain the required humidity level with the facility.
11.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
Heat gain and loss calculations shall be, as a minimum, in accordance with the current
edition of the ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook. Computer generated loads must be
submitted with complete input and output summaries during the design process. Load
calculation software must be ASHRAE based. The cooling equipment shall be selected
based on satisfying both the total and sensible calculated loads. System shall be
designed, installed, balanced, and adjusted to distribute heating and cooling to all
habitable rooms, in proportion to the calculated heat losses/gains in these rooms.
Heating shall also be provided to mechanical rooms and other unoccupied areas as
needed to prevent pipes from freezing. HVAC systems shall provide uniform and
consistent interior space temperature while using equipment that is energy efficient
and easily maintained.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 65
Verify ventilation rates of each space with the referenced publications in this
mechanical design section. Conduct air balance calculations for the spaces in the
facility to verify total supply air, outdoor air, return air, and exhaust air.
Administrative areas and child activity rooms shall maintain a positive pressure with
respect to outdoors to aid in limiting infiltration.
The design shall reflect heating and cooling capacities based on the following design
parameters.
11.3.1 Design Parameters: Design the HVAC system and size the equipment to maintain
the Inside Design Conditions at the following Outside Design Conditions.
11.3.1.1 Outside Design Conditions:

Summer Conditions: 1% Occurrence dry bulb temperature and mean
coincident wet bulb temperature and at the 1%
Occurrence humidity ratio and mean coincident dry
bulb temperature
Winter Conditions: 99% Occurrence dry bulb temperature per UFC 3-400-02
Ambient Condenser Dry bulb temperature 3ºF above 1% Occurrence

Selection Temperature
Wind: Summer and Winter, speed and direction per

UFC 3-400-02
Location: North Latitude per UFC 3-400-02

West Longitude per UFC 3-400-02
Elevation Feet above sea level per UFC 3-400-02
11.3.1.2 Inside Design Conditions:
Lobby, Admin, 78°F dry bulb max, 55% Relative Humidity max – cooling
condition
Corridors, and
Laundry Rooms: 68°F dry bulb min, and 35% Relative Humidity min – heating
condition
Child Activity 78°F dry bulb max, 55% Relative Humidity max – cooling
condition
Rooms and
Isolation/Health 68°F dry bulb min
Room: 35-50% Relative Humidity – heating condition
Dry Storage: 70°F dry bulb max – cooling condition

30-60% Relative Humidity
50°F dry bulb min – heating condition
Kitchen: 78°F dry bulb max – cooling condition

62°F dry bulb min – heating condition
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 66
Outside Storage: Ambient + 10°F – cooling condition

55°F – heating condition
Mechanical and Ambient + 10°F – cooling condition

Electrical Rooms: 55°F – heating condition
Communications Rooms: 78°F ± 2°F dry bulb – cooling condition

55°F – heating condition
11.3.2 Ventilation and Exhaust Air Requirements:
Ventilation air will be conditioned by a dedicated outdoor air system (DOAS) and
supplied either directly to the occupied spaces or to the HVAC system(s) serving those
spaces. The DOAS will be sized to achieve interior design conditions as listed in
Section 11.3.1.2 at the dry bulb and humidity ratio design conditions listed in
Section 11.3.1.
Provide sufficient ventilation air to replace exhaust air plus 10% to allow for
building pressurization.
Minimum outdoor supply rates for occupants shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Standard
62.1, “Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality”. Mechanical ventilation shall
be provided for all normally occupied areas. Interior spaces shall be designed as
non-smoking. Exhaust ventilation rates for restrooms, locker rooms, and janitors
closets shall meet the requirements of the International Mechanical Code and shall not
be less than 2 cfm per square foot of floor area. HVAC related background sound in
rooms shall not exceed the ASHRAE Applications Handbook – 2003 “Design Guidelines for
HVAC-Related Background Sound in Rooms”. Refer to ASHRAE 62.1 for all other
ventilation standards. Provide “Emergency Air Distribution Shut-off” switch which
shall shut-off all sources of ventilation air and exhaust air in the facility to
comply with UFC 4-010-01. Emergency Air Distribution Shut-off switch shall be labeled
and protected by a cover to prevent accidental initiation and shall be provided near
the reception desk in the lobby.
Outside air intake for ventilation air shall be located at least 10 feet above
finished grade in accordance with UFC 4-010-01.
Janitor’s Closet and 2 cfm/ft² exhaust

General Storage rooms
Restrooms/Locker Rooms 2 cfm/ft² or 75 cfm per water closet exhaust
Infant Diaper Changing 200 cfm minimum exhaust over general area
Station/Toilet area
Toddler Diaper Changing 265 cfm minimum exhaust over general area
Station/Toilet area
Pre-school Diaper Changing 390 cfm minimum exhaust over general area
Station/Toilet area
Child Activity/Isolation/ 10 cfm/person + 0.18 cfm/sq ft of outside air per ASHRAE

Health Rooms 62.1
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 67
Offices 5 cfm/person + 0.06 cfm/sq ft of outside air per ASHRAE

62.1
Occupied Spaces Per ASHRAE 62.1
11.3.2.1 Air Change Requirement:
Provide the following minimum air changes as indicated:
Isolation/Health Room 10 – 12 air changes per hour
Laundry Room 3 – 5 air changes per hour
Kitchen 10 – 12 air changes per hour
Mechanical, Electrical, 10 air changes per hour or maximum 10ºF delta T

and Outdoor Storage Rooms
11.3.3 Cooling Systems:
11.3.3.1 Cooling System Selection Criteria
Cooling system for the facility shall be selected based on the Life Cycle Cost
Analysis. Life Cycle Cost Analysis shall be performed in accordance with UFC 3-400-01
“Design: Energy Conservation”. Cooling sources to be evaluated include, but are not
limited to, variable air volume air handling units with VAV boxes, fan coil units,
air-cooled chiller(s), or water-cooled chiller with variations of variable primary
flow, primary/secondary flow, and constant speed pumping distribution systems.
Comparisons can also evaluate the chilled water operating temperatures. Evaluation
shall include a comparison of two or more of these system types based on the region,
building design features and available energy sources. The final design shall include
a short (a few pages describing results, methods, reason for selection and why, etc.)
summary report and Building Life Cycle Cost (BLCC) program output and input. The
contractor shall utilize either TRANE Trace version 700 or Carrier Hourly Analysis
Program (HAP), latest editions to provide system energy consumptions. Provide
reasonably detailed cost estimates for each systems studied as part of the design
analysis. This will be the cooling system that is being proposed for the facility.
The life cycle analysis shall be performed and documented by utilizing the free
computer program, BLCC that is available via the US Dept of Energy web sites. The
programs reports will document all input and output. The actual site utility costs at
the installation shall be input into the BLCC program for the LCC equipment selection.
Refer to the Appendix A for further detail for the current site specific utility
rates. The life cycle cost analysis shall run for a minimum of 25 years and shall
include any final salvage values and annual costs for operation and maintenance based
upon ASHRAE estimation methods for those costs. Salvage costs shall be documented in
cost estimates and should generally be restricted to larger equipment items such as
boilers, chillers, cooling towers, pumps, and large air handlers, for example.
In addition to providing the LCC equipment selection report, provide a short report
giving both the estimated utility consumption for building HVAC, lighting, water etc.
and a maintenance analysis. The utility consumption estimates will not need to
include user process loads as those are not really predictable, but may include
estimated plug loads for administration areas. The maintenance report shall within a
few pages provide detail for major equipment such as, air handlers, condensers,
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 68
chillers, pumps, the proprietary maintenance and replacement intervals and material
requirements. The aim of the maintenance analysis is to assess level of quality and
longevity of the selected system.
Cooling system shall serve air-handling unit coils, fan-coil unit coils, or other
system that will provide uniform, consistent and comfortable space conditions with
zoned temperature control. Each Child Activity Room will have individual cooling
temperature control to maintain a comfortable temperature for the children in these
spaces. For all systems, equipment shall be located for ease of maintenance access
without disruption to the Child Activity Rooms. Locating terminal units above the
ceiling in the corridor is an acceptable location provided that hinged access panels
with adequate access to maintain the equipment is provided.
11.3.3.2 Cooling System Sizing Requirements
The capacity of the HVAC system shall be selected based upon the maximum and minimum
cooling needs of the facility. System capacity shall be selected such that it is able
to turndown and meet the minimum cooling and dehumidification needs of the facility
during cooler seasons when only minimal cooling is required.
Cooling equipment may be oversized by up to 10% to account for recovery from night set
forward.
Where winter outside design temperatures are below freezing, propylene glycol
solutions adequate for the winter outside design temperature shall be provided.
Pumps, cooling coils and chillers are to be selected based on the appropriate glycol
solution concentration.
11.3.3.3 Piping:
Chilled water piping shall be installed to distribute chilled water to the air handing
units, fan coil units, and any other equipment requiring chilled water. Piping shall
be sized to have pressure loss of less than 4.5 feet per 100 feet of pipe and velocity
less than 10 feet per second. Provide balancing valves and taps for flow measurement
at each branch, coil and at the end of each loop. Provide pressure gages and
thermometers at inlet and outlet of each air handling unit coil, fan coil unit coil,
and any other heat exchanging devices. Provide “temporary” chiller connections to
supply and return piping of chilled water loop. Pipe hangers and supports shall
conform to referenced MSS Standards. Provide manual air vents at high point in
systems. Ball valves shall be used for 2 inches and smaller shutoff and butterfly
valves used for 2-1/2 inches and larger sizes.
Above ground piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel conforming to ASTM A53 with
welded, screwed, flanged or grooved fittings or copper piping, ASTM B88, type “L”
with wrought copper or grooved fittings. Provide dielectric fittings between
different materials.
Below ground piping shall be prefabricated insulated double wall type. The carrier
piping shall be either black steel, copper, or PVC. The casing shall be either
polyethylene or reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP), thickness as recommended
by manufacturer. The insulation between the carrier pipe and casing shall be minimum
one inch thick, polyurethane foam having a minimum density of 2 pounds per cubic foot.
The polyurethane foam shall completely fill the annular space between the carrier pipe
and the casing. Manufacturer shall certify that the insulated pipe is free of
insulation voids.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 69
11.3.4 Heating Systems:
11.3.4.1 Heating System Selection Criteria
Heating system for the facility shall be selected based on the Life Cycle Cost
Analysis. Life Cycle Cost Analysis shall be performed in accordance with UFC 3-400-01
‘Design: Energy Conservation’. Heating sources to be evaluated include, but are not
limited to, natural gas, all electric, radiant floor system, or combination of these.
If natural gas is provided at the facility, carbon monoxide detectors shall be
provided in accordance with the protected premises carbon monoxide detection system
requirements of NFPA 720.. Final design shall include a comparison of three or more
systems based on the region, building design features and available energy sources.
Heating hot water systems can be evaluated as one of the LCCA alternatives to compare
constant speed distribution pumping and variable speed distribution pumping systems.
The final design shall include a short (a few pages describing results, methods,
reason for selection and why, etc.) summary report and Building Life Cycle Cost (BLCC)
program output and input. The contractor shall utilize either TRANE Trace version 700
or Carrier Hourly Analysis Program (HAP), latest editions to provide system energy
consumptions. Provide reasonably detailed cost estimates for each systems studied as
part of the design analysis. This will be the heating system that is being proposed
for the facility. The life cycle analysis shall be performed and documented by
utilizing the free computer program, BLCC that is available via the US Dept of Energy
web sites. The programs reports will document all input and output. The actual site
utility costs at the installation shall be input into the BLCC program for the LCC
equipment selection. Refer to the RFP Appendices for the current site specific
utility rates. The life cycle cost analysis shall run for a minimum of 25 years and
shall include any final salvage values and annual costs for operation and maintenance
based upon ASHRAE estimation methods for those costs. Salvage costs shall be
documented in cost estimates and should generally be restricted to larger equipment
items such as boilers, pumps, and large air handlers, for example.
In addition to providing the LCC equipment selection report, provide a short report
giving both the estimated utility consumption for building HVAC (gas and electric),
lighting, water etc. and a maintenance analysis. The utility consumption estimates
will not need to include user process loads as those are not really predictable. The
maintenance report shall within a few pages provide detail for major equipment such
as, air handlers, boilers, pumps, the proprietary maintenance and replacement
intervals and material requirements. The aim of the maintenance analysis is to assess
level of quality and longevity of the selected system.
Heating system shall serve air-handling unit coils, terminal reheat coils, fan-coil
unit coils, unit heaters, and kitchen hood make-up air unit, and other terminal
heating elements. Terminal units shall provide uniform, consistent and comfortable
space conditions with zoned temperature control. Each Child Activity Room will have a
dedicated heating source (coil or element) and individual temperature control to
maintain a comfortable temperature for the children in these spaces. Heating devices
shall be located to prevent children from coming in contact with surfaces having
temperatures in excess of 110 degrees F. For all systems, equipment shall be located
for ease of maintenance access without disruption to the Child Activity Rooms.
Locating terminal units above the ceiling in the corridor is an acceptable location
provided that adequate access to maintain the equipment is provided.
11.3.4.1.1 Gas-Fired Heating Hot Water System Criteria(where gas is available)
Natural gas fired boilers shall be high efficiency and located in the Mechanical Room.
Boiler(s) shall be mounted on 4-inch high chamfer-edge housekeeping pad(s). Adequate
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 70
makeup air for combustion shall be supplied to the Mechanical Room. Provide adequate
mechanical room ventilation to limit space temperature to 10°F above outdoor ambient.
Boiler sizes and pressures shall be in a range that allows an unmanned heating plant
in accordance with AFI 32-1068.
11.3.4.1.2 Radiant Floor Heating System Criteria
Evaluation shall include the use of an in-floor radiant floor heating system. Radiant
floor system is desirable as a primary or supplemental heating source in the Child
Activity Rooms. This system may be used in combination with another heating system
type previously described in this section. If a hot water radiant floor system is
utilized, metallic tubing shall not be encased in concrete slabs. The use of
recovered heat for the radiant floor system shall also be considered if available.
11.3.4.1.3 All Electric Resistance Heating System Criteria(where allowed)
All electric resistance heating shall be site specific and concurrence from the Base
shall be obtained.
11.3.4.2 Heating System Sizing Requirements
Heating equipment may be oversized by up to 20% to account for recovery from night
setback.
Where entering air temperatures or mixed air temperatures to hot water heating coils
are below freezing, integral face and bypass dampers shall be used. Water flow
through these coils shall be full flow. No water flow modulation will be allowed.
11.3.4.3 Piping
Hot water piping shall be installed to distribute heating water to the air handing
units, fan coil units, computer room units, terminal units, unit heaters, and any
other equipment requiring heating water. Piping shall be sized to have pressure loss
of less than 4.5 feet per 100 feet of pipe and velocity less than 10 feet per second.
Provide balancing valves and taps for flow measurement at each branch, coil and at the
end of each loop. Provide pressure gages and thermometers at inlet and outlet of each
air handling unit coil, fan coil unit coil, computer room unit, and any other heat
exchanging devices. Pipe hangers and supports shall conform to referenced MSS
Standards. Provide manual air vents at high point in systems. Ball valves shall be
used for 2 inches and smaller shutoff and butterfly valves used for 2-1/2 inches and
larger sizes.
Above ground piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel conforming to ASTM A53 with
welded, screwed, or flanged fittings or copper piping, ASTM B88, type “L” with
wrought copper fittings. Provide dielectric fittings between different materials.
11.3.5 Central Supply Air Systems:
11.3.5.1 Areas Served
The air systems shall supply conditioned air to all normally occupied spaces including
child activity rooms, break room, training room, isolation room, office areas, lobby,
and kitchen. Ventilation air shall be supplied by the DOAS either to the central HVAC
system(s) or directly to the occupied spaces.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 71
11.3.5.1.1 Kitchen
Kitchen shall be equipped with a dedicated air handling unit interlocked with kitchen
exhaust hood(s) operation and designed to provide make-up air for the kitchen exhaust
hood(s). Make-up air will be heated in winter and cooled in the summer. The kitchen
shall also be served from a central air system to provide general heating and cooling.
Cooling loads for the kitchen shall take into account the high heat loads associated
with a kitchen. Kitchen exhaust grease hood shall be equipped with a liquid agent,
fire suppression system. Kitchen exhaust grease hood shall be constructed to comply
with NSF, NFPA-96 and UL. Kitchen exhaust grease hood and other kitchen exhaust hoods
shall be constructed of minimum 18 gauge type 304 stainless steel.
11.3.5.1.2 Laundry
Laundry rooms shall be equipped with three commercial grade stackable washer and
dryers and one commercial grade dryer. Dryers can be electric or natural gas,
depending on availability of natural gas on site. Dryers shall be vented directly to
the outdoors and located for easy access for cleaning. In-line booster fans for dryer
exhaust are discouraged unless required by distance between dryer and exterior
discharge. Dryer exhaust vents shall not be combined.
11.3.5.2 Air Systems Selection Criteria
The selection of the DOAS and HVAC systems/equipment shall be based on Life Cycle Cost
Analysis to provide energy efficient operation throughout the life of the equipment
selected. Life Cycle Cost Analysis shall be completed in accordance with UFC 3-400-01
‘Energy Conservation’. Air system alternatives to be evaluated include, but are not
limited to, comparing variable air volume systems, constant volume systems, fan coil
units and condenser loop systems used in conjunction with the DOAS. Evaluate using
condenser heat recovery and/or exhaust/relief air enthalpy recovery systems with the
use of the DOAS. Recommend specifying DX type DOAS to allow their operation
independent of chiller operation. Controlling latent load with the DX DOAS will allow
raising chill water temperatures to the central HVAC system(s) thus increasing chiller
efficiency and reducing equipment size.
11.3.5.3 General System Description
Ventiation air will be conditioned by a DOAS to a neutral temperature and given dew
point. The dew point set point will be determined to maintain humidity level below
the maximum levels described in Section 11.3.1. Air from the DOAS will be supplied
either to the HVAC system(s) or directly to the occupied spaces. Supplying air
directly to the occupied spaces will require only the DOAS unit to operate during
unoccupied periods of time. AHU’s and DOAS shall be located inside the mechanical
room at floor level. Cooling coil drain pans shall be constructed of stainless steel.
Outside air shall be introduced to the DOAS through either wall mounted outside air
intake louvers (at a minimum 10 feet above grade) with an interlocked motorized low
leakage control damper on the outside air duct near the louver or roof mounted air
intake hood. AHU’s shall have a temperature-reset function for the unit discharge air
temperature.
Variable air volume systems shall utilize variable frequency drives to accommodate
full and part load conditions. The DOAS will be configured to operate independently
to continue to provide dehumidification and pressurization at night and weekends when
needed as based upon interior humidity levels.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 72
Fan-coil units or other terminal devices shall serve each child activity room to
provide individual temperature control. Units shall recirculate air within each child
activity room and provide individual space temperature control. Space temperature
sensors will be located 12 inches and at 54 inches above the finished floor in each
child activity room. Temperature control adjustments shall be made at the thermostat
at 54 inches above finished floor. Fans shall be selected for low noise level.
Relief air shall be provided by transferring air to areas being exhausted (restrooms,
etc.).
A central exhaust/relief system shall be evaluated during the LCCA to determine if

heat recovery is a cost-effective alternative. This system would utilize a central
exhaust/relief header and heat recovery device to pre-condition the supply air or
outside air.
Outside air for the DOAS shall be monitored and measured using an air flow monitoring
station. The air flow monitoring station shall be of the thermal dispersion
technology type and shall interface with the DDC system.
11.3.5.4 Air Handlers
Provide modular construction, double wall air handling units. Provide ARI 430 and
AMCA 210 certified fans and ARI 410 certified coils. Unit shall be rated as an entire
assembly. Sound rating shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 68. Provide a minimum of 2 inch
thick insulation, 1.5 lb/cu. ft. density sandwiched between two sheets of solid
galvanized steel Coils shall be copper tube, aluminum fin type with stainless steel
frames provided by the air handling unit manufacturer. Provide positive-draining,
stainless steel drain pans. Provide UV light section downstream of the cooling coil
in the DOAS unit only. Provide a minimum of 24 inch access section with door upstream
of each coil or heating section. Maximum cooling coil face velocity shall be limited
to 550 fpm. Configure units in a draw through arrangement with access between all
sections. Provide Variable Frequency Drives (VFD’s) with VAV fans and AHU’s. Provide
smoke detectors in the supply and return ductwork per NFPA 90A. Install the AHU’s on
6 inch concrete pads in the mechanical rooms. Concrete pad shall extend a minimum of
6 inches beyond the AHU footprint on all sides unless otherwise noted and have
chamfered edges.
11.3.5.5 Ductwork
Ducts shall be galvanized steel with G90 coating. Ducts shall be designed,
constructed and installed in accordance with SMACNA Standards. Provide external FSK
foil faced wrap insulation or rigid duct insulation for supply and outside air ducts
to provide a U-value less than 0.20 BTU/sq. ft.– °F. Duct systems shall not be
installed underground. Flexible ducts shall comply with NFPA 90A and UL 181 and be
limited to five foot maximum length and flexible elbows shall be limited to less than
90 degrees total bend. Only 1 section of flexible duct is allowed for each diffuser.
Flexible duct shall not pass through fire rated walls. All 90 degree elbows shall be
constructed from hard duct. Turning vanes shall be provided in duct changes of
direction with non-radiused elbows. Bends in rigid ductwork shall be at a minimum
radius to diameter ratio of1.5. Each duct branch shall be fitted with a manual
balancing damper. All ductwork shall be located above slab, supported from roof
structures. Return air shall be ducted to unit from each space. Plenum returns
systems will not be acceptable. Duct return shall maintain NC-25 requirements at
rooms for general occupancy space. Test ductwork in accordance with SMACNA 1143.
Total duct leakage shall not exceed 2%. Access shall be provided to all devices or
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 73
areas that may require periodic inspection, including but not limited to balancing
devices, motor operated dampers, flow measuring stations, smoke/fire dampers, etc.
Provide permanent test ports in ductwork at balancing test points and DDC sensor
locations. Provide manual balancing dampers at each take-off to a diffuser, register,
or grille, located as faraway from the air outlet as practical.
Internal duct insulation shall not be allowed.
The following materials shall be used:
Ductwork System Material

Supply Galvanized Steel – Insulated
Outside air Galvanized Steel – Insulated
Return Galvanized Steel – No insulation (unless routed through
unconditioned spaces)
General Galvanized Steel – No insulation
exhaust
Kitchen As required by code
exhaust
11.3.5.6 Ductwork Accessories

For low-pressure rectangular duct systems, use 45° entries into branches from the main
duct. Provide manual volume dampers in each branch take-off from the main duct to
control air quantity. Dampers shall conform to SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.
Provide outdoor air intake and exhaust louvers of aluminum designed to prevent the
entry of rain or snow. Louvers shall be designed to meet the wind load rating for the
building as indicated in the structural chapter. Intake plenums shall have bottom
panel sloped towards the louver opening to drain any water that comes through the
louver. Intakes shall be a minimum of 25 feet from the nearest exhaust outlet and
exterior mechanical equipment. Provide bird screens at all louvers. Provide a low-
leakage motorized damper at each outside air intake. Duct balancing devices shall be
heavy duty, opposed blade dampers with sleeved bearings. The manual actuator shall
extend through the insulation with extension standoff. Actuator shall have locking
quadrant for setting. Provide balancing dampers at each branch takeoff from a main
duct in supply, return and exhaust systems.
11.3.5.7 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles
Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be selected as appropriate for the application
and should be consistent throughout the building. Select to ensure maintaining noise
levels below specified criteria. Ductwork behind registers and grilles shall not be
visible or the ductwork shall be painted black. All diffusers and grilles shall be
aluminum to prevent corrosion and shall be painted to match interior. Provide lay-in
type supply diffusers in all rooms with ceiling served by air handling units. Provide
appropriate return air grilles or diffusers in ceilings for a ducted return air
system. In child activity rooms, provide air diffusers that minimize drafts on
children by providing uniform air velocities of not more than 30 feet per minute at a
height of 12 inches above the floor.
11.3.5.8 Terminal Equipment
VAV terminals shall be pressure independent-type rated per ARI 880. Box shall be
fully insulated per NFPA 90A and UL 181 with a minimum 1/2 inch thick, 1.5 pounds per
cubic foot density glass fiber. Provide insulation on all areas of the box that is
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 74
subject to sweating, including inlet and outlet connection and heating coil casings.
VAV box shall include sound attenuators if required to meet noise constraints. Locate
boxes to be accessible for maintenance and replacement. Access panel shall be
provided for reheat coils maintenance and cleaning. Provide standard shut-off type
VAV boxes with hot water or electric reheat coils as determined by the LCCA for
internal spaces and fan powered VAV boxes with reheat for perimeter spaces. Each VAV
terminal shall have DDC control with Energy Management and Control System (EMCS)
interface. VAV boxes shall not be allowed to fully shut-off. Controls shall be
installed by VAV box manufacturer.
11.3.5.9 Duct Silencers
Duct silencers shall be installed in the main supply and/or return ducts of each air
handling unit as required to meet acoustical requirements of the facility. Duct
silencers shall be accessible.
11.3.6 Computer Room Unit Systems:
11.3.6.1 Design Intent
Computer room unit systems are smaller systems designed to allow the larger central
cooling system to be turned down or off on nights and weekends and still protect
the equipment that is located within these rooms. Ventilation air for these spaces
is not required since they are not normally occupied.
11.3.6.2 Area Served
Provide a dedicated cooling system to serve the communications room, sized to meet the
design conditions listed above.
11.3.6.3 System Requirements
Provide a ductless split DX system with integral DDC controls. Provide unit with an
indoor wall-mounted evaporator/fan section with electric resistance heat (if
required) and an outdoor condensing unit section.
11.3.7 Ventilated and Heated Spaces:
11.3.7.1 Area Served
Ventilation and heating systems are required for the following spaces:
Mechanical Rooms
Electrical Rooms
Outdoor Storage Rooms
11.3.7.2 System Requirements
Rooms shall be ventilated via exhaust fans. Outside air shall be introduced to the
room for ventilation through motorized dampers in the outside air intake. Heating
shall be provided. Roof mounted exhaust fans are not acceptable.
11.3.7.3 Ductwork
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 75
Exhaust ductwork shall meet the requirements of the centralized supply air system and
shall not be insulated for heated and ventilated spaces.
11.3.7.4 Fans
Exhaust fans shall be cabinet type, inline, or wall mounted. Roof-mounted fans are
not acceptable. Fans shall be V-belt driven by belt drives sized for 150% of design
power requirement. Provide adjustable sheaves for fans up to 5 hp. Small fans not
available with V-belt drive may be directly driven. Motor selection shall permit non-
overloading operation at all conditions. All fans shall be provided with vibration
isolators to decouple the motor assembly from the fan housing. Suspend fans with
vibration isolators from building structure. Fans shall be AMCA 210 certified, with
AMCA seal. Fan bearings shall have a minimum average life of 200,000 hours at design
operating conditions. As far as practicable, locate fans such that they are readily
accessible for maintenance.
11.3.8 Restroom Exhaust Systems:
11.3.8.1 System Design Requirements
Two system design approaches shall be considered during design and shall be
incorporated into the Life Cycle Cost Analysis. One approach shall utilize a central
exhaust system with an energy recovery device to reduce operating costs. The other
approach shall utilize multiple localized exhaust fans. The system selection shall be
based on the system with the lowest life cycle cost as determined by the Life Cycle
Cost Analysis results. Air shall be exhausted from all restrooms, janitor’s closets,
diaper changing stations, the isolation room, and corridors (as required) in
accordance with the rates presented earlier in this section.
11.3.8.1.1 Central Exhaust System Design Approach
The facility shall be served by a centralized exhaust system to optimize facility

energy performance by implementing an energy recovery system. This system approach
would utilize a single exhaust fan. By utilizing a central exhaust system, energy
recovery shall be available from the exhaust air to pre-condition the outside air
make-up to the DOAS. The central exhaust fan shall be equipped with a variable
frequency drive to modulate in accordance with the loading of the filters.
11.3.8.1.2 Localized Exhaust System Design Approach
Smaller local exhaust fans are also acceptable if the heat recovery system does not
prove cost-effective during the LCCA, however exhaust systems shall be grouped
together to minimize the quantity of exhaust fans and to reduce wall penetrations.
Roof mounted exhaust fans are not acceptable.
11.3.8.2 Ductwork
Ductwork shall meet the requirements of the centralized supply air system and shall
not be insulated, unless routed through unheated spaces.
11.3.8.3 Fans
Exhaust fans shall be cabinet type, inline, or wall mounted. Roof-mounted fans are
not acceptable. Fans shall be V-belt driven by belt drives sized for 150% of design
power requirement. Provide adjustable sheaves for fans up to 5 hp. Small fans not
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 76
available with V-belt drive may be directly driven. Motor selection shall permit non-
overloading operation at all conditions. All fans shall be provided with vibration
isolators to decouple the motor assembly from the fan housing. Suspend fans with
vibration isolators from building structure. Fans shall be AMCA 210 certified, with
AMCA seal. Fan bearings shall have a minimum average life of 200,000 hours at design
operating conditions. As far as practicable, locate fans such that they are readily
accessible for maintenance.
11.3.9 Air Filtration Requirements: All office admin areas and child activity
rooms – Minimum MERV 6 rating for pre-filters and minimum MERV 8 final filters.
11.4 GENERAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
11.4.1 Material and Equipment: All materials and equipment shall be new and free from
defects. Materials and equipment shall be proven to be satisfactory in commercial or
industrial use for 2 years prior to the bid opening. The 2-year use shall include
applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar
size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturer’s catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. All
materials in the same category shall be the product of a single manufacturer (i.e.,
fans, gate valves, globe valves, sprinkler heads, etc.). All equipment shall be
located to allow a minimum of 3 feet of clearance around all access/service panels.
Clearance around electrical and electrical panels shall be provided in accordance with
the National Electrical Code (NEC). Access panels designed for removal and/or
replacement of parts, which require greater than 3 feet for this activity, shall be
provided with sufficient clearance to remove the largest and/or longest part of the
assemblage. All access panels shall be appropriately labeled with stencils, or a
minimum of 3 inch tall letters. Building mechanical equipment shall be held in place
with anchor bolts set in “green” concrete and held in place by plywood templates until
the concrete has cured. Inertia pads shall be provided for equipment where
recommended by equipment manufacturer. Housekeeping pads shall be provided for all
other floor mounted mechanical equipment. Contractor shall provide all safety
equipment required to operate and install the equipment.
All exterior mechanical equipment shall have painted finishes that pass a salt spray
test conducted per ASTM B117 for duration of at least 1000 hours.
11.4.2 Maintainability: System maintainability is a critical, but often overlooked,

aspect of a facility. The contractor shall provide for maintenance of all items in
this facility. This shall be coordinated with all systems (it is unacceptable
planning to install lights, then block access to them with pipes and conduit). System
maintainability has three broad categories. The design analysis and O&M manuals shall
address the features/procedures described below in detail.
11.4.2.1 Routine Maintenance (filters, lights, lubrication, inspection, etc.)
This requires the most frequent and easiest access. The need for portable or fixed
ladders (no more than 10 ft) should be minimized and, where needed, ensure that space
is available to use them properly.
11.4.2.2 Component Replacement (coils, fans, motors, boiler/chiller tubes, etc.)

This requires less frequent access, but when the need arises, this work must be done
quickly and efficiently, since normally this has the greatest impact on the user.
Everything needed to perform these tasks shall be provided (work platforms, equipment
access hatches/panels, hoists, cranes, freight elevators, etc.).
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 77
11.4.2.3 Equipment Replacement (air handling unit, switchgear, chillers, etc.)
This occurs very seldom so permanent equipment to support these tasks is not required.
However, equipment replacement must be accommodated and the facility shall include
items such as removable wall sections, access routes, etc. to allow replacement with
the least amount of collateral damage.
11.4.2.4 Maintenance Features / Procedures
Ensure that all equipment, including filters, controls, control valves, backflow
preventers, and coils are easily accessible and have ample room for servicing,
inspection, and cleaning. Isolation valves shall be provided for each terminal
unit, zone, branch, long runs, etc. as necessary for proper isolation and
maintenance. Coils shall be fully removable without requiring demolition of any
building components. Piping configuration at all coils shall include unions or
flanges to facilitate easy coil removal.
The design-build contractor shall ensure that all maintenance and repair activities
can be performed safely and efficiently without needing to bring in extensive
material handling (i.e. A-frames) or access equipment (i.e., ladders).
Locate all valves, pumps, strainers, controls, sensors, and other items requiring
regular service such that they may be maintained from floor level when possible. If
not accessible from floor level, then permanent maintenance access shall be
provided.
Ensuring maintainability requires careful coordination of piping, conduit, etc., to

avoid blocking access by cranes, hoists, ladders, etc. The contractor shall make
this a priority, recognizing that this will generally result in longer runs of
pipe/conduit.
All above ceiling utilities (cable trays, ductwork, junction boxes, utility piping,
etc.) shall be accessible for a worker to reach two sides plus the service side with
a minimum 3 feet of clearance (greater if required for component
maintenance/disassembly).
Permanent maintenance access shall be provided for all suspended mechanical

equipment. Refer to the Architectural section for requirements. Provide catwalks
for all equipment requiring servicing located above ceilings.
Roof-mounted equipment is prohibited.
Water treatment systems for boilers/chillers and cooling towers (if provided) shall be
designed and installed such that chemical handling is accomplished at floor level.
11.4.3 Operation and Maintenance Manual: Operations and Maintenance Manuals –

Contractor shall provide Operation Manuals, Maintenance Manuals and spare parts
inventory lists for each piece of mechanical equipment. Contractor shall furnish
control diagrams as part of as-built documentation. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
for all components of the HVAC systems shall be required by the design. Manuals shall
be submitted for approval 60 days prior to the scheduled completion date for the
project. The design shall include requirements for a minimum of 8-hours to train
operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the complete HVAC system.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 78
Framed instructions, control drawings, and system diagrams shall be in place prior to
the start of training.
11.4.4 Training: Contractor shall provide operator training for all systems for which
an operation and/or maintenance manual is provided. In addition, the contractor shall
provide video tapes of the training sessions.
11.4.5 Spare Parts: Contractor shall replace all filters in all systems at building
occupancy by the user, plus one additional set of replacement filters for all
systems. Contractor shall provide replacements for a minimum of 10% of all belts,
pulleys, flush valves, and bearings in all sizes provided.
11.4.6 Routing: Routing of piping and ductwork in exposed locations shall be

parallel or perpendicular to the building structure. Do not install any HVAC or
plumbing piping inside the block cores of exterior concrete masonry unit (CMU)
walls. Install all piping in furred walls or in pipe chases.
11.5 TECHNICAL NOTES
11.5.1 Diffusers: All diffusers shall be aluminum louvered face type. Perforated
face diffusers shall not be allowed. Diffusers shall be selected and sized to
produce the specified sound levels.
11.5.2 Zoning: The HVAC systems shall be zoned to provide maximum year-around comfort
and to provide adequate flexibility for utilizing areas of the facility during non-
work hours. Each child activity room shall be a separate zone. Zoning shall consider
building orientation, internal loads, function, location, and use of rooms. The
design shall include testing, balancing, and adjusting of all HVAC systems by a
certified TABB, AABC or NEBB test and balance firm. Reports of all tests shall be
submitted for approval to the Contracting Officer’s Representative on standard TABB,
AABC or NEBB forms.
11.5.3 Balancing: The air distribution system shall be designed to meet specified
room criteria (RC) sound levels when operating at maximum space design requirements
(Maximum air flow). Fire dampers, smoke dampers, exhaust fans, terminal units,
turning vanes, balancing dampers, control dampers, diffusers, registers, grilles,
louvers, flexible connections, etc. shall be selected to provide a complete, easy to
balance air distribution system free of objectionable noise.
11.5.4 Piping and Pumps:

Piping systems shall be designed to include pipe, fittings, dial type thermometers,
gages, pumps, hangers, valves, flexible connectors, balancing cocks, wells for
controllers and sensors, strainers, traps, reducing stations, Barco type venturi flow
meters, etc. as required to provide complete, functional, easy to balance systems.
All pumps shall be equipped with inlet and outlet pressure gages. Hot water heating
and chilled water piping systems shall be provided with a chemical treatment system
complete with bypass feeder and chemicals to control scaling inside the pipe. If
used, cooling tower condenser water shall be provided with a chemical treatment system
complete with tanks and chemical feed pumps.
11.5.5 Ductwork: In areas where the ducts are exposed, provide round spiral seam duct
with an external wrap. Fiberglass duct shall not be used on this project. Size all
exhaust, return, outside air, and low pressure supply ductwork at a pressure drop of
.08” static pressure per 100’ of duct.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 79
11.5.6 Ductwork Accessories: Do not use scoops in the ductwork for extraction of
air to branch lines. Use 45 degree takeoffs with volume dampers.
11.5.7 Roof-Top Equipment: With the exception of gravity intake or exhaust hoods,
roof-top equipment is prohibited.
11.5.8 Energy Efficiency: Materials, U-factors, building orientation, energy

efficient equipment including electric motors, temperature control systems, heat
reclaim, shading, etc. shall be utilized to the extent possible to provide an energy
efficient facility which shall be in compliance with ASHRAE 90.1.
11.5.9 Identification: All piping, plumbing, fire protection and HVAC systems shall
be clearly marked for identification with permanent color coded markers.
Identification scheme shall be per ASME A13.1. Pipes and ducts shall be labeled at
each valve or damper, control device, tee and elbow and also regular interval not
greater than 20 feet between markers. Valves shall be tagged and a laminated valve
schedule shall be mounted in the mechanical room.
11.5.10 Valves: Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures.

Valves 2 inches and smaller shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and solder
type connections for tubing. Valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall have flanged
bodies and bronze trim. Valves shall conform to the following standards:
Description: Standard Butterfly Valves MSS-SP-67; Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves

MSS SP-71; Ball Valves, Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder MSS SP-110; Joint and
Flared ends Cast-Iron Plug Valves MSS SP-78; Bronze Globe, Angle and Check
Valves MSS SP-80; Steel Valves, Socket-Welding and Threaded Ends ASME B16.34;
Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves MSS SP-85; Vacuum Relief Valves ANSI Z21.22;
Water Pressure Reducing Valves ASSE 1003; Water Heater Drain Valves ASSE 1005;
and Trap Seal Primer Valves ASSE 1018.
11.5.11 Gauges: Provide meters, thermometers and gauges for mechanical systems.
Provide temperature and pressure gauges at all chillers, boilers, air handlers, heat
exchangers, and other similar devices. Provide pressure gauges at all pumps, pressure
reducing devices, fire sprinkler risers and water service entrances.
11.5.12 Hangers and Supports: Hangers and supports shall be factory fabricated
according to MSS SP-58. A licensed engineer shall design all hanger and supports for
the project. Lateral supports shall be provided to prevent piping and ductwork from
swaying.
11.5.13 Strainers: Install strainers upstream of all control valves. Install

unions or flanges at all pieces of equipment.
11.5.14 Mechanical Vibration Control and Seismic Control: Mechanical Vibration

Control and Seismic Control: All vibrating equipment shall be isolated with vibration
isolators and flexible connections according to UFC 3-450-01 standards. Design
calculations, isolation base designs and seismic restraint designs shall be certified
by a qualified professional engineer.
11.5.15 Insulation: All piping and ductwork subject to sweating shall be insulated
including but not limited to chilled water piping, supply air ductwork, outside air
ductwork, storm water piping, refrigerant piping, and cold water piping. All hot
water piping and other heat conveying systems shall be insulated. Exposed
insulation shall be metal or PVC jacketed, exterior insulation shall have a
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 80
weatherproof jacket. All valves, tanks, pumps, and other similar devices contained
in these systems shall be insulated. Chilled water systems shall be insulated with
mineral fiber, flexible elastomeric cellular insulation, or cellular glass
insulation (for humid regions). Insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A for UL flame
spread and smoke developed ratings.
11.5.16 Sound Criteria: Each room shall be designed to be less than the maximum
allowable room criteria (RC) levels per ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook 2005, Chapter 7.
11.5.17 Motors:
Single-phase, fractional-horsepower, alternating-current motors shall be premium
efficiency types, corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11. Polyphase
motors shall be selected based on high-efficiency characteristics relative to the
applications as listed in NEMA MG 10. Additionally, all polyphase squirrel-cage
medium-induction motors with continuous ratings shall meet or exceed energy efficient
ratings in accordance with Table 12-10 of NEMA MG 1. Motors used with variable speed
drives shall be rated for variable speed drive service.
11.5.18 Variable Frequency Drives:

The same manufacturer shall provide all variable frequency drives (VFD’s) used on
electric motors for system components. Variable frequency drives shall be solid
state, with a Pulse Width Modulated output waveform. The VFD’s shall employ a 12
pulse full wave rectifier, DC Line Reactor, capacitors and insulated Gate Bipolar
Transistors as the output-switching device. The drive efficiency shall be 97%
efficient or better at full speed and full load. Fundamental power factor shall be
0.98 at all speeds and loads. The VFD total current and voltage harmonic distortion
shall meet IEEE Standard 519. Enclosure shall be NEMA Type 1, or as dictated by
location. The VFD’s shall have a door interlocked disconnect switch and a manual
bypass switch, which allows servicing of the drive while the driven equipment is
operating. Variable frequency drives must be set-up during testing and balancing
procedures. A control interface shall be provided to allow for remote monitoring of
VFD functions and alarms from the DDC control system front-end computer.
11.5.19 Metering: Potable water, electricity, and gas meters shall be monitored by
the Direct Digital Control (DDC) System and base UMCS (Utility Monitoring and Control
System). See Utilities section for additional information.
11.6 CONTROL SYSTEM
Provide a Building Automation System consisting of a building control network, and

integrate the building control network into the Base UMCS as specified.
The building control network shall be a single complete non-proprietary Direct Digital
Control (DDC) system for control of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning
(HVAC) systems as specified herein, unless noted otherwise. The building control
network shall be an Open implementation of LonWorks® technology using ANSI/EIA 709.1B
as the only communications protocol and use only LonMark Standard Network Variable
Types (SNVTs), as defined in the LonMark® Resource Files, for communication between
DDC Hardware devices to allow multi-vendor interoperability.
The new building control network shall be capable of interfacing with the
Installation’s existing DDC system and UMCS.
11.6.1 The building automation system shall be open in that it is designed and
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 81
installed such that the Government or its agents are able to perform repair,
replacement, upgrades, and expansions of the system without further dependence on the
original Contractor. This includes, but is not limited to, the following:
(a) Install hardware such that individual control equipment can be replaced by
similar control equipment from other equipment manufacturers with no loss of system
functionality.
(b) Necessary documentation (including rights to documentation and data),

configuration information, configuration tools, programs, drivers, and other software
shall be licensed to and otherwise remain with the Government such that the Government
or it agents are able to perform repair, replacement, upgrades, and expansions of the
system without subsequent or future dependence on the Contractor.
11.6.2 All DDC Hardware shall:
(a) Be connected to a TP/FT-10 ANSI/EIA 709.3 control network.
(b) Communicate over the control network via ANSI/EIA 709.1B, exclusively.
(c) Communicate with other DDC hardware using only SNVTs.
(d) Conform to the LonMark® Interoperability Guidelines.
(e) Be locally powered; link power (over the control network) is not acceptable.
(f) Be fully configurable via standard or user-defined configuration parameter types

(SCPT or UCPT), standard network variable type (SNVT) network configuration inputs
(nci), or hardware settings on the controller itself to support the application. All
settings and parameters used by the application shall be configurable via standard or
user-defined configuration parameter types (SCPT or UCPT), standard network variable
type (SNVT) network configuration inputs (nci), or hardware settings on the controller
itself.
(g) Provide input and output SNVTs required to support monitoring and control
(including, but not limited to, scheduling, alarming, trending and overrides) of the
application. Required SNVTs include, but are not limited to, SNVT outputs for all
hardware I/O, SNVT outputs for all setpoints and SNVT inputs for override of
setpoints.
(h) To the greatest extent practical, not rely on the control network to perform the
application.
11.6.3 Controllers shall be Application Specific Controllers whenever an ASC suitable

for the application exists. When an ASC suitable for the application does not exist,
use programmable controllers or multiple application specific controllers.
11.6.4 Application Specific Controllers shall be LonMark Certified whenever a LonMark

Certified ASC suitable for the application exists. For example, VAV controllers must
be LonMark certified.
11.6.5 Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) shall be configurable via an LNS plug-
in whenever an ASC with an LNS plug-in suitable for the application exists.
11.6.6 Each scheduled system shall accept a network variable of type SNVT occupancy
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 82
and shall use this network variable to determine the occupancy mode. If the system
has not received a value to this network variable for more than 60 minutes, it shall
default to a configured occupancy schedule.
11.6.7 Gateways may be used provided that each gateway communicates with and performs
protocol translation for control hardware controlling one and only one package unit.
11.6.8 Perform all necessary actions needed to fully integrate the building control
system. These actions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Configure M&C Software functionality including: graphical pages for System Graphic
Displays including overrides, alarm handling, scheduling, trends for critical values
needing long-term or permanent monitoring via trends, and demand limiting.
• Install IP routers or ANSI/CEA-852 routers as needed to connect the building

control network to the UMCS IP network. Routers shall be capable of configuration via
DHCP and use of an ANSI/CEA-852 configuration server but shall not rely on these
services for configuration. All communication between the UMCS and building networks
shall be via the ANSI/CEA-709.1B protocol over the IP network in accordance with
ANSI/CEA-852.
11.6.9 Provide the following to the Government for review prior to acceptance of the
system:
• The latest version of all software and user manuals required to program, configure
and operate the system.
• Points Schedule drawing that shows every DDC Hardware device. The Points Schedule
shall contain the following information as a minimum:
ο Device address and NodeID.
ο Input and Output SNVTs including SNVT Name, Type and Description.
ο Hardware I/O, including Type (AI, AO, BI, BO) and Description.
ο Alarm information including alarm limits and SNVT information.
ο Supervisory control information including SNVTs for trending and overrides.
ο Configuration parameters (for devices without LNS plug-ins).
Example Points Schedules are available at https://eko.usace.army.mil/fa/besc/
The following standard Input/Output (I/O) points to be connected and integrated for
monitoring and control (starter list which is not necessarily complete) shall be
provided. Provide alarm limits, etc. as appropriate for all I/O:
Outside Temperature (F)

Outside Humidity (%)
DOAS Discharge Air Temp (F)
DOAS Discharge Dew Point Temp (F)
Boiler Safeties (All)
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 83
Chiller Safeties (All)

Air Handler Safeties (Freeze stats, Fire stats, etc.)
Air Flow Monitor (normal/low)
Start/Stop Monitor (normal/low)
Air Handler Hot Deck (F)
Air Handler Cold Deck (F)
Return Air Temperature (F)
Mixed Air Temperature (F)
Supply Temperature for each Zone or Main Supply Temp (F), etc.
Room Air Temperature for each Zone (F)
Humidity for each Zone (%)
Chilled Water Supply (F)
Chilled Water Return (F)
Chilled Water Flow (GPM)
Chiller Start/Stop Control and Load Limiting Input/
Tower Fan Status (on/off)
Condenser Water Supply & Return Temps (F)
Chilled Water Pump Status (on/off)
Economizer Control
Hot Water Pump Status (on/off)
Hot Water Supply & Return Temperatures (F)
Hot Water Flow (GPM)
Filter Media Differential Pressure Alarms
Motor Run Time (elapsed)
Moisture Alarms in Raised Floor Areas
Enable/Disable
Start/Stop
Run-longer user interface (usually 2 hours) to delay unoccupied modes
Emergency stop switch button
Standard Monitoring and Control Software provided at the building or integrated into
(or used at) the existing EMCS include, but are not limited to, the following:
High and low temperature limit alarming

High and low humidity limit alarming
Equipment runtime and status (on/off, enabled, etc.)
Scheduled and optimum start/stop
Duty cycling
Demand limiting (motor start/stop restrictions, motor size, etc.)
Occupied/Unoccupied
Time Scheduling
Day/Night Setback
Economizer
Ventilation and Recirculation, Vent Delay, etc.
Reheat coil reset
Boiler plant – boiler optimization
Chiller plant - chiller optimization
Heating water supply temperature reset
Chilled water supply temperature reset
Condenser water reset
Base-wide demand limiting
Integration of new facilities into the existing EMCS database and monitoring and
controls software (such as the Base-wide demand limiting) will require generation of
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 84
custom graphics matching the style and complexity of the existing graphics.
Integration of new facilities shall also include programming of alarm handling and
demand load limiting which will require Base input for critical alarm lists and
priority of building for demand load limiting. This must be done at the existing EMCS
“front-end.” Integration will be limited to qualified companies and personnel.
• Riser diagram of the network showing all network cabling and hardware. Label
hardware with ANSI.CEA-709.1 addresses, IP addresses, and network names.
• Control System Schematic diagram and Sequence of Operation for each HVAC system.
• Operation and Maintenance Instructions including procedures for system start-up,

operation and shut-down, a routine maintenance checklist, and a qualified service
organization list.
• LonWorks® Network Services (LNS®) database for the completed system.
• Quality Control (QC) checklist (below) completed by the Contractor's Chief Quality
Control (QC) Representative.
QC Checklist Table
Instructions: Initial each item, sign and date verifying that the requirements have
been met.
# Description Initials
1 All DDC Hardware is installed on a TP/FT-10 local control bus.

2 Communication between DDC Hardware is only via EIA 709.1B using
SNVTs. Other protocols and network variables other than SNVTs
have not been used.
3 All sequences are performed using DDC Hardware.
4 LNS Database is up-to date and accurately represents the final
installed system.
5 All software has been licensed to the Government.
6 M&C software monitoring displays have been created for all
building systems, including all override and display points
indicated on Points Schedule drawings.
7 Final As-built Drawings accurately represent the final installed
system.
8 O&M Instructions have been completed and submitted.
9 Connections between the UMCS IP network and ANSI/CEA-709.1B
building networks are through ANSI/CEA-852 Routers.
By signing below I verify that all requirements of the contract including, but not
limited to, the above have been met.
Signature: ___________________________________ Date: ____________________
11.6.10 Perform a Performance Verification Test (PVT) under Government supervision

prior to system acceptance. During the PVT demonstrate that the system performs as
specified, including, but not limited to, demonstrating that the system is open and
correctly performs the Sequences of Operation.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 85
11.6.11 Provide a 1 year unconditional warranty on the installed system and on all
service call work. The warranty shall include labor and material necessary to restore
the equipment involved in the initial service call to a fully operable condition.
11.6.12 Provide training at the project site on the installed building system. Upon
completion of this training each student, using appropriate documentation, should be
able to start the system, operate the system, recover the system after a failure,
perform routine maintenance and describe the specific hardware, architecture and
operation of the system.
11.6.13 Design: The facility mechanical systems shall be designed and controlled
with the consideration that maintenance personnel shall not be readily available to
address operational problems in a timely manner. To this end, the controls shall
provide for automatic restart of all equipment (air and water sides) after
interruptions except in the case of safety code requirements for a manual restart.
Provide one laptop computer that can be used as a field interface device to monitor,
control, and reset any applicable point for any control device. The supplier of the
control system shall provide a copy of the operating software and the technical
manuals for the control system to the Contracting Officer’s Representative.
The air handling control systems shall allow for a complete shutdown of all air
moving equipment (including exhaust) and closing of all the outside air.
For Force Protection issues, consider the following:
1. Outdoor air intakes must be at least 10 feet above the ground.

2. There must be an emergency shutoff switch in the HVAC control system that can
immediately shut down air distribution throughout the building.
11.7 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Testing and balancing of air and hydronic systems shall be accomplished by a firm
certified for testing and balancing by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC),
National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or Testing and Balancing Bureau
(TABB). TAB shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the standard
under which the TAB Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e., AABC MN-1, NEBB TABES,
or SMACNA HVACTAB unless otherwise specified herein. All recommendations and
suggested practices contained in the TAB Standard shall be considered mandatory. The
provisions of the TAB Standard, including checklists, report forms, etc., shall, as
nearly as practical, be used to satisfy the Contract requirements. The TAB Standard
shall be used for all aspects of TAB, including qualifications for the TAB Firm and
Specialist and calibration of TAB instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer
calibration recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the TAB Standard,
the manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to. All quality assurance
provisions of the TAB Standard such as performance guarantees shall be part of this
contract. For systems or system components not covered in the TAB Standard, TAB
procedures shall be developed by the TAB Specialist. Where new procedures,
requirements, etc., applicable to the Contract requirements have been published or
adopted by the body responsible for the TAB Standard used (AABC, NEBB, or TABB), the
requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements shall
be considered mandatory.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 86
11.8 COMMISSIONING
All HVAC systems and equipment including controls shall be commissioned in accordance
with ASHRAE Guideline 1 and UFGS Specification 23 08 00.00 10, Commissioning of HVAC
Systems. The Commissioning Authority as described in Guideline 1 shall be hired by
the General Contractor and shall be certified as a Commissioning Authority by AABC,
NEBB, or TABB. The Contracting Officer will act as the Owner’s representative in
performance of duties spelled out under OWNER in Annex F of ASHRAE Guideline 0 -2005.
11.9 ENERGY CONSERVATION
11.9.1 Mechanical system designs shall comply with UFC 3-400-01.
11.9.2 The design shall make use of the latest technology to provide equipment with
the highest efficiency possible without compromising maintainability. The design
shall comply with 10 CFR 435, “Energy Conservation Voluntary Performance Standards for
New Commercial and High Rise Residential Buildings; Mandatory for New Federal
Buildings”.
11.9.3 The building, including the building envelope, HVAC systems, service water
heating, power and lighting systems shall be designed to achieve an energy consumption
that is at least 30% below the consumption of a baseline building meeting the minimum
requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2004 in accordance with EPAC 2005.
Selection of solutions and technologies to achieve the above energy performance
requirements shall be based on life-cycle cost analysis.
11.9.4 The Contractor shall purchase Energy Star for FEMP designated products. The
term “Energy Star product” means a product that is rated for energy efficiency under
an Energy Star program. The term “FEMP designated product” means a product that is
designated under the Federal Energy Management Program of the Department of Energy as
being among the highest 25% of equivalent products for energy efficiency. In the case
of an electric motor of 1 to 500 horsepower, the contractor shall select only a
premium efficient motor.
(as a minimum):
23 00 00 Air Supply, Distribution, Ventilation, and Exhaust System

23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 93.00 10 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of HVAC Systems
23 07 00 Thermal Insulation for Mechanical Systems
23 08 00.00 10 Commissioning of HVAC Systems
23 09 23 Direct Digital Control for HVAC and Other Local Building
Systems
23 11 15 Facility Gas Piping
23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping
23 25 00 Chemical Treatment of Water for Mechanical Systems
23 31 13 Metal Ducts
23 36 00 Air Terminal Units
23 52 00 Heating Boilers
23 64 00.00 10 Liquid Chillers
23 64 26 Chilled, Chilled-Hot, and Condenser Water Piping Systems
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 87
23 65 00.00 10 Cooling Tower

23 72 00.00 10 Energy Recovery Systems
23 81 23.00 20 Computer Room Air Conditioning Units
23 81 47 Water-Loop and Ground-Loop Heat Pump Systems
25 08 10 Utility Monitoring and Control System Testing
25 10 10 Utility Monitoring and Control System (UMCS)
12. PLUMBING
The plumbing systems for this facility shall be designed to be energy efficient and
provide a safe and user accommodating environment for the children and staff utilizing
the facility. UFC 4-740-14 addresses the unique criteria for this type of facility
where young children are the primary occupants. Equipment shall be located to
minimize maintenance disruptions within the child activity rooms.
Plumbing system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the International
Plumbing Code (IPC), latest edition. Inspection and testing of the plumbing system
shall be performed as prescribed in the IPC. The plumbing system shall conform with
the applicable rules of the International Building Code, governing venting of plumbing
fixtures, sizing of waste, vents, drains, and water systems. Backflow preventers
shall be provided at the building entrance, located in an accessible location inside
the building. All backflow prevention devices shall be International Association of
Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO)-approved devices and carry an attached or
imprinted IAPMO seal of approval. (See AFI 32-1066, Para 5.1 for alternative
acceptable backflow prevention devices). All backflow prevention devices shall be
installed in accordance with the current uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) and UPC
illustrated Training Manual. Under no condition shall backflow prevention devices be
installed below grade (i.e. in a valve pit). Exterior devices shall be located as
close to the building as possible to facilitate blending with the landscape. (See AFI
32-1066,Para 6. "Use and Installation of Backflow Prevention Devices). Fixture count
shall be as required by International Building Code. All piping shall be labeled,
color coded, titled, and indicate direction of flow. All shutoff/isolation valves and
water hammer arresters shall be accessible from the floor level and be labeled. If
installed above hard ceilings, access doors shall be provided. UFGS Section 22 00 00
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE shall be the basis for the plumbing system specifications.
UFGS Section 23 11 23.00 10 GAS PIPING SYSTEMS shall be the basis for the natural gas
piping system specifications, if natural gas is used.
All piping shall be concealed, properly supported with allowances for expansion and
contraction. Interior water distribution piping shall not be buried under concrete
floors. All piping systems shall be drainable. Interior hot and cold water piping
systems shall be insulated. Water piping systems (including sprinkler piping) shall
not be routed or located where subjected to freezing and shall be located within the
insulated building envelope. Heat tracing (to prevent freezing) of interior piping
systems shall not be allowed. Individual shutoff or stop valves shall be provided on
water supply lines to all plumbing fixtures. Individual stops shall also be furnished
at all equipment connections such as dishwashers, washing machines, etc. Isolation
shutoff valves shall be provided for each toilet group to allow isolation shutoff for
maintenance purposes while continuing service to the remainder of the restrooms.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 88
Consolidate fixture vents through one common vent whenever possible. All vent
penetrations through the roof shall be made through a roof jack designed for use with
the roofing system furnished and color-matched to the roof. Aboveground piping shall
run parallel with the lines of the building and in accordance with UFGS Section 22 00
00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE, unless otherwise indicated.
All water piping subject to freezing shall be completely capable of draining and
suitably protected. Maximum allowable water pressure at building entrance shall be 80
psig. Provide pressure regulator in water line at building entrance if water pressure
is above 80 psig. If water pressure at building entrance is inadequate to operate
plumbing fixtures, a packaged skid-mounted duplex domestic water booster pump system
with VFD shall be provided. Water heater shall be sized for the building hot water
demand. Water heater shall be electric or gas-fired, depending on availability of
natural gas. Floor drains shall be provided in janitor closets, mechanical rooms, and
restrooms and any other locations as conditions require. Floor drain piping in
mechanical rooms shall be 3-inch minimum. All floor drains shall be fitted with trap
primers. Water coolers and drinking fountains shall be provided in locations as
indicated on Architectural drawings.
Provide one exterior wall hydrant every 200 feet around the entire facility. Each
outdoor play environment shall have a minimum of two (2) wall hydrants per face of
each wing. These shall serve the garden, nature, water and other play areas as
determined by the Base. Final locations shall be coordinated with location of play
areas to ensure that no hose runs across the outdoor play environment create a
tripping hazard. All wall hydrants provided shall be concealed, non-freeze type.
All sewer lines shall be provided with exterior clean-out.
12.3 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEMS
12.3.1 Design Criteria: Domestic hot and cold water shall be provided to plumbing
fixtures in restrooms, sinks, kitchen sinks and other fixtures requiring potable
water. Potable water systems shall comply with NSF 61. Domestic potable water shall
be isolated from mechanical feed water systems and other systems subject to
contamination using reduced pressure backflow preventers. Provide a floor drain at
each indoor reduced pressure backflow preventer location and hard pipe overflow drain
to floor drain with minimum 1 inch air gap. Backflow preventers shall be located at
1’-0” to3’-0” above finished floor.
Domestic water to serve the facility shall be provided by tying into the existing
underground domestic water system and routing the new main domestic water supply line
into the building. The domestic water entrance shall include a reduced pressure
backflow preventer, water meter, and a pressure regulator, if system pressure
requires. A packaged, skid-mounted duplex domestic water booster pump system with
VFD shall be provided if water pressure is determined to be inadequate. Domestic
cold water shall then be distributed throughout the facility to serve the various
plumbing fixtures defined herein.
The piping system shall be sized in accordance with the International Plumbing and
Building Code by totaling the Supply Fixture Units (SFUs) connected for each section
of piping. Piping shall be sized to maintain a minimum pressure of 25 psig at the
hydraulically most remote flush valve. Water velocity in the distribution system
piping shall not exceed 8 feet per second and provisions shall be made to reduce any
water hammer with water hammer arrestors. Locate water hammer arrestors per PDI
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 89
WH201.
Hot water supply temperature shall be maintained at 120°F maximum to all services
requiring hot water in child areas including all child activity rooms and isolation
room. The maximum hot water supply temperature from a child lavatory or child sink
shall be 100ºF by means of an adjustable mixing valve or equivalent near the lavatory
or sink. Hot water shall be supplied at 140°F max in kitchen and laundry. Hot water
shall be supplied at 180°F max to dishwasher and pots and pans sink. The temperature
requirement for hot water to the dishwasher and pots and pans sink may be met by the
use of boosters. Domestic hot water shall be maintained at remote fixtures (fixtures
located more than 50 feet from the water heater) by an in-line pump that shall
circulate hot water back to the water heater. Shut-off valves shall be installed in
the supplies to each fixture. Shut-off valves shall be installed in branch lines to
each restroom, janitors closet, or other area with more than two fixtures. Water
hammer arrestors shall be installed on branch lines to absorb hydrostatic shock
pressures that may occur in piping.
A life cycle cost analysis shall be performed and provided to evaluate the cost
effectiveness of using solar power to furnish at least 30 percent of the hot water
demand in accordance with UFC 3-400-01. Solar hot water shall be used if cost
effective.
12.3.2 Materials of Construction: Above ground domestic water piping shall be
copper, ASTM B88 type “L” or PEX tubing, ASTM F877, SDR 9 tubing. Below grade piping
shall be copper, ASTM B88 type “K” or PEX tubing, ASTM F877, SDR 9 tubing. Shut-off
valves shall be bronze ball valves for size 2-inch and less and butterfly for piping
size greater than 2-inches. Provide dielectric fittings between different materials.
Solder shall be per ASTM B32, lead-free alloys.
Provide insulation for above grade domestic water piping. Minimum requirements:
mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C 547 or flexible elastomeric cellular
insulation conforming to ASTM C534. Provide insulation with vapor barrier, all-
purpose jacket and PVC covers for fittings. Insulation thickness shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer for the application.
Prior to use, the distribution system shall be sanitized with a hypochlorite

solution.
12.3.3 Water Quality Testing: A water sample shall be collected from the nearest fire
hydrant prior to the start of construction for quality testing at an independent
laboratory. The hydrant shall be flushed for several minutes before collecting the
sample. The water sample shall be tested for contaminants, in particular for lead, as
directed by the Base. This will establish a base line for the water quality of the
Base’s water supply.
Upon completion of construction and before connection to the Base’s water supply, the
potable water piping systems shall be flushed and disinfected in accordance with the
plumbing specification section 22 00 00.
After the potable water piping systems have been flushed and disinfected and the
facility has been connected to the Base’s water supply, water samples shall be
collected from any and all water sources for quality testing at an independent
laboratory. The water samples shall be tested for contaminants as directed by the
Base. Once again the key contaminant for sampling is lead.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 90
The results of the initial water testing for lead contaminants from each
faucet/drinking fountains used by the children or staff are on file in the program.
Bioenvironmental Engineer will be informed when plumbing lines or fixtures are
modified, added or replaced. Based on a health risk assessment, these plumbing lines
or fixtures will be tested for lead contaminants and the risk assessment and/or
results are on file in the program.
The potable water piping systems shall pass the water quality test before it is
allowed to be used in the facility. The maximum level limits of contaminants shall be
as directed by the Base.
12.4 NON-POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS
Reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be installed on make-up water supplies to

heating water, chiller water, or other process water equipment. Also provide reduced
pressure backflow preventers on any make-up water system that contains chemical
treatment additives, anti-freeze (glycol solutions), or any other system that has the
potential for contamination of the main water supply system. Cup drains shall be
provided for reduced pressure backflow assemblies’ overflow and shall be hard piped to
a nearby floor drain.
Piping materials shall be copper, ASTM B88, type “L”. Piping materials for corrosive
fluids shall be suitable for use with the fluid. Backflow preventer assemblies shall
conform to ASSE requirements for the type used.
Provide insulation for above grade non-potable water piping. Minimum requirements:
mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C 547 or flexible elastomeric cellular
insulation conforming to ASTM C534. Provide insulation with vapor barrier, all-
purpose jacket and PVC covers for fittings. Insulation thickness shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer for the application.
12.5 SANITARY DRAINAGE, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEMS
12.5.1 Design Criteria: The sanitary system shall collect waste from plumbing
fixtures in restrooms, sinks, floor drains and other fixtures that discharge to the
sanitary sewer and transport the wastes to the base-wide sanitary sewer system. The
waste from the kitchen area shall all be taken to a minimum 300 gallon grease
interceptor prior to connecting to the base-wide sanitary sewer system. The grease
interceptor shall be suitable for burial and underground service and shall be located
so it can be easily accessed for routine maintenance. All drains in the kitchen area
that terminate at the grease interceptor shall be provided with a grease emulsifier
system. Each fixture trap shall be vented and connected to common vents, which extend
and terminate above the roof not less than 15 feet from outside air intakes.
12.5.2 Materials of Construction: Underground waste (except waste piping from

kitchen) and vent piping shall be Schedule 40 PVC. All waste piping from the
kitchen to the grease interceptor shall be service weight cast iron soil pipe.
Underground service weight cast-iron soil pipe shall be hub and spigot type
conforming to ASTM A74 and AWWA C606. Aboveground waste and vent piping shall be
PVC or service weight cast iron soil pipe with hubless connectors. Hubless
connectors shall conform to CISPI 310. PVC piping will not be allowed in spaces
used as HVAC air plenums. PVC pipe shall be ASTM D1785 and ASTM D2665 stamped pipe.
All sanitary drainage, waste and vent piping shall be located either below floor
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 91
slabs, above ceilings, in pipe chases, or in wall cavities as required. Complete

accessibility shall be available to all cleanouts in the piping system.
Provide cooling coil condensate drain piping from each cooling coil.
Condensate drain piping shall be ASTM B 88 type L hard drawn copper.
12.6 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
12.6.1 Design Criteria: Storm drainage for flat roofs shall be accomplished through
roof drains and internal roof drain piping. Storm drain piping shall be Schedule 40
PVC. Storm drain piping exposed in HVAC air plenums shall be service weight cast iron
soil pipe with hubless connectors. Primary roof drains shall be piped to vertical
roof drain leaders which shall pass down through the building and shall connect to the
site storm drain system. Overflow roof drainage shall be accomplished through
overflow roof drains and internal overflow roof drain piping or roof scuppers.
Overflow roof drain piping shall be same as primary roof drain piping. Overflow roof
drains shall be piped to vertical overflow roof drain leaders which shall pass down
through the building and shall daylight approximately 3 feet above grade for visual
inspection.
12.6.2 Storm drainage for sloped roofs shall be accomplished through gutters and
downspouts with connections to the underground storm water system. Downspouts outside
outdoor play environments discharging at grade shall be provided with a splash block
at the base of each downspout. Downspouts discharging inside outdoor play
environments shall be connected to an underground drainage system. Storm drainage
will be routed away from playground and facility access areas.
Roof drain piping, gutters, and downspouts shall be designed and sized in accordance
with the International Plumbing and Building Codes and SMACNA Architectural Sheet
Metal Standard. Horizontal roof drain piping shall be insulated with mineral fiber
insulation or flexible elastomeric cellular insulation.
12.7 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS (where approved)
AFSVA would prefer that all new Child Development Centers have all electric
services. Where this is not possible natural gas can be used.
Natural Gas shall be connected to the existing underground gas system, and shall be
routed to a new gas meter and pressure reducing station located adjacent to the
building at the mechanical room. Polyethylene pipe shall be utilized with pre-
manufactured, anodeless risers to eliminate need for cathodic protection
requirement on the gas service.
Natural gas shall be provided to the heating hot water boiler(s), domestic water
heater, and kitchen cooking appliances. If natural gas is provided at the facility,
carbon monoxide detectors are to be provided in accordance with the protected premises
carbon monoxide detection system requirements of NFPA 720. Gas piping within the
building shall be above grade. Concealed piping or piping which is not easily
accessible shall have welded connections. Gas line connections to each item of
equipment shall have a shut off valve and dirt leg. Piping within building shall be
low pressure piping (less than 1/2 psig). Natural gas piping shall be schedule 40
steel with screwed or welded fittings. Piping within building shall be minimized.
The building shall have an AGA approved block shut off valve, pressure gauges,
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 92
pressure regulator and gas meter. Provide a full size by-pass around the meter with
double block shut-off valves.
Piping of natural gas systems shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 54, National
Fuel Gas Code, AGA, and International Fuel Gas Code.
Piping within the building shall be black steel conforming to ASTM A 53, Grade A or
B, Type E or S. Underground service to the building may be polyethylene pipe
conforming to ASTM D 1248 and ASTM D 2513, pipe designations PE 2306, PE 2406, and
PE3306. Provide an anodeless riser at the connection of underground service to
aboveground ahead of the meter.
12.8 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Fixtures shall be industrial grade and be provided complete with fittings and trim.
Fixtures shall be water conservation type and comply with the Energy Policy Act of
1992 and the International Plumbing Code. All shutoff valves shall be metal
construction. Plastic valves are not acceptable. All fixtures, fittings, and trim in
a project shall be from the same manufacturer and shall have the same finish.
Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall conform to ANSI A117.1. Plumbing
fixtures and specialties shall be supplied in sufficient quantity to meet or exceed
the requirement of the Code. Wall hydrants, hose bibbs, spigots and service sinks
shall have integral vacuum breakers. Floor drains shall be cast iron with deep trap
and automatic primer. Use square type drain in areas to receive tile. Fixture
descriptions shall be as described by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
ASME A112.19.
12.8.1 Materials: All vitreous china plumbing fixtures shall conform to ANSI
A112.19.2M, Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. Stainless steel fixtures shall be in
accordance with ANSI A112.19.3M, Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (residential
design).
In general, unless otherwise noted, all faucets shall be cast brass body, polished or
brushed chrome finish. Operation shall be manual two lever or single lever mixing
type with ceramic washer. Water flow shall be no more than 2.5 gpm from any faucet.
Water closets and sinks and their operating devices to be utilized by the children
shall be designed and installed at an accommodating height for use by young children
as identified in UFC 4-740-14.
12.8.2 Adult Flush Valve Type Water Closets: Provide ASME A112.19.2M, white vitreous
china, wall-mounted, siphon jet, 1.6 gallons per flush, white solid plastic elongated
open-front seat. Provide ASME A112.19.5 trim. Flush valve shall be infrared sensor
activated and hard wired (battery operated not acceptable).
12.8.3 Adult ABA Flush Valve Type Water Closets: Provide same as above, except
mounting height to top of seat shall be 17 to 19 inches above finished floor and
flush valve shall be mounted 11-1/2 inches above fixture rim to clear grab bars.
12.8.4 Child-Sized Flush Valve Type Water Closets (Child activity rooms): Mounting
height to top of seat shall be 12 inches above finished floor. Provide ASME
A112.19.2, white vitreous china, floor-mounted, siphon jet, 1.6 gallons per flush,
white solid plastic elongated open-front seat. Provide with manual type flush valve.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 93
Install these water closets in the toddler and pre-school activity rooms only.
Provide the rough-in plumbing for these water closets in the infant and pre-toddler
activity rooms. The water piping shall be accessible from a wall access panel or
access door. The sanitary waste connection shall be capped air and water tight and
shall be flush with the floor.
12.8.5 Countertop Lavatories: Lavatory sinks shall be integral molded solid surface
type for solid surface countertops. Provide ASME 112.18.1M copper alloy center set
ABA compliant, infrared sensor activated, hard-wired (battery operated not
acceptable) faucets with aerator and perforated grid strainers. All ABA compliant
lavatories shall have traps and supplies insulated with molded closed cell vinyl
insulation.
Faucets for the child lavatories in the toilet areas shall be infrared sensor
activated, hard wired faucet, with aerator and perforated grid strainers. Faucets
shall be equivalent to Sloan Optima ETF-880. Faucets for the child lavatories near
the front of the activity room shall be a centerset lavatory faucet with lever handle,
4-inch centers, aerator and perforated grid strainer. Faucets shall be equivalent to
Kohler K-15598. A deck mounted, push-down type glass filler shall also be provided at
the child lavatories (hand wash) located near the front of each Toddler and Pre-School
activity room. The glass filler shall be located at the food prep sink in each Infant
and Pre-Toddler activity room. The glass filler shall be equivalent to Elkay Model
LK1114.
12.8.6 Countertop Kitchen Sinks (Child activity room food prep sinks and break room
sink): Provide double compartment sinks as indicated on the drawings. Sinks to
comply with ASME/ANSI A112.19.3M, and be constructed of 18 gage stainless steel with
undermount type rim, minimum dimensions of 14 inches wide by 14 inches front to rear,
single compartment with undersides coated with sound dampening material. One
compartment shall be 4 ½ inches deep and the other shall be 7 ½ inches deep. Provide
top-mounted ASME A112.18.1M copper alloy faucets, swing spout with aerator, and
stainless steel drain outlet with cup strainer. Faucets shall have a spray feature.
Faucets shall be equivalent to Kohler K-10412. Break room sink only shall also be
provided with a 120 volt ½ horsepower garbage disposer. Provide 1-1/2 inch (2 inch
for garbage disposer) adjustable P-trap with drain piping to vertical vent stack.
12.8.7 Countertop Sinks (Child activity room diaper changing area sinks): Provide
single compartment, stainless steel sink as indicated on the drawings. Sinks to
comply with ASME/ANSI A112.19.3M, and be constructed of 18 gage stainless steel with
undermount type rim, minimum dimensions of 14 inches wide by 14 inches front to rear,
single compartment 7 ½ inches deep with undersides coated with sound dampening
material. Provide top-mounted ASME A112.18.1M copper alloy foot pedal with mixing
valve controlled faucets, swing spout with aerator, and stainless steel drain outlet
with cup strainer. Foot pedal controller shall be equivalent to Chicago Faucets 628-
CP. Faucets shall be deck mounted, single hole fitting type, with maximum 6-1/2”
height from end of spout to counter top. Faucet shall be equivalent to Chicago
Faucets 626-E29CP.
12.8.8 Mop Sinks: Provide pre-cast terrazzo floor-mounted mop sink, 24inches x 24
inches x 12 inches shall be made of marble chips cast in white Portland cement to a
compressive strength of not less than 3625 PSI 7 days after casting. Provide brass
body drains with nickel bronze strainers cast integral with terrazzo. Provide
stainless steel rim guard for mop sink. Provide chrome-plated exposed hot and cold
water faucets ASME A112.15.M wall-mounted copper alloy faucets, swing spout with
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 94
3/4 inch hose connection, vacuum breaker, and pail hook. Provide mop hanger on
wall above sink suitable for four mops.
12.8.9 Electric Water Coolers: Provide ARI 1010, wall-mounted bubbler style with ASME
A112.6.1M concealed chair carrier, air-cooled condensing unit, 5gallon/hour minimum
capacity, stainless steel splash receptor, and all stainless steel cabinet. Provide
27 inches minimum knee clearance from front bottom of unit to floor and 36 inch
maximum spout height above floor. Provide a second water cooler installed with 16
inches minimum knee clearance from front bottom of unit to floor and 24 inch maximum
spout height above floor. Provide push levers, push bars, or touch pads (one on each
side or one on front and both sides of cabinet) to control bubblers. All water
coolers shall be certified to meet ANSI/NSF61, Section 9 and ABA.
12.8.10 Backflow Preventers: Provide reduced pressure principle type. Furnish proof
that each make, model/design, and size of backflow preventer being furnished for the
project is approved by and has a current “Certificate of Approval” from the Foundation
for Cross- Connection Control and Hydraulic Research (FCCCHR)-USC. Listing of the
particular make, model/design, and size in the current FCCCHR-USC shall be acceptable
as the required proof. Provide freeze protection for aboveground exterior
applications. Provide metal traffic bollards and architectural screening for exterior
applications.
12.8.11 Non-Freeze Concealed Wall Hydrants: ASSE 1019, cast bronze, with bronze
finish box and locking door and tee key handle, 1 inch external thread inlet, 3/4 inch
external hose thread outlet with automatic draining vacuum breaker. Hydrant shall be
of sufficient length to extend through walls and place the valve seat inside the
building or in the crawl space. Bonnet and valve stem shall be removable from outside
of the building.
12.8.12 Hose Bibbs: Provide angle type copper alloy hose bibbs with removable tee
handle. Inlet shall have internal threads. Outlet shall have vacuum breaker with 3/4
inch external hose threads.
12.8.13 Water Hammer Arrestors:

Provide PDI WH201, engineered mechanical type sized and installed to safeguard the
water distribution system against destructive water hammer hazard and noise. Air
chambers are not acceptable.
12.8.14 Floor Drains: Floor drains shall be flush strainer type with deep seal traps.
Provide in restrooms, janitor closets, laundry rooms, kitchens, and mechanical rooms
and to receive condensate from air handling equipment.
12.8.15 Water Heaters: Water heaters shall be natural gas fired, glass-lined with
copper tubes and electronic intermittent ignition device or all electric, depending on
availability of natural gas.
12.8.16 Laundry Tub: Provide a 24” x 24” x 14” deep 16 gauge stainless steel free
standing laundry tub with stainless steel tubular legs for each laundry room. Provide
chrome-plated exposed hot and cold water faucets ASME A112.15.M wall-mounted copper
alloy faucets, swing spout with 3/4 inch hose connection, vacuum breaker, and pail
hook. Laundry tub shall be equivalent to AERO SL series.
12.9 TECHNICAL NOTES
12.9.1 General: Floor drains shall be provided where indicated above and for
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 95
equipment requiring drainage. Floor drains shall be cast iron body and grate. All
floor drain traps shall be automatically primed by single trap primers or where
appropriate, distribution unit type trap primers.
Provide a hose bibb in each mechanical room. Freeze-proof wall hydrants shall be
provided on the exterior of the facility at intervals of 200 feet.
See kitchen equipment drawings for quantity and sizes of kitchen equipment.
See architectural drawings for quantity of lavatories, water closets, kitchen sinks,
mop sinks, and electric water coolers.
(as a minimum):
22 00 00 Plumbing, General Purpose

22 31 00 Water Softeners, Cation-Exchange (Sodium Cycle)
23 11 23.00 10 Gas Piping Systems (where available)
13. FIRE SUPPRESSION
Fire suppression design shall be provided for the wet-pipe sprinkler system installed
in this facility. A registered professional engineer shall be utilized for fire
protection design and specification preparation for this construction contract.
Construction plans, shop drawings, and hydraulic calculations for the suppression
system shall be prepared by a registered professional fire protection engineer or an
individual that has obtained a Level III certification from the National Institute for
Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) in Automatic Sprinkler System
Layout. A registered professional fire protection engineer shall stamp all shop
drawings submitted for approval. Qualifications shall be submitted for approval.
Contractor is responsible for obtaining all permits required for sprinkler work and
for coordinated sprinkler testing with local fire marshals.
13.3 SERVICE ENTRANCE
Provide a dedicated fire service entrance to the wet-pipe riser(s) located in the
mechanical room. Upon entering the mechanical room an OS&Y shut off valve shall be
provided. The shut off valve shall be upstream of a double check backflow preventer
(or more stringent backflow prevention device as required by local plumbing codes).
Fire service entrance shall be separate from domestic water service entrance and shall
be a minimum six inch cement lined ductile iron pipe starting 5’-0” outside the
facility to the OS&Y shut off valve. Service entrance piping shall be sleeved and
sealed through the mechanical room floor. Provide thrust blocks on underground piping
at each change of direction in accordance with NFPA 13. Use of cleated (screw type)
flanges on service piping is prohibited. Use only threaded, welded, or flanged
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 96
connections on the service side of facility’s main shut off valve. Use of Victaulic
type connections is prohibited on service side of main shut off valve. The fire water
supply system shall meet the requirements of UFC 3-600-01.
Provide a hydrant flow test at a hydrant near the fire water service connection to the
utility. The hydrant shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 291 and record the
following information:
o Who performed the test

o Date and time of test
o Size and type of hydrant outlets (rounded, sharp, or projecting)
o Location of static and flowing hydrants
o Static pressure (psi)
o Residual pressure (psi)
o Pitot pressure (psi)
o Flow (gpm)
13.4 WET-PIPE SUPPRESSION
The entire building shall be fully sprinklered with an automatic wet-pipe sprinkler
system. The sprinkler system shall be designed and installed according to UFC 3-600-
01 and NFPA 13. The wet sprinkler system shall be zoned in accordance with NFPA 13.
Sprinkler heads in all gypsum and lay-in acoustical ceilings shall be quick response
chrome plated recessed pendants. Upright, pendent, and sidewall quick response chrome
plated sprinkler heads shall be utilized in all other areas. Sprinkler heads shall be
ordinary temperature classification except where exposed to heat producing equipment
or installed near clerestory. In such locations, the temperature classification shall
be as recommended in NFPA 13. Sprinkler heads shall be centered in ceiling tiles and
symmetrically placed in all other areas. Dry pendent-type sprinklers shall be used in
rooms or areas where the design temperature shall drop below 40°F (e.g. walk-in
coolers). Sprinkler pendent placement must be coordinated with other trades.
The sprinkler system must be installed to be completely drainable. Main drains,

inspectors test connection, and end-of-line drains shall be extended to the building
exterior and discharge through a 45 degree elbow at a maximum height of two feet above
grade onto a splash block. Cast in place splash blocks or similar method shall be
provided to control runoff and erosion of landscape. Fire suppression piping shall
not be installed over or within three lateral feet of electrical panels, transformers
or other electrical equipment. Fire suppression piping shall not be routed through
the building such that it obstructs windows or clerestory. Piping shall not be run at
low levels in high bay rooms or in random patterns. Piping shall not be run exposed
to view in finished areas.
Each zone shall be provided with check valve, flow switch, control valve and test and
drain connection. The test and drain connection shall be designed for use as the
inspectors test connection. Provide flow switches, valve tamper switches and other
equipment required for interface with the building fire alarm system. Water-flow
detection devices shall transmit an alarm signal to the building fire alarm control
panel upon detection of water flow. Valves controlling water supplies to the
sprinkler system shall be provided with “tamper” detection switches. A trouble signal
shall be transmitted to the building fire alarm control panel upon detection of an
unauthorized valve closure.
Provide fire department connections on street side of building, outside of any fenced
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 97
areas, or as required by the local fire department. Fire department connections shall
have threads matching the base’s fire department standards. The fire department
connection shall be located within 150 feet of a fire hydrant and shall be on the
street side of the building, outside of any fenced area.
Sprinkler piping is not required to be painted where installed in concealed spaces

(e.g. above finished ceilings). Piping shall be painted to match surrounding surfaces
in finished areas. Fire system exterior appurtenances shall be polished chrome or
factory red finish. Provide system identification with direction of flow at 26 foot
intervals on all interior piping two inch and larger.
Provide field acceptance tests and spare sprinklers in accordance with NFPA 13. The
fire protection system shall be commissioned as a whole. Each flow and tamper switch
shall be tested by the flow of water or valve actuation. An alarm or trouble signal
shall be read at the fire alarm panel. A detailed list of components to be tested
shall be provided as part of the system startup services. Provide operation and
maintenance training and operation and maintenance manuals for each system. The
Contractor shall have a flow test performed under the direction of a registered fire
protection engineer, and the A/E shall use the data obtained by this test to
hydraulically design the system.
13.4.1 Installation of a fire pump to achieve sprinkler system design criteria is not
authorized without prior approval of HQ AFCESA/CEOA.
13.4.2 Use schedule 40 steel pipe for sprinkler piping.
13.4.3 Quick-response sprinkler heads shall be used throughout the system.
13.5 HYDRAULIC DESIGN
The maximum pipe velocity shall be 32 fps for aboveground piping and 10 fps for
underground piping. Reduction of the design area is allowed for quick response
sprinklers in accordance with NFPA 13. Extended coverage sprinklers are not allowed.
Design calculations and shop drawings, along with catalog sheets for each device of
the automatic wet pipe sprinkler system shall be submitted for approval. Contractor
is responsible for obtaining all permits required for sprinkler work and for
coordinating sprinkler testing with local authority having jurisdiction.
13.6 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
All fire suppression equipment, devices, and materials shall be Underwriters

Laboratories (UL) listed or Factory Mutual (FM) approved for fire suppression service
as applicable. All piping, fittings, devices, and their installation shall comply
with the requirements of NFPA 13, NFPA 25, and local codes and standards.
Pipe shall be Schedule 40 black steel for all aboveground wet-pipe sprinkler
applications with the exception of sprinkler piping from the fire department
connection to the check valve. This piping shall be galvanized schedule 40 steel
pipe. Sprinkler piping shall conform to applicable provisions of ASTM A795, ASTM A53,
or ASTM A135. Pipe shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer, kind of pipe,
and ASTM designation.
Couplings shall be by one manufacturer and comply with NPFA 13. OS&Y gate valves or
indicating ball valves shall be utilized for all shut-off valves required by NFPA 13.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 98
Butterfly and other valves may be used for all other valving not required by NFPA 13.
13.7 KITCHEN SYSTEMS:
The kitchen exhaust grease hood(s) shall be provided with a wet chemical fire
suppression system. The kitchen shall also be provided with a Type K fire
extinguisher.
A flow alarm shall be transmitted upon actuation of the wet chemical extinguishing
system.
13.8 SYSTEM HAZARD CLASSIFICATION:
13.8.1 Light Hazard: Wet pipe sprinkler light hazard

0.10 GPM/SQ. FT. over 3000 SQ. FT.
250 GPM hose stream demand
60 minute supply duration
• Located throughout the facility unless noted otherwise
13.8.2 Hazard Group 1: Wet pipe sprinkler ordinary hazard group 1

500 GPM hose stream demand
• Laundry Rooms
• Electrical Rooms
• Kitchen
13.8.3 Hazard Group 2: Wet pipe sprinkler ordinary hazard group 2

500 GMP hose stream demand
• Mechanical Rooms
13.9 SPECIFICATIONS
As a minimum, the Contractor shall edit and submit the following UFGS
specification sections:
21 13 13.00 10 Wet Pipe Sprinkler System, Fire Protection

21 21 03.00 10 Wet Chemical Fire Extinguishing System
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 99
14. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
14.1 CODES AND STANDARDS
14.2 GENERAL
The electrical design shall provide an electrical system, complete in place, tested
and approved, as specified herein, and needed for a complete, proper, and usable
installation. The facility design and construction shall incorporate energy
conservation and promote low maintenance.
Design shall coordinate with all other disciplines involved with the facility design
and provide wiring for all equipment connections, extensions, including, but not
necessarily limited to all HVAC equipment, plumbing systems and equipment, Government
Furnished Contractor Installed equipment, and Government Furnished Government
Installed equipment.
Electric design shall include load verification to the building service transformer.
Electrical design shall meet ABA requirements for the following spaces: restrooms
break room, and administrative areas, unless indicated otherwise.
All electrical equipment shall be new and shall be provided by the Contractor unless
specifically indicated otherwise. Material and equipment shall be a standard product
by a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the product and shall be
essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years
prior to award of contract. All materials in the same category shall be by a single
manufacturer (i.e. panelboards, switchgear, transformers, etc.)
Contractor shall furnish instruction manuals and spare parts inventory requirements
for each piece of electrical equipment. Contractor shall also furnish necessary
control diagrams in accordance with ETL 83-1.
Contractor shall provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals for any electrical
equipment requiring periodic maintenance or inspections.
Ensure that equipment items that require periodic maintenance and repair have
sufficient manufacturer's identification data permanently affixed. Contractor shall
provide copies of parts identification manuals and installation and maintenance
instructions, customarily furnished with the equipment.
The Contractor shall provide training for each electrical system (generators, transfer
switches, VFDs, electronic systems, etc.) installed.
14.3 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
14.3.1 General Design: Electrical design shall be performed by a registered

professional engineer.
14.3.2 Electrical Construction: Only certified journeymen electricians or apprentices

under the direct supervision of journeymen shall be permitted to install, alter, or
repair electrical systems.
14.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 100
14.4.1 General: Electrical system layouts shall be generally diagrammatic and unless
specifically required, the location of outlets and equipment shall be approximate. The
exact location of outlets, lighting fixtures, equipment and wiring shall be governed
by structural conditions and obstructions, and shall be repositioned as required
during construction at no additional cost to the Government. Where it is necessary for
outlets or connections to be at specific locations, details shall be provided showing
exact measurements. Coordinate all design so that interference between piping,
architectural, and structural work shall be avoided.
14.4.2 Riser Diagrams: Riser and one-line diagrams shall show vertical and electrical
relationships and therefore need not include all required equipment, devices, and
accessories. Riser diagrams shall indicate all transformers, panelboards and other
electrical distribution equipment. Riser diagrams shall be included for all signal
level systems. The riser diagram shall indicate individual devices with symbols
indicating room location and special required feature of the device (i.e. mounting
location).
14.4.3 Schedules: Panelboard, switchboard, and motor control center schedules shall be
included in the electrical drawings. The schedules shall include all circuit
identification and connected load per phase. Connected load shall be totaled and
demand factor calculated. Branch circuit size shall be indicated on the schedule.
Panelboard information shall include bus ampacity, interrupting current rating,
voltage, source fed from, location, pole quantity, panelboard type (main lug only vs.
main circuit breaker), main circuit breaker size (if applicable), branch over current
protection device size, and branch circuit breaker pole quantity. If applicable
included service entrance rating and indicated if panelboard has 200% neutral.
14.4.4 Equipment Ratings: Equipment interrupting ratings shall be shown on the

contract documents based upon equipment characteristics and impedance values
expected. If actual installed equipment deviates from these characteristics or has
lower impedance, the Contractor shall increase the interrupting capacities of all
items on the load side of the deviant equipment in direct proportion to the changed
characteristics at no additional cost to the Government. Interrupting capacities
shall not be reduced to values less than those required by the contract documents.
14.4.5 Details: Details shall be included to indicate the Contractors intent to

satisfy specification requirements and to aid in the building of the facility. Details
shall include the following, but not be limited to interior lighting, exterior light
pole installations and transformer pad installations.
14.4.6 Control Diagrams: Control diagrams shall be included to indicate how a system
is to be controlled and interfaced with other systems. The diagrams shall indicate
that wiring which is field-wired from the device and those wires internal to the
device. Control diagrams shall include the following, but not be limited to:
• Lighting contactor with Hand-Off-Auto and photocell.

• Occupancy Sensor wiring interface to transformer relays, light switches,
different voltage connection to one sensor as required, line, phase and neutral
wires.
• Mechanical equipment motor starters with Hand-Off-Auto and BAS interface.
Include fire alarm device interface for equipment shutdown.
14.4.7 Equipment Clearance: Ensure adequate clear space around electrical equipment
in accordance with the National Electric Code.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 101
14.4.8 Grounding: A separate green grounding conductor shall be included in each

feeder and branch circuit to all electrical devices.
14.4.9 Fire Stops: Fire stops shall be provided at all locations where electrical
equipment or systems penetrate fire rated walls. Fire stops shall be rated equal to or
greater than the wall penetrated.
14.4.10 Conduit Management: In a 3-phase system no more than 3 branch circuit phase
conductors shall be contained in any branch circuit conduit and all shall be of
opposite phases. In a single-phase system no more than 2 branch circuit phase
conductors shall be contained in any branch circuit conduit and shall be of opposite
phases. In general purpose circuits, a common neutral and equipment ground may be
used in branch circuit home runs to a single panel. Do not share neutrals in lighting
circuits. In a 3-phase system, a maximum of 3 opposite phase conductors shall share a
common neutral or equipment ground. In a single-phase system, a maximum of 2 opposite
phase conductors shall share a common neutral or equipment ground. Dedicated computer
circuits shall not share neutrals. All computer circuits shall have dedicated
neutrals.
14.4.11 Wiring: All building wiring systems shall use 480Y/277 volts to the maximum
extent possible. All wiring (including, but not limited to, power, fire alarm,
telephone, intercom, communications, control, etc.) shall be in metal conduit, and all
conduit shall be concealed above ceiling, under floor, or in walls, to the maximum
extent possible. No exposed conduit or piping shall be permitted on exterior building
surfaces.
14.4.12 Disconnects: Disconnects for mechanical and other equipment on the outside of
buildings shall be mounted 18-inches above grade with the exception that the top shall
not be higher than the top of the equipment. Disconnects shall be served from the
rear or bottom with liquid tight flexible metal conduit extended to equipment unless
noted otherwise. Disconnects shall be positioned as to allow flex conduit to be
routed with mechanical lines. Electrical service to the building shall be underground.
14.4.13 Equipment Pads: A 4-inch thick concrete housekeeping pad shall be provided and
installed for all new floor-mounted electrical equipment unless noted otherwise. The
concrete housekeeping pad shall have chamfered edges and extend 4 inches from face and
sides of electrical equipment.
14.4.14 Spare Capacity: Provide at least 25% spare capacity for all electrical
equipment including transformers, motor control centers, and switchboards. Provide
25% spare breakers in lighting panelboards, and 208Y/120V power panelboards.
14.4.15 Restrictions: No asbestos containing materials or lead-base paint shall be

used in work performed at the facility.
14.4.16 Maintenance Provisions: Locate electrical equipment to allow reasonable

access for maintenance. Provisions shall be made for removal of equipment for
maintenance. Assure that proper distance between system components and walls is
maintained to ensure ability to clean, repair, or replace system components.
Provide disconnect switches for remote controlled equipment such as air handlers and
exhaust fans.
Install conduits entering panels from side and bottom of panel to prevent water from
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 102
entering the panels.
14.4.17 Safety of Personnel: Contractor personnel shall not enter manholes, tunnels,
tanks, or confined spaces until such entry complies with the requirements of OSHA
1926.21(6)(i). Government personnel shall not enter manholes, tunnels, tanks, or
confined spaces until a confined space entry permit has been obtained from the Base
Fire Department.
14.4.18 Construction Over Buried Utilities: New construction shall not be placed over
existing buried water, sewer, heating, compressed air, electric, compressed air or
telephone utilities, except in extraordinary situations, and only if special provision
is made for maintenance access. In no case shall construction be placed over existing
natural gas lines.
14.5 SHORT CIRCUIT AND ARC FLASH ANALYSIS
14.5.1 General: Short circuit analysis shall be performed for the exterior and
interior electrical distribution system and shall be included in the Electrical Design
narrative. Coordination and protective device study shall be provided showing devices
and settings. A fault-impedance diagram, a load flow analysis or study, a short-
circuit analysis or study, and a power system coordination study shall be prepared to
demonstrate that protective system devices have been properly calibrated, adjusted,
set and tested. This data, including complete descriptive and technical data of all
protective devices and diagrams required to ensure complete coordination, shall be
prepared in conformance with industry practices, standards, or other technical data
approved by the Contracting Officer’s Representative (COR). These electrical studies
shall be performed using software compatible with that used by the base (such as
EasyPower™ software used by many AF bases). It shall also be submitted for approval of
the COR. The Contractor shall coordinate with the COR for short circuit current
availability at the site at the start of the electrical distribution design. The
Contractor shall deliver to the CO the data files for the software program used in the
load flow, short circuit, coordination and arc flash analysis.
14.5.2 Fault-Impedance Diagram: The diagram shall be prepared to reflect the system
impedance of power sources available to supply the building or facility, and the
impedance of the new power system components for the facility. The fault-impedance
diagram shall show as minimum, fault locations for each voltage transformation and at
each power distribution bus. The short circuit current available at each fault
location shall be shown in tabular form on the diagram for a bolted line-to-line fault
and a line-to-ground fault.
14.5.3 Protective Devices: The time-current characteristics, features, and nameplate

data for each existing protective device, including fuses, circuit breakers and
protective relays shall be determined and documented when necessary to ensure
coordination between existing and new protective devices. New protective devices
proposed, including devices with fixed or adjustable time-current characteristics and
features, shall demonstrate proper coordination with existing devices and new and
related devices.
14.5.4 Power System Coordination Study: The study shall include all data related to
existing and new protective devices proposed as such data relates to the nameplate
data, time-current characteristics and the fixed or adjustable features of the
existing or new protective devices. These data shall include:
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 103
14.5.4.1 The time-current characteristic curves published by the manufacturer of the

protective devices or equipment having adjustable time-current characteristics.
14.5.4.2 Data published by the manufacturer of circuit breakers or protective relays,

which contain installation, operation and maintenance instructions for calibration,
adjustment, setting and testing of the specific protective devices.
14.5.4.3 Composite time-current characteristics curves for primary, secondary and

other related devices, as required to ensure coordinated power systems protection
between existing and new protective devices or equipment.
14.5.5 Circuit Protective Devices: The Contractor shall calibrate, adjust, set and
test each new adjustable circuit protective device to ensure that they will function
properly prior to the initial energization of the new power system under actual
operating conditions.
14.5.6 Arc Flash Hazard Analysis: the Contractor shall perform an Arc Flash Hazard
analysis in accordance with NFPA 70E and UFC 3-560-01 section 4-4.2. Equipment shall
be labeled in accordance with the analysis per NEC 110.16 and NFPA 70E(2009).
14.6 TEMPORARY POWER
The Contractor may temporarily connect to existing electrical power as required to

accomplish the work. Contractor shall provide temporary electrical service and pay
all usage fees as part of design package. All temporary wiring shall be in
accordance with NFPA 70. All temporary outlets shall be Ground- Fault Circuit
Interrupter (GFCI) protected.
14.7 PRIMARY POWER
The electrical designer shall confirm and show on the drawings the most feasible and
selected point of connection to primary power as coordinated with and approved by the
Contracting Officer’s Representative. The electrical design shall incorporate all
necessary revisions to the existing electrical distribution system in order to resolve
any conflicts between the new facility location and the existing electrical
distribution system.
14.7.1 Primary power shall be run underground from the nearest existing pad mounted
sectionalizer switch as described above. Spare connection points must be confirmed for
the sectionalizer selected. The new circuit shall be connected to the existing
sectionalizer via bolt on adaptors and load break elbows and routed to a new pad
mounted transformer via new 2-way concrete encased ductbank (one conduit shall be
spare) and electrical manholes, as required.
14.7.2 Medium Voltage Cable: The primary underground distribution system will utilize
single-conductor copper, 15-kV shielded cable with 133% EPR insulation in Schedule 40
PVC ducts.
14.7.3 Sectionalizing Switch: Pad-mounted, sectionalizing switches shall conform to

the requirements of IEEE C37.63. The switch shall be configured with 2 incoming
compartments for a loop-feed arrangement.
14.7.4 Pad-mounted Transformer: Pad-mounted Transformers shall comply with ANSI
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 104
C57.12.26 and shall be of dual-feed type. Transformer shall be located close to the
facility but outside of the AT/FP 10-meter area. The kVA rating of the new transformer
shall be as calculated by the Contractor’s electrical engineer.
14.7.5 Crossings: All utility road and driveway crossings shall be bored and sleeved
with single schedule 80 PVC or directional boring IAW ETL 07-1. Roads and driveways
shall not be crossed by open cut unless approved. Any other crossings shall conform
to the requirements of ETL 07-1.
.
14.7.6 Manholes/Handholes: All electrical concrete manholes, handholes and pull boxes
shall be of the precast type.
14.8 Secondary Power
14.8.1 Service: Service entrance conductors shall extend from the service transformer
in EB-20 PVC conduit encased in concrete duct bank to the main distribution panelboard
(MDP).
The MDP shall be 480Y/277-volt, service entrance rated with one main circuit breaker,
furnished with digital meter with functions including ammeter, voltmeter, KWH, KWHD
and kVA capabilities, and individually mounted and group-mounted molded case feeder
circuit breakers. Provide transient voltage surge suppression integral to or
adjacent to the MDP that meets the requirements of IEEE C62.42 and is UL listed in
accordance with the testing requirements of UL 1449, 3rd edition. Meter shall
communicate to the building DCS.
Feeders shall be extended from the MDP to 480Y/277V lighting panelboards, to motor
loads, 480-volt power panelboards and to 480-208Y/120V, 3-phase, dry-type transformers
located throughout the facility.
Transformers, panelboards and associated feeders shall be sized for 25 percent spare
capacity. Voltage drop shall be limited to 2 percent from the service panelboard to
distribution panelboards and 3 percent from distribution panelboards to load for a
maximum total of 5 percent.
14.8.2 Loads: Loads shall be evaluated at each bus location in kilowatts or kilovolt-
amperes. Voltage drop shall be limited to not more than the following percentages: 2%
for the secondary lateral service, 2 percent for feeders, and 3 percent for branch
circuits at the farthest distance. Ensure that large motors and compressors do not
create electrical flicker throughout the facility. All voltage drop calculations shall
be included in the Electrical Design Narrative.
14.8.3 Transformer, 600-Volt or Less Primary: Transformers shall be general-purpose,

dry-type, self-cooled, and ventilated conforming to NEMA ST-20 and UL-506.
Transformers shall be provided in NEMA 1 enclosure. Provide primary windings with a
minimum of 4 full-capacity taps; two 2-1/2% increments above full-rated voltage and
two 2-1/2% increments below full-rated voltage for de-energized tap-changing
operation. Three-phase transformers shall be configured with delta-wye windings.
Dry-type transformers shall have 220 degree C insulation system for transformers 15
kVA and greater, and shall have 180 degree C insulation system for transformers rated
at 10 kVA and less, with temperature rise not exceeding 150 degrees C under full-
rated load in maximum ambient temperature of 40 degree C. Transformers of 150 degree
C temperature rise shall be capable of carrying continuously 100 percent of nameplate
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 105
kVA without exceeding insulation rating.
14.8.4 Panelboards: Panelboards shall conform to NEMA PB1 and UL-67. All panelboards
shall have copper buses. Panelboards shall be main circuit breakers with appropriate
circuit breakers for branch circuits. All circuit breakers shall be bolt on type.
Each panelboard shall have, as a minimum, 25% spare load capacity and 25% spare
circuit breaker capacity. Series ratings on circuit breakers shall not be used for
overload protection. Provide four 1-inch spare conduits from each recessed panelboard
to above accessible ceiling space. Circuit breakers having trip ratings of 400
amperes and larger shall be equipped with electronic trip. Provide panelboard
directories per NEC.
Kitchen electrical equipment shall be served from a separate panelboard equipped with
shunt trip main breaker(s) actuated by a panic button at each kitchen exit.
14.8.5 Wiring: Wiring shall be copper conductors. All wiring shall be installed in
conduit or electrical metallic tubing as allowed by the National Electrical Code.
Wiring system shall consist of insulated single conductors installed in raceways. Do
not use cable assemblies, types AC, MC, or MI, in lieu of conduit and wire. Conduit
shall be labeled with source and destination. Empty conduit shall have nylon pull rope
installed in it with 10 feet of pull rope coiled at each end. A ground conductor shall
be installed with all feeders and with all branch circuit wiring to receptacle and
equipment. Conductors shall be a minimum size of 12 AWG.
14.8.6 Identification: All conductors shall be color-coded; colored tape may be used
on conductors #6 and larger at all panelboards, manholes, handholes, terminations and
junction boxes. A green equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in each
receptacle circuit and where noted. All circuit conductors shall be factory color
coded as follows:
208Y/120-volt, 3-phase, 4-wire circuit: Grounded Neutral, White; Phase A, Black;

Phase B, Red; Phase C, Blue.
480/277-volt, 3-phase, 4-wire circuit: Grounded Neutral, Gray; Phase A, Brown;

Phase B, Orange; Phase C, Yellow.
Major items of electrical equipment shall be permanently marked with an

identification name to identify the equipment by type or function and specific
unit number as indicated. Unless otherwise specified, identification nameplates
shall be made of laminated plastic with the following layers:
208Y/120V equipment: White outer layers and a black core.

480Y/277V equipment: Yellow outer layers and a black core.
Edges shall be chamfered. Plates shall be fastened with round-head drive screws or
approved non-adhesive metal fasteners. The following equipment, as a minimum, shall be
provided with identification nameplates: Panelboards, safety switches, transformers,
major electrical equipment and control devices. Letters shall be a minimum of 1/4-
inches in height. Provide a .005 inches brightly colored plastic tape not less than 3
inches in width and suitably inscribed at not more than 10 feet on centers with a
continuous metallic backing and a corrosion resistant 12 inch metallic foil core to
permit easy location of underground utility. The warning tape shall be placed
approximately 12 inch below finished grade levels of duct banks or conduit runs.
Warning tape shall identify the services routed in the ductbank or conduit.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 106
14.8.7 Supports: All conduit and boxes shall be securely fastened in place by means of
clamps, clips, hangers, etc. designed for that purpose; No “tie wire” shall be
permitted. Conduit and boxes shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner in
accordance with local industry standards and acceptable to the Contracting Officer’s
Representative.
Support conduits within 24 inches of each end of each bend, or each termination, and
at intervals along the run that shall maintain true raceway alignment without sag or
deformation (minimum 10 feet on center). On exposed raceways, provide supports at a
minimum of 6 feet on centers and on each side of each bend. Two hole straps shall be
used on flat surface for conduit 1inch and larger. Conduit shall not be supported by
suspended ceiling or suspended ceiling support wires except where allowed by NEC
14.8.8 Wiring Devices: All receptacle and switch cover plates shall be nylon ivory,
except for plated steel in support areas. All electrical devices shall be flush
mounted except where noted otherwise and in support rooms. Receptacle outlets shall
be the same ampere rating as the breakers that feed them to prevent receptacle
overload without breaker trip.
Provide a minimum of one general purpose, receptacle outlet per wall in each room. In
rooms where walls exceed 9 ft, provide receptacles at 8 ft on center spacing.
General-purpose receptacles are in addition to special purpose and dedicated outlets
for special equipment.
Provide one duplex outlet for carbon monoxide detectors in child activity rooms at 60
inches AFF.
Sinks and countertops in non-child activity rooms shall have one 120-volt GFCI outlet
within 3 ft of the outside edge of the basin or edge and be in an adjacent wall or
partition. All outlets within 6 ft of the edge of a sink shall be GFCI protected.
Additional outlets shall be provided so the quantity is one less than sink quantity.
14.8.8.1 General Equipment Outlets: Outlets shall be provided specifically for general
equipment with a dedicated circuit and be installed in addition to the General Outlets
indicated above. Provide dedicated circuit and outlet for the following equipment:
copiers, fax machines, shredders, vending machines, and HVAC equipment locations. A
minimum of one 120-volt outlet for maintenance purposes shall be provided within 25
feet of heating, air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment and shall not be
connected to the load side of the equipment disconnecting means. This outlet shall be
GFCI protected for outdoor and roof-mounted equipment.
14.8.8.2 Receptacles for child areas: All outlets in areas accessible to children,
including corridors, training room, child activity areas and outdoor play
environments, shall be listed tamper-resistant receptacles and be located at a minimum
height of 54-inches from the center of the receptacle above the finished floor. The
exception is the refrigerator outlet described below.
Provide duplex outlets in child activity areas for items such as small refrigerator,
AV equipment, CCTV system, telephones, and computers. Refrigerator outlet shall be
located 18-inches above the finished floor, but be child tamper-proof and located
such that the refrigerator blocks access to the outlet.
Do not locate outlets adjacent to sinks in child activity rooms, including sinks at
diaper changing stations.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 107
14.8.8.3 Specific Equipment: Ceiling outlets shall be provided throughout the

facility, including the training room, and other areas designated by the A/V
contractor, for Audio/Visual equipment and security cameras.
14.8.8.4 Corridors: Provide a minimum of one tamper-resistant receptacle mounted at 54

inches from the center of the receptacle AFF every 30 feet of corridor length with a
minimum of one per corridor.
14.8.8.5 GFCI Receptacles: In each Janitor's Closet, Toilet Rooms, and water coolers,
provide one ground-fault protected receptacle per space, as a minimum.
Ground-fault protected duplex receptacles shall be provided for every 100 feet of
exterior wall length. These receptacles shall be provided in weatherproof enclosures
with hinged covers and shall be waterproof while a cord is plugged in.
GFCI Receptacles mounted within the outdoor play areas shall be mounted at 54-inches
above finished grade and be child tamper-proof.
14.8.9 Raceways and Conduit: Conduit shall be Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT),

Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS), Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC),Schedule 40 PVC, or
Type EB PVC. EMT shall be used for all 600 V and below power, lighting, and control
circuits unless dictated otherwise.
14.8.9.1 Conduit Under Slabs: Schedule 40 PVC conduit may be used under slabs. Provide
galvanized rigid steel elbows and risers to penetrate through concrete slab. Conduit
in duct banks shall have a minimum of 3 in of concrete in all directions. There shall
be a minimum of 2 in of concrete separation between all conduits. All duct banks shall
be a minimum of 24 in below grade. All conduit risers from buried conduit or duct
banks shall be made with GRS elbows and risers.
14.8.9.2 Conduit in Slabs: Place conduits between bottom reinforcing steel and top
reinforcing steel. Place conduits at either parallel or 90 degrees to main reinforcing
steel. Separate conduits by not less than the outside diameter of the largest conduit
to ensure proper concrete bond. The Contracting Officer’s Representative must review
conduits crossing in slab for proper cover. Embedded conduit outside diameter shall
not exceed 1/3 of slab thickness.
14.8.9.3 Flexible Conduit: Flexible metal conduit shall only be used in moveable
partitions, from outlet boxes to interior recessed lighting fixtures, and for
final 18-inches of connection to motors, transformers, and other equipment
requiring adjustment or subject to vibration in dry non-hazardous, interior
locations. BX armored cable is not allowed.
Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be used in non-hazardous locations (no longer

than 18-inches) where subjected to movement and vibration where connections are
subject to one or more of the following conditions:
• Exterior location
• Moist or humid atmosphere
• Corrosive atmosphere
• Subject to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease
• Motor driving a non-submerged pump
14.8.9.4 Exposed Conduit and Raceways: Conduit to roof mounted equipment shall be
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 108
routed beneath the roof structure to a penetration immediately adjacent to the

equipment. Where multiple roof penetrations are required, coordination with other
trades shall be accomplished and grouped through prefabricated roof assemblies.
Exposed raceways shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural

members, or intersections of vertical planes and ceilings. Wiring above lay-in
ceilings is considered exposed (as applied to wiring methods).
Metallic raceways outside are to have conduit threads painted with corrosion
inhibiting compound before couplings are assembled.
14.8.10 Cable Tray: Cable Tray may be used to provide support for communication
cables. Indicate tray depth, width and rung spacing on drawings. Provide horizontal
and vertical elbows, horizontal and vertical tees, horizontal cross, reducers,
expansion joints, bonding jumpers, and supports as required. Cable tray shall not be
used to support other items, conduit, cable tray, piping or utilities. Provide
support per NEMA standards publication VE 2 – Metal Cable Tray Installation
Guidelines. Provide grounding per NEC.
14.8.11 Motor and Controllers: Provide NEMA rated motor starters as required for
the application. Provide Full-Voltage Non-Reversing (FVNR), Reduced Voltage
Autotransformer when motor starting will cause excessive voltage drop, and
Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) for speed control.
VFD Starters: Provide IGBT pulse width modulated design utilizing a three-phase, full-
wave, diode bridge. Provide 6-pulse unit. Provide integral main motor circuit
protector with AIC RMS Symmetrical rating at rated voltage. Provide three mechanically
and electrically interlocked contactors as a bypass for that equipment serving
equipment that is critical to facility operation and mission. Provide phase reversal
and phase loss relays.
14.8.12 Grounding: Grounding systems for this facility shall include the electrical
system service entrance ground, equipment grounding, and other auxiliary systems
grounding such that all systems and components maintain low potential differences.
Copper ground conductors from the main communications room backboard to the main
electrical service ground shall also be provided. Facility grounding system shall have
a resistance of 25 ohms or less to earth.
14.9 Lighting Design and Fixtures
The lighting design for both interior and exterior lighting shall be in accordance
with UFC 3-520-01, Interior and Exterior Lighting and Controls. Lighting design shall
incorporate the latest techniques of energy savings applied to lighting systems.
Consideration should also be given for any task lighting that could possibly reduce
the overhead lighting requirements.
Provide a switch in each child activity area by which the lights for the entire room
can be turned off including the closets. This does not apply to the emergency
lighting. The switch should be located inside the room close to the corridor door.
Lighting fixtures in child activity rooms are required to remain on at all times while
room is occupied.
14.9.1 Interior Lighting: Interior lighting will be generally fluorescent with energy
saving lamps and ballasts.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 109
Child development areas shall utilize 2’ x’ 2’ or 2’ x 4’ fluorescent fixtures with

acrylic lenses.
Offices and training room shall utilize 2’ x 2’ or 2’ x 4’ fluorescent fixtures with

parabolic louvers.
Mechanical rooms, electrical closets, and communications closets shall utilize

industrial type pendant or chain hung fixtures with 10% up-light.
Kitchen shall utilize fluorescent fixtures designed for wet locations.
Lighting levels and color will be in accordance with criteria listed below. The IES
Lighting Handbook, and UFC 3-520-01; where conflicts exist, except where specifically
specified otherwise herein, UFC 3-520-01 shall govern, see table below for recommended
lighting levels. Complete lighting calculations for each room shall be provided in the
Electrical Design Narrative as well as exterior lighting calculations for parking
areas. A tabulation consisting of room number, room description, illumination level,
drawing designation, voltage, basis of design, and lighting detail number shall be
provided with the design narrative.
Lighting Levels
Room Type Foot-Candles (fc)

Corridors 20 fc
Lobby 30 fc
Reception 50fc/70fc (Note 1)
Isolation 30 fc
Staff Offices/Staff Room 50 fc
Training Room 50 fc
Child Activity Rooms 50 fc
Diapering 50 fc
Kitchen 20fc/50fc (Note 1)
Toilets 30 fc
Storage Room 30 fc
Mechanical/Electrical 20 fc
LAN/Server Rooms 50 fc
Exterior-walkways, drives, 5 fc
parking
General Outdoors 0.5 fc
Note 1. ambient light level/light level achieved with task lighting.
Fluorescent fixtures will have T-8 lamps. In general, the fluorescent lamps will have
a color temperature of 3500 Kelvin and a minimum of 75 CRI rating. All fluorescent
fixtures will be specified with electronic ballasts with high power factor (greater
than .9) and low harmonic distortion(less than 10).
14.9.2 Emergency and Exit Lighting: Emergency and Exit lighting will be provided in
accordance with NFPA 101, UFC 3-530-01 and ETL 94-5. All electrical rooms,
communication rooms, mechanical rooms, toilets, reception area and other interior
rooms where sudden loss of light could present problems shall be equipped with
emergency lighting fixtures. Fluorescent battery backup fixtures shall be used for
emergency lighting. Fixtures will be connected to lighting circuits in the area, ahead
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 110
of any local switching. LED exit signs (red), with backup battery, will be used.
Child activity rooms shall not be provided with exit signs, but shall have at least
one emergency fixture that is located to provide illumination of as much of the room
as feasible for the purpose of locating a missing child.
14.9.3 Exterior Illumination: Lighting levels shall be in accordance with the

Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) Lighting Handbook and UFC 3-520-01; where
conflicts exist, UFC 3-520-01 shall govern. Exterior lighting shall include facility
entrances/exits. All exterior lighting shall utilize metal halide lamps. All exterior
lighting shall have the capability to be controlled both manually and automatically by
a photocell installed in series with a programmable timer.
Do not light outdoor play environments unless night time play is required. This is
not a typical requirement. Confirm with COR.
Ensure that adequate lighting is provided on the exterior path of emergency egress.
Street lights may be utilized to achieve this requirement when located sufficiently
close to the egress paths so that they will provide at least the minimum required
illumination levels on the egress paths.
14.10 LIGHTNING PROTECTION:
A conventional lightning protection system consisting of air terminals, down

conductors, and ground rods shall be provided. All lightning protection system
conductors shall be concealed. The lightning protection system shall be designed per
NFPA 780 and TM 5-811-3 requirements. The entire lightning protection system shall be
certified and given a UL Master Label.
14.11 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
(as a minimum):
26 00 00.00 20 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

26 05 48.00 10 Seismic Protection for Electrical Equipment
26 20 00 Interior Distribution System
26 29 23 Variable Frequency Drive Systems under 600 Volts
26 41 01.00 10 Lightning Protection System
26 51 00 Interior Lighting
26 56 00 Exterior Lighting
33 70 02.00 10 Electrical Distribution System, Underground
15. ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
15.1 CODES AND STANDARDS
15.2 COMMUNICATIONS
The communications systems design provided for this project must comply with EIA/TIA
industry standards and consist of both outdoor and indoor-plant horizontal and
backbone cables, connecting hardware and associated communications closets and wire
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 111
pathways to support “inter” (service entrance) and “intra” (within) building systems
and networks. Identification, testing, and reporting shall be provided. Provide
complete systems, which shall include cabling from and splicing within existing
communications manhole location to the new facility.
Others shall provide all patching and patch-cords.
Provide data, voice, and CATV systems complete from the Base connection point to the
wall outlet.
Provide connectivity for the Enterprise Internet Service Provider (EISP). This type
of connectivity will vary by Base as will the location of the actual connection. The
EISP may require a separate CATV or OSP cable to their connection point. Contractor
shall work with squadron IT for specific requirements.
A Registered Communication Distribution Designer (RCDD) shall perform all voice and
data communication design and meet the requirements of above criteria.
15.3 INTER-BUILDING SYSTEMS
The inter-building distribution system shall include two four-inch, concrete encased
PVC ducts from the Base designated communication manhole or other tie-in point to the
main communications room in the facility. Duct banks shall have three inches clearance
between ducts and three inches of concrete surrounding all ducts. One duct shall have
a minimum of four, 1-inch inner-ducts for fiber optic cables. All empty innerducts and
conduits shall have pull strings.
Provide 12-strand, single-mode and 12 strand, multi-mode fiber optic cable through one
of the innerducts, either as separate cables or a hybrid composition. The second duct
shall be for twisted-pair copper cabling. Provide one 25-pair twisted copper cable, as
a minimum. Connect all cables to existing Base infrastructure.
15.3.1 Communication Manholes: Manholes shall be provided as required to not exceed

two ninety-degree bends and a spacing not to exceed 450 feet between manholes.
Manholes shall be eight feet by ten feet by seven feet deep. The top of the manhole
shall be two feet below grade. The manholes shall be pre-cast with knockouts for the
duct bank in each end. Each manhole shall have a floor drain sump. Access opening
shall be three feet in diameter. Pre-cast concrete grade rings shall be used to raise
the manhole cover to grade. Pre-cast manholes shall be equipped with cable racks,
suitably supported and galvanized cable pulling irons. Provide fiberglass reinforced
cable racks. The manhole covers shall be labeled “COMMUNICATIONS” or “COMM”.
15.3.2 Outside Plant Copper Cables: All outside plant copper cables shall meet REA
Specification PE-89 and shall consist of #19 AWG telephone copper cable.
15.3.3 Underground Coax CATV Cable: CATV connection shall be made with coax cable
approved by local provider and installed in a new ductbank.
15.3.4 Outside Plant Fiber Optic Cables: All outside plant fiber optic cables shall
be in accordance with ICEA S-87-640 and shall consist of 8/125 micron, 1550nm single
mode fibers in accordance with TIA/EIA-492CAAA and 50/125 micron multimode fibers in
accordance with TIA/EIA-492AAAA.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 112
15.3.5 Cable Building Entrance: Copper cable entering the facility shall terminate on
wall mounted punch down blocks via wall mounted protection modules. Fiber optic cable
entering the facility shall be terminated on rack mounted termination units.
15.4 INTRA-BUILDING (INTERIOR) SYSTEMS
15.4.1 General: Interior building communications system shall include a complete

raceway system from backboards to outlet devices. Provide cable for all
communications. All end instrumentation will be furnished and installed by others.
Provide complete riser diagrams and equipment locations on the drawings.
15.4.2 Telecommunications Room: Provide dedicated telecommunications room with

adequate space to allow for the mounting and maintenance of equipment to support all
systems. The recommended size of the main communications room is a minimum of 100
square feet with backboards on three of the walls. Telecommunications room shall be
air conditioned, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Maintain temperature between 64
degree F and 75 degree F. Maintain humidity between 30% and 55%. Provide positive
pressure.
There shall be one equipment rack in the communications room; for the termination of
all fiber service feeds, related equipment and for all premise cabling systems. Copper
telephone cable shall be connected to a protected entrance terminal and then
terminated to rack mounted patch panels. Fiber optic cable shall be terminated to
separate rack mounted termination units.
Communications room shall be equipped with dedicated ground straight from electrical
panel on to a wall mounted bus bar.
The security room can be utilized for additional network equipment to mitigate any
length or capacity issues.
15.4.3 Backboards: Provide a 3/4-inch-thick, AC grade plywood backboard for the

telecommunications room walls. The ¾” backboards shall be painted with two coats of
fire retardant paint.
15.4.4 Grounding: All bonding and grounding of communications systems shall be done in
accordance with EIA/TIA standards and regulations.
15.4.5 Equipment Racks: Provide 19-inch-wide x 90-inch-high open equipment racks. A

minimum of two dedicated 120-volt, 20 amp grounded, quad receptacles shall be provided
for each rack. Each rack shall include a wire management system on both sides of the
19-inch width for organizing the cabling.
15.4.6 Patch Panels: For copper telephone cables, patch panels shall be 110- style
with rear terminations and front accessible Cat 6, RJ-45 jacks in 12, 24, or 48 port
configurations.
Fiber optic patch panels shall be a complete system of components by a single

manufacturer, and must provide termination, splice storage, routing, radius limiting,
cable fastening, storage, and cross-connections. Patch panels shall be 19 inch wide
rack mounted panels. Patch panel connections and couplers shall be the same type and
configuration as used elsewhere in the system.
15.4.7 Standardization: Telecommunications termination equipment, cabling,

termination, end equipment, and all other related parts shall be standardized.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 113
15.4.8 Telecommunication Outlets: Telecommunications outlets shall be placed evenly

along walls. The minimum number of outlets in an area shall be, one per wall of each
occupied room, walls of occupied rooms which exceed 10 feet in length shall have one
additional outlet for each additional 10 feet in length or fraction thereof.
15.4.8.1 Voice/Data Outlets: Administrative areas, office, and reception areas require
typical voice and data outlets for phones and personal computers. Typical voice/data
outlets shall consist of two voice connections and two data connections in a common
faceplate on an outlet box.
Child areas activity rooms do not require typical telecommunication outlets. Provide 2
data outlets for computer play stations, where furnished. Voice outlets are not
required. See intercom Section 15.6.
Additional voice or data only outlets shall be provided for:

- Building Automation System Panels
- Security Access Control Panel
- Fire Alarm Panel
- Mass Notification
- CCTV Equipment Rack
15.4.8.2 Voice/Data Jacks: Each voice and data connector jack shall be UL listed,
snap-in type, high impact thermoplastic modular information jack with front changeable
color bezels. Jacks shall be 8-position/8-conductor Cat 6, RJ-45 power sum rated
capable of highest possible data rates, non-keyed type. Jacks shall meet or exceed the
transmission requirements for connecting hardware specified in EIA/TIA 568B.
Telecommunication jack removable bezels shall be color coded to the Base standard or
if no standard exists, as follows:
- Voice jacks: Blue.
- Data jacks: Orange.
15.4.9 Cable Installation: All telecommunications outlet conduits shall be a minimum

of one inch EMT. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40% for over two cables.
15.4.9.1 Unshielded Twisted Pair Cable System: Cable shall meet the requirements of
TIA-568A, Category 6, 100-ohm unshielded twisted pair. Cable shall be rated CMP per
NFPA 70. Cables installed in cable trays shall be plenum rated. UTP wiring shall not
exceed 290 feet in length in accordance with EIA/TIA standards. Cable jacket shall be
factory marked at regular intervals indicating verifying organization. Cable color
shall be the Base standard or if no standard exists, as follows:
- Voice Cable: White.
- Data Cable: Blue.
Provide modular jack wiring configuration per T568A.
15.4.9.2 Fiber Optic Cable: Fiber optic cable shall meet the requirements of EIA/TIA–
568B for 50/125-micrometer fiber cable. Cables in environmental air plenums shall be
listed Nonconductive Fiber Plenum Cable (OFNP). Cables enclosed in metallic raceways
may be listed nonconductive optical fiber general-purpose cable (OFNG).
Provide 12 strand 50 micron fiber optic cable between main communication room and
security room.
15.5 TESTING
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 114
15.5.1 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Tests: All metallic cable pairs shall be tested
for proper identification and continuity. All opens, shorts, crosses, grounds, and
reversals shall be corrected. Correct color coding and termination of each pair shall
be verified in the communication room and at the outlet. All UTP circuits shall be
tested using a test set that meets the Class II accuracy requirements of EIA/TIA-568-
B.2. Testing shall use the Basic Link Test procedure of EIA/TIA-568-B.2. Cables and
connecting hardware that contains failed circuits shall be replaced and retested to
verify the standards are met. All installed UTP cable shall be tested for attenuation
loss at 250 megahertz and results reported in dB. All installed UTP cable shall be
tested in both directions (TC to outlet, outlet to TC) for near end cross talk (NEXT)
and far end cross talk (FEXT) at 250 megahertz and results reported. All of the pairs
in each installed copper backbone cable shall be tested for continuity.
15.5.2 Fiber Optic Cable: Attenuation tests shall be performed from both ends of each
circuit. Connectors shall be visually inspected for scratches, pits or chips and
terminations shall be remade if any of these conditions exist. Each circuit leg and
complete circuit shall be tested for insertion loss at 850, and 1310 nm. All multimode
fiber optic testing shall be in compliance with EIA/TIA-568-B.3.
15.5.3 Test Reports: Contractor shall provide test report in booklet form with witness
signatures verifying execution of tests. Reports shall show the field tests performed
to verify compliance with the specified performance criteria. Test reports shall
include record of the physical parameters verified during testing. Test report shall
be submitted within 7 days after completion of testing to the Contracting Officer’s
Representative.
15.6 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Provide two way hands free communication from room to room and from room to master
station. Provide master station at reception area and remote units at:
- Administrative Offices
- Child Activity Rooms
- Training Room
- Outdoor Play Environments
- Kitchen
- Laundry Rooms
- Break Room
- Front Desk
- Isolation Room
All remote units shall be wall mounted, located near a room entrance and at 54-inches
above finished floor.
Outdoor play environment units shall be weatherproof and located adjacent to the
emergency supply cabinet.
System shall have controls that allow private conversations.
Main Door Intercom: Provide an-after-hours, stand alone intercom system from the main
entrance to the attending personnel location which may be at a location other then the
reception area.
15.7 SECURITY SYSTEMS
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 115
The existing facility proprietor for access control and intrusion detection shall be
provided by the Contracting Officer’s Representative during the design process. This
same vendor’s control panels shall be utilized for the new facilities for
compatibility with the existing system. All equipment shall be compatible and
communicate with the existing Base system as required.
15.7.1 Acceptability of Equipment: All Intrusion Detection Equipment (IDE) must be UL-
listed. Government and proprietary installed, maintained, or furnished systems are
subject to approval.
15.7.2 Intrusion Detection System (IDS): The building Intrusion Detection System shall
consist of detectors on each exterior entry point. Provide a conduit system from a
space set aside for the main IDS panel to all of the device locations. Cabling shall
be provided for each zone/device. All wiring shall be in 3/4 inch conduit minimum. A
failed detector shall cause an immediate and continuous alarm condition. Detection
equipment shall be installed in compliance with UL 681 and 1076.
15.7.3 Unauthorized Exit Notification: All exterior building exit doors, except the
main entrance, kitchen delivery door, and any doors existing onto the play ground
shall have a monitoring system that will notify/alert the reception desk with unique
audible and visual signals.
15.8 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV)
A complete fully functional closed circuit television system shall be provided,

including cameras, monitors, software, wiring and controls. Monitors shall be located
at the Reception desk, Assistant Director office, Training & Curriculum office, and
the Facility Director’s office. The Facility Director shall have access in their
office to live images via the facility network. The large monitors at the reception
area shall be placed in front of the reception desk such that the receptionist can
view the monitors from their normal working position. The receptionist shall also
have the capability to view CCTV images on their desktop computer.
Cameras shall also be utilized to monitor each child changing table, the child
restroom area, overlapping coverage for all interior corridors and the entrance lobby.
A camera shall be provided in the isolation room. A typical child activity room will
require a minimum of two cameras.
Cameras shall utilize IP connectivity to the facility network. Cameras shall be

color, have pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) capability, and have smoked glass domes. Each camera
shall revert to a “home” position after a short period of time of manual PTZ control
inactivity. High resolution cameras with digital zoom capabilities are preferred.
Each monitor shall be connected to the facility network. The controlling software
shall uniquely task and control any system camera. Camera images shall be manually
selectable to any monitor or portion of a monitor. The software shall allow scrolling
of selected camera images. Six 52” flat panel monitors shall be provided for the
reception desk viewing in two stacked rows of three monitors. All monitors shall have
the capability to view a minimum of four simultaneous images.
15.9 ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS SPECIFICATIONS
(as a minimum):
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 116
27 10 00 Building Telecommunications Cabling System

27 21 00.00 20 Intercommunication System
28 16 01.00 10 Small Intrusion Detection System
28 23 23.00 10 Closed Circuit Television Systems
33 82 00 Telecommunications Outside Plant (OSP)
16 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
16.1 CODES AND STANDARDS AND CRITERIA
16.2 QUALIFICATIONS:
16.2.1 Fire Alarm Design: A Registered Fire Protection Engineer shall be required
for the fire alarm and detection design and specifications reparation for this
construction contract.
See Paragraph 13.8 for standard facility hazard classification zone.
16.2.2 Fire Alarm Installation: The installing contractor shall provide the following:
NICET Fire Alarm Technicians to perform the installation of the system. A NICET Level
3 Fire Alarm Technician shall supervise the installation of the fire alarm system. A
NICET Level 2 or higher Fire Alarm Technician shall install and terminate fire alarm
devices, cabinets and panels. An electrician or NICET Level 1 Fire Alarm Technician
shall install conduit for the fire alarm system. The Fire Alarm technicians installing
the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and
operation of the equipment provided.
16.2.3 Fire Detection and Alarm System: The building shall be protected with a fire
detection and alarm system and mass notification system installed in accordance with
NFPA 72 and UFC 4-021-01. Fire detection and alarm systems shall be designed in
accordance with UFC 3600-01, NFPA 72, NFPA 20 and other applicable NFPA Standards and
Codes. The Mass Notification System (MNS) shall be designed in accordance with UFC 4-
021-01 and NFPA 72. The fire alarm system and MNS shall be a combination system as
described in UFC 4-021-01 unless the base standard design is to utilize a MNS that is
stand-alone as described in UFC 4-021-01. The building MNS shall be compatible with
and be provided with an interface to the base-wide MNS.
Provide a complete addressable, 2-wire supervised system. All fire alarm control
panels shall provide a trouble signal and continues to operate as an alarm circuit
after one fault has occurred in the wiring. Meet the following:
Initiating circuit – Class B

Notification circuit – Class B
Signaling Circuits – Class B
All zones shall be able to transmit to the watch desk independent of any other zones.
Multiple zones shall be able to transmit an alarm directly to the fire department and
shall not “lock-out” other zones. Four or more zones shall have a graphic annunciator.
All alarm and trouble signals shall be transmitted to the Base fire station
via the base reporting system, such as a Monaco radio transmitter or other
means of transmission.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 117
Notification of evacuation of personnel shall be by both audible and visual alarms

per NFPA 72. All rooms shall have visual appliances. Audible alarm shall be chimes
or recorded voice with chimes used as the alerting tone. Loud and jarring alarm
sounds shall not be used around the child activity areas.
Automated mass notification messages shall use a female voice. Local Operating
Consoles per UFC 4-021-01 for manual mass notification and general public address
shall be located at the reception desk and in the Facility Director’s office.
The system shall have tamper switches on all valves that would disable the sprinkler
system, and shall transmit all trouble, tamper, and flow alarms to the central
station. Upon the detection of flow of water in sprinkler lines, a water gong shall
sound and the fire alarm panel shall signal an alarm.
Manual pull stations for evacuation of personnel and transmission of fire alarms to
the Base Fire Department shall be located at each exit and spaced to meet NFPA
requirements. These include the exterior doors from child activity rooms.
All fire alarm system acceptance tests shall be performed in the presence of the Base
Fire Department, to demonstrate operation of all newly installed or relocated fire
alarm devices.
Provide Knox box on exterior of building near main entrance when required by the base
fire department.
To clarify an NFPA 72 requirement for emergency exit signs. Emergency exit signs
shall not be installed over exterior doors from child activity rooms.
16.2.4 Fire Alarm Main Panel: The fire alarm panel shall be fully addressable with 80
character programmable alphanumeric displays, capable of handling a minimum of 500
individually identified sensors within the main control panel. The panel shall be
modular type installed in steel cabinet with hinged door and cylinder lock.
The fire alarm control panel shall have a dry set of contacts for each zone, trouble
dry contacts, and fire alarm dry contacts. Provide spare boards for alarm panels, main
board, zone boards, and motherboard. Provide drawings and schematics of fire alarm
panels, recommended spare parts list, and special tools/test equipment required.
The fire alarm panel shall be located in equipment rooms and easily
accessible by the Fire Department.
16.2.5 Remote Annunciator: Provide a remote annunciator that has an 80

character alphanumeric display with alarm acknowledge, and alarm silence.
The remote annunciator shall be located as directed by the Fire Department.
16.2.6 Manual Pull Stations: Addressable manual fire alarm stations shall
conform to the applicable requirements of UL38. Manual stations shall be
connected into signal line circuit. Manual pull station shall be mounted in
accordance with ABA requirements. Pull stations shall be double action type
and red in color. Stations requiring the breaking of glass or plastic panels
for operations are not acceptable.
16.2.7 Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Speakers: Audible appliances shall

conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464. Appliances shall be
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 118
connected into notification appliance circuits. Locate speakers so that they

meet the intelligibility per UFC 4-021-01 requirements.
Audio coverage shall be provided around the perimeter of the building.
16.2.8 Visual Notification Devices: Locate visual devices per NFPA 72 and ABA.
Visual devices shall be synchronized when more than one device is located in a
common field of view. Provide “clear color” strobes marked “FIRE” for fire alarm
notification. Provide “amber color” strobes marked “ALERT” for mass notification.
Strobe coverage shall not be provided outside of the building.
16.2.9 Mass Notification Main Panel: The mass notification main panel shall meet the
requirements of UFC 4-021-01.
16.2.10 Smoke Detectors: Provide smoke detector in all areas except the kitchen and
non-climate controlled rooms.
16.2.10.1 Include smoke detectors in air handling units to comply with NFPA 90A and
all air handling units that deliver more than 2000 CFM. Interlock all required HVAC
fans and equipment with the fire alarm system panel. All fans (supply and exhaust)
within a zone shall de-energize when notified by the fire alarm panel that an alarm
conditions exists in that zone.
16.2.10.2 Any closet greater then 20 square feet shall have a smoke detector.
16.2.11 Kitchen Doors: Provide the door to the kitchen with a magnetic hold open
device connected to the alarm system to allow movement of food carts into and out of
the kitchen without chocking or blocking the door open.
16.2.12. Carbon Monoxide Detection System: Provide a protected premises carbon

monoxide detection system in accordance with NFPA 720 for each building provided with
natural gas at the facility. The carbon monoxide system shall include the following
required features:
• Automatic carbon monoxide alarm signal initiation.
• Notification of carbon monoxide alarms to building occupants using the audible
and visual appliances of the mass notification system.
• Transmission of carbon monoxide alarms to the Base Fire Department as a
supervisory signal in accordance with NFPA 72.
• Transmission of carbon monoxide detection system trouble and supervisory signals
to the Base Fire Department in accordance with NFPA 72.
• Combination-type carbon monoxide detection systems that are integrated in
operation with the building mass notification system and fire alarm system, and
that meet the requirements of NFPA 72 for combination systems.
• Class B initiating device circuits, notification appliance circuits, and
signaling line circuits.
• Carbon monoxide detectors installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
published instructions on the ceiling in the same room as all permanently
installed fuel-burning appliances. Also provide at least one carbon monoxide
detector centrally located within the building when the building is provided with
a one-zone HVAC system. Provide at least one detector centrally located in each
HVAC zone when more than one HVAC zone is provided in the building.
16.3 STORAGE BATTERY:
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 119
Storage batteries shall be provided. The batteries shall be sized to meet the
requirements o NFPA 72. In addition, the batteries shall meet the requirements of
UFC-4-021-01
16.4 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS SPECIFICATIONS:
(as a minimum):
28 31 76 Interior Fire Alarm and Mass Notification System
17 CORROSION CONTROL AND CATHODIC PROTECTION
17.1 CODES AND STANDARDS AND CRITERIA
17.2 CATHODIC PROTECTION AND COATINGS
Metal in soil or submerged in water shall be protected from corrosion to prevent waste
or contamination. Contractor shall conduct a survey of the existing cathodic
protection system or systems in the vicinity of the new facilities to insure that
interference does not occur as a result of multiple cathodic protection systems. If
any conflicts between existing cathodic protection systems and/or other facilities and
the new cathodic protection system(s) are found, the contractor shall properly
coordinate and provide appropriate remedial solutions. All new water lines; fire
protection lines; gas lines; and force main lines shall be protected. The Contractor
shall relocate any existing cathodic protection test stations or other cathodic
protection equipment located in areas conflicting with construction of the new
facilities. Any existing cathodic protection system equipment that has to be moved
shall be relocated to a grassed area.
Corrosion control shall be provided for all metal facilities located in the
atmosphere, soil, or water electrolytes. Cathodic protection shall be provided for
metals in soils or water. Coatings are normally provided as corrosion protection in
the atmosphere. As a minimum, cathodic protection is required on all metallic piping
(and other metallic structures listed, including all ductile iron components) and on
all metallic components of plastic pipelines of the following systems: water lines;
gas lines; force main lines; and fire protection lines. Additionally, all pressurized
steel, cast iron, and ductile iron piping under floor slab shall be provided with both
cathodic protection and bonded coatings. The cathodic protection systems provided on
the metallic structures listed above shall be either impressed current or galvanic
type systems as determined by the following requirements:
1) the pertinent design data as gathered by the “corrosion expert” (defined below),
including but not limited to soil resistivity, material selection, coating selection,
current requirements, anode selection, ability to isolate from foreign structures,
etc. as necessary to meet the minimum potential criteria defined below;
2) full compliance with one or more of the properly edited and subsequently approved
applicable guide specifications;
3) short runs (less than approximately 1000feet) of all metallic pipelines (including
ductile iron) that can be adequately and justifiably protected with a galvanic
cathodic protection systems, nonmetallic pipelines with metallic components, metallic
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 120
components of other described structures requiring cathodic protection shall, as a

minimum, comply with all the requirements of Unified Facilities Guide Specification
(UFGS) section 26 42 14.00 01 (unless gathered data requires the use of an impressed
current system), as listed below;
4) protection of all metallic pipelines shall, as a minimum, be protected with an

impressed current cathodic protection system in full compliance with a properly edited
and government approved Unified Facilities Guide Specification (UFGS) section 26 42
17.00 01.
17.3 QUALIFICATIONS AND REQUIRED SITE VISITS
All Cathodic Protection field work, analysis, design, testing, inspection, and
commissioning shall be accomplished by or under direct supervision of a "corrosion
expert.” "Corrosion expert" refers to a person, who by thorough knowledge of the
physical sciences and the principles of engineering and mathematics, acquired by
professional education and related practical experience, is qualified to engage in the
practice of corrosion control of buried or submerged metallic surfaces. Such a person
must be accredited or certified by the NACE International [formerly the National
Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE)] as a NACE Accredited Corrosion Specialist
or a NACE Certified Cathodic Protection (CP) Specialist (highest currently existing
NACE level in this category) or be a registered professional engineer who has
certification or licensing that includes education and experience in corrosion control
of buried or submerged metallic piping systems, if such certification or licensing
includes 5 years experience in corrosion control on underground metallic surfaces and
submerged metallic surfaces of the type under this contract. The certification or
registration documentation for the “corrosion expert” must be submitted to the
government for approval. The "corrosion expert" shall supervise installation and
testing of all cathodic protection.
17.4 SYSTEM DESIGN
As a minimum, the following submittals shall be submitted to the government for review
and approval: complete Operating and Maintenance (O&M)Instructions as described in the
applicable cathodic protection guide specifications); descriptive and technical
1iterature of all cathodic protection materials and equipment; drawings and details;
evidence of qualifications of the “corrosion expert”; and tests and measurements data
and procedures. Additionally all other submittals included in the applicable guide
specifications shall be submitted to the government for approval.
17.4.1 The Contractor shall provide a complete design for acceptance and approval
prior to purchase of any of the equipment included herein. The Contractor shall
provide calculations; manufacturer's cut-sheets; a complete list of materials;
drawings showing location where each anode, test cabinet, test station, rectifier,
and other material is to be used; complete design drawings and shop drawings to
support this design; and indicate the intentions of the Contractor's final product.
17.4.2 Each submerged metallic surface or buried metallic structure to be protected

in this contract shall have design calculations, a drawing detail of the proposed
cathodic protection system design showing all pertinent information.
17.4.3 Each new metallic pipeline connecting to an existing metallic pipeline shall be
electrically isolated from the existing pipeline by the installation of an insulating
flange. New metallic pipeline passing through concrete slabs, walls, and floors shall
have an insulating material between the pipe and concrete in order to provide
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 121
isolation (this can be accomplished by passing the metallic pipe through a PVC
sleeve). Insulating flanges shall also be installed in new metallic pipelines
extending above grade or where they extend above floor slabs; the flanges are to be
located above grade.
17.4.4 Detailed drawings shall be provided showing location of rectifiers (if an

impressed current system is deemed necessary), anodes, insulated fittings, test
stations, permanent reference cells, and bonding. Locations shall be referenced to
two permanent facilities or marker points.
17.4.5 All potential tests shall be made at 2.5 ft. intervals witnessed by the COR.
Submittals shall identify test locations on a separate drawing showing all metal to be
protected and all cathodic protection equipment. However, a minimum of 3 tests shall
be made at each metallic component in the piping system. Test points, equipment, and
protected metal shall be easily distinguished and identified on the drawings.
17.5 CATHODIC PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS
The Contractor shall edit and submit one of the following UFGS specification
sections (as a minimum):
26 42 14.00 10 Cathodic Protection System (Sacrificial Anode)
26 42 17.00 01 Cathodic Protection System (Impressed Current)
18.0 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
18.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Food service equipment shall be of the sizes and types shown. Equipment, materials,
and fixtures required for use in conjunction with the items to be furnished by the
Government shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. Equipment, materials,
and fixtures indicated on the drawings and schedules shown as Contractor furnished and
installed, shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
18.2.1 Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing Work: Plumbing systems, including final
connections, shall be in accordance with the plumbing sections of the specifications.
Electrical equipment, motors, wiring, and final connections shall be in accordance
with the electrical sections of the specifications. Duct work and accessories shall be
in accordance with the mechanical sections of the specifications.
18.2.2 National Sanitation Foundation Standards: Food service equipment shall meet the
requirements set forth by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). Acceptable
evidence of meeting the requirements of the applicable NSF standards shall be either
the equipment listed in NSF Product Listing displaying the NSF seal for the year the
equipment was manufactured, a certification issued for special or specific food
service equipment by NSF under their special one time contract evaluation and
certification, or a certified test report from an independent testing laboratory,
approved by the Office of the Surgeon General, indicating that the specific food
service equipment has been tested and conforms to the applicable NSF standards.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 122
18.2.3 Verification of Dimensions and Coordination of Project Data: The Contractor

shall become familiar with all details of the work and shall advise the Contracting
Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work. The Contractor shall perform
the following:
a. Horizontal and vertical dimensions shall be field verified.
b. Contract drawings and submittal data shall be reviewed for accuracy and
completeness.
c. The installed utility capacity and location shall be field checked.
d. Critical systems/components shall be reviewed for application and capacities

such as for, refrigeration systems and water line sizes.
e. Delivery shall be coordinated for access through finished openings and

vertical handling limitation within the building.
18.2.4 Standard Products: Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and shall
essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years
prior to bid opening. The experience used shall include applications of equipment and
materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. When two or more of the
same products are supplied they shall be products of one manufacturer. Equipment shall
be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting
Officer, reasonably convenient to the site
18.2.5 Nameplates: Each item of equipment shall bear a stainless steel, aluminum, or
engraved polyester nameplate, as standard with the manufacturer, located in a
conspicuous position and permanently fastened to the equipment. Name or identification
plates shall be of the size standard with the manufacturer for the particular piece of
equipment provided. Name plates shall reflect the name of the manufacturer/trade name,
serial number, make, and model number, pertinent ratings, operating characteristics,
and other information as standard with the manufacturer, date of manufacture,
electrical characteristics, and other applicable data, such as flow rate, temperature,
pressure, capacity, and material of construction. Separate equipment identification
plates with the contract number marked thereon, shall be securely fastened to the
surface of each piece of equipment
18.2.6 Underwriters Laboratories Standards: Electrically operated equipment shall be

in accordance with applicable UL standards such as UL 471, UL 489, UL 710 and UL 197.
Evidence of meeting the requirements shall be a UL label on the equipment, a UL
listing mark per UL Elec Equip Dir or a certified test report from a nationally
recognized independent testing laboratory indicating that the specific food service
equipment has been tested and conforms to the applicable UL standards.
18.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
18.3.1 Delivery: Unless otherwise directed, the following procedures shall apply:
a. Field assembled fixed equipment integrated into structure shall be sent to

jobsite when required.
b. Fixed equipment not integrated into structure shall be sent to the jobsite
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 123
after completion of finished ceilings, lighting, and acidizing of the finished

floor and wall systems, including painting.
c. Major movable equipment shall be delivered to inventory in a secured area

for interim jobsite storage, or if secured area is not available, when fixed
equipment installation/clean-up has been completed.
d. Minor appliances and loose items shall be delivered to the jobsite when the
Contracting Officer is prepared to receive and inventory such items.
18.3.2 Storage: Items delivered and placed into storage shall be stored with
protection from weather, humidity, and temperature variation, dirt and dust, or other
contaminants.
18.3.3 Protection of Fixed/Fabricated Manufactured Equipment: Fiberboard or plywood

shall be taped to surfaces as required by equipment shape and installation access
requirements.
18.3.4 Prohibited Use of Equipment: Food service equipment shall not be used as tool
and material storage, work bench, scaffold, or stacking area.
18.3.5 Damaged Equipment: Contractor shall immediately submit documentation to the

Contracting Officer with a recommendation of action for repair or replacement and the
impact on project schedule.
18.4 DETAIL DRAWINGS
Data consisting of a complete list of equipment and materials shall be submitted.

Detail drawings showing complete wiring, piping, and schematic diagrams, and any other
details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly
function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and
appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work, including
clearances for maintenance and operation.
a. Detail drawings by Contractor shall be separate drawings and shall be the

Contractor's standard sheet size, but not smaller than the contract drawings,
and indicate the food service equipment and cold storage assemblies with
itemized schedule, and special conditions drawings indicating size and location
of slab depressions, cores, wall openings, blockouts, ceiling pockets, blocking
grounds, access panels, and above ceiling hanger assemblies, rough-in
plumbing/mechanical systems and rough-in electrical systems.
b. Detail drawings by manufacturer shall be separate drawings; sheet size shall

be manufacturer's standard size and indicate item number, name, and quantity,
construction details, sections, and elevations, adjacent walls, columns, and
equipment, plumbing and electrical schematics, and fabricated fixtures with
single electrical or plumbing connection, and service access panels required for
maintenance or replacement of mechanical or electrical components.
c. Detail drawings by the Contractor that show the size, type, and location of
equipment drain lines, and floor drains. Drawings shall indicate drain lines
from equipment, distances of drain lines and floor drain receptacles from
equipment and aisles, and elevation views of drain piping and floor drains.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 124
18.5 MATERIALS
The Contractor shall comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35
RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS. Other materials shall conform to the following:
18.5.1 Stainless Steel, Nonmagnetic: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M: 18-8, 300
Series, austenitic, polished to No. 3 or 4 finish on exposed surfaces.
18.5.2 Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing: ASTM A 269. Pipe and tubing shall be seamless
or welded, of the gauge specified, of true roundness, and of material as specified for
stainless steel. Seamless tubing shall be thoroughly annealed, pickled, and ground
smooth. Welded tubing shall be thoroughly heat-treated, quenched to eliminate carbide
precipitation and then drawn true to size and roundness, and ground. Tubing shall be
given a No. 3 or 4 finish when exposed to view.
18.6 COUNTERS
Counters shall be constructed in accordance with applicable portions of NSF 2.
18.6.1 Counter Tops: Counter tops shall be constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel
with all seams and corners welded, ground smooth, and polished.
18.6.2 Pitch and Drainage of Equipment Surfaces: Wherever a fixture has a waste or
drain outlet, the surface shall have a distinct pitch toward such outlet. Corners
shall be coved on 3/4 inch radius and sloped 1/8 inch/foot maintaining level crown at
front edges of rolled rims, marine edges, and backsplashes, when tops are sloped to
drains.
18.6.3 Counter Edges and Backsplashes:
18.6.3.1 Counter Edges: Counter edges shall be one of the following types:
a. Turned Down: 1-1/2 inch at 90 degrees with 1/2 inch kink back at 60 degree
angle from horizontal at bottom. Free corners shall be square.
b. Box Channel Edge: Turned up 3/4 inch at 45-degree angle, turned out 1 inch
horizontally, and turned down 1-1/2 inches at 90 degree angle with 1/2 inch kink
back at 60-degree angle from horizontal at the bottom. Free corners shall be
square.
c. Square Channel Rim: Coved up 3 inches with 1-1/2 inch wide rim and turned
down 1-1/2 inches at 90 degree angle with 1/2 inch kink back at 60-degree angle
from horizontal at the bottom. Free corners shall be square.
18.6.3.2 Counter Backsplash: Counter backsplash shall be one of the following types:
a. Coved up 18 inches and sloped back 2 inches at the top on a 45-degree angle.
Total height 12". Turned down 1 inch at 135 degrees at the rear of the splash
with the ends closed to the bottom of the top turn down. Splash turn down shall
be secured to wall with 4 inch long, 14 gauge stainless steel "zee" clips
anchored to wall, 36 inches on center.
b. Turned up 4 inches at 90 degrees on a 5/8 inch radius with top edge turned
back 1 inch at 90-degree angle with 1 inch turn down at 90 degrees at rear of
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 125
splash with the ends closed to the bottom of the top turn down. Splash turn down
shall be secured to wall with 4 inch long, 14 gauge stainless steel "zee" clips
anchored to wall, 36 inches on center.
18.6.4 Counter Top Support Angles: Counter top support channels shall be 1 by 4 by 1
inch 14 gauge stainless steel with all corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth at
perimeter. Cross members shall be provided on 24 inches centers maximum. A 4 by 4
inch, 12 gauge stainless steel triangular pad shall be provided where leg gussets are
welded to the frame. Angle frame shall be stud bolted to counter top.
18.6.5 Sound Deadening: Counter tops and sinks shall be sound deadened with 1/2 inch
wide rope sealant positioned continuously between all contact surfaces of the frame-
members and the underside of counter top, overshelves and undershelves. Stud bolts
shall be tightened for maximum compression and the excess sealant trimmed.
18.7 COUNTER BASES
18.7.1 Closed Bases: Closed bases shall be constructed with 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch,
14 gauge stainless steel angle with all corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.
Horizontal and vertical angles shall be provided on 24 inches centers or less. The
enclosure panels on closed bases shall be of 18 gauge stainless steel. Enclosed bases
shall be double walled on interior, exposed ends, and at interior exposed partitions.
Service access shall be provided for utilities supplying equipment designed to fit
atop the counter.
18.7.2 Open Bases: Open bases shall be constructed of 1-5/8 inch outside diameter, 16
gauge stainless steel rails welded 360 degrees to the legs.
18.7.3 Gussets: Gussets shall be stainless steel, fully enclosed, a minimum of 3 inch
in diameter at the top, reinforced with a bushing, and shall be continuously welded to
channel or angle.
18.7.4 Legs: Legs shall be of 16 gauge, 1-5/8 inch outside diameter stainless steel
tubing. Legs shall be continuously welded to gussets, channel, or angle as specified.
18.7.5 Feet: Feet shall be sanitary, die-stamped stainless steel bullet-shaped, fully
enclosed and shall provide for a 1 inch adjustment without threads being exposed. The
bottom of the legs shall be finished off smoothly and the stem overlapped to provide a
sanitary closed fitting. Feet for free-standing fixtures requiring utility connections
shall be as above except with a flanged plate at the bottom which shall be anchored to
the floor with noncorrosive bolts.
18.7.6 Undercounter Shelving:
18.7.6.1 Open Base Shelves: Open base shelves shall be constructed of 16 gauge
stainless steel with all edges turned down 1-1/2 inches at 90 degrees with 1/2 inch
kink back at 60-degree angle from horizontal at the bottom. Corners shall be notched a
full 90 degrees and welded from underside to completely fill the gap, ground and
polished. Undershelf shall be braced with 1 inch by 4 inch by 1 inch, 14 gauge
stainless steel channel at longitudinal center line and between each intermediate pair
of legs.
18.7.6.2 Closed Base Shelves: Interior shelves on closed bases shall be constructed of
16 gauge stainless steel. Side edges of the shelf shall be turned up 1/2 inch at 90
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 126
degrees on a 1/4 inch radius and tack welded and sealed to the side walls. Rear of the
shelf shall be coved up 1-1/2 inches at 90 degrees on a 5/8 inch radius. Vertical
joints shall be welded. Front edge shall be turned down 1-1/2 inches at 90 degrees
with 1/2 inch kink back at 60-degree angle from horizontal at the bottom. The vertical
seam of shelf turn down/turn up shall be welded to the face of body partition. Maximum
depth of shelves shall be 27 inches. Shelves shall be reinforced with 1 inch by 4 inch
by 1 inch, 14 gauge stainless steel channel. Shelf slides, where indicated, shall be
14 gauge stainless steel, 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch angles, and shall have front and
back corners rounded and finished smooth.
18.8 SINKS
Sink shall be of the dimensions indicated and conform to the applicable requirements
of NSF 2. Sinks shall be constructed of a minimum of 14 gauge stainless steel.
Vertical and horizontal corners shall be rounded to a radius of not less than 3/4 inch
with double walls at partitions. Continuous 14 gauge stainless steel exterior filler
panels shall be provided between compartments of multiple-compartment sinks and shall
be ground and polished to match the adjacent surfaces. The sink bottom shall be scored
and sloped to assure drainage to the waste outlet. Sinks shall be equipped with waste
and overflow fittings, drain plugs with quick-opening valves, and faucets of the type
specified. Faucet and drain plug, and overflow fitting shall be required for each sink
compartment, unless otherwise indicated. Spout outlet of faucets shall be a minimum of
5 inches above the rim of the sink. Sink legs shall be as specified for counters,
except that closed gussets shall be welded to the support channels. Sinks installed
adjacent to walls or enclosures shall be anchored and sealed thereto. Sinks shall be
sound-deadened as specified for counters.
18.8.1 Plumbing/Trim Requirements:
18.8.1.1 Drain Plug and Overflow Fittings: Drain shall consist of a 2 inch quick
opening brass body valve with side outlet overflow connection with a stainless steel
twist lever handle. Removable perforated stainless steel strainer plate shall be not
less than 3 inch in diameter. Overflow fittings shall consist of 1-1/4 inch diameter
chrome-plated brass tubing of not less than 0.036 inch thickness connected to an
overflow head in the back of the sink compartment. Overflow head shall have a
removable perforated chrome-plated brass or stainless steel strainer plate of not less
than 1-1/2 inch diameter. Overflow head shall be installed in die-stamped opening 1
inch below counter top.
18.8.1.2 Backsplash-Mounted Faucets: Backsplash-mounted faucets shall be combination

fitting-type with an exposed body and concealed supply connections at the back of the
sink. Faucet shall have 1/2 inch NPT hot and cold inlets on 8 inch centers. Faucet
shall have a 8-3/4 inch wide x 12 inch high swivel gooseneck spout. The spout outlet
shall be 5-1/2 inches above the spout connection and fitted with an aerator. Faucet
shall have 2-1/4 inch chrome-plated metal lever handles and ceramic cartridges. All
faucets throughout the project shall be by the same manufacturer.
18.8.1.3 Counter Top or Ledge-Mounted Faucets: Counter top or ledge mounted faucets
shall be combination fitting type with a concealed body and with the supply
connections under the countertop. Faucets shall have 1/2 inch NPT hot and cold inlets
on 8 inch centers. Faucet shall have a 8-3/4 inch wide x 12 inch high swivel gooseneck
spout. The spout outlet shall be 5-1/2 inches above the spout connection and fitted
with an aerator. Faucet shall have 2-1/4 inch chrome-plated metal lever handles and
ceramic cartridges. Chrome-plated copper alloy or stainless steel escutcheons for
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 127
valves and spout, locknuts and washers or lock-nut type escutcheons together with
coupling nuts, and 1/2 inch pipe size union-tailpieces shall be provided. All faucets
throughout the project shall be by the same manufacturer.
18.9 ELECTRICAL WORK
Electrical systems, components and accessories shall be certified to be in accordance

with NFPA 70 and the following:
18.9.1 Installed Equipment Load: Contractor shall be responsible for providing

electrical service compatible with approved equipment.
18.9.2 Electrical Equipment and Components: Food service equipment furnished under
this section shall have loads, voltages, and phases compatible with building system,
and shall conform to manufacturer standards.
18.9.3 Cords and Caps: Food service equipment cord/caps shall be coordinated with
related receptacles. All 120/208/240 volt "plug-in" equipment shall have Type SO or
SJO cord and a plug with ground, fastened to frame/body of item. Mobile equipment
shall have a strain-relief assembly at the cord connection of the appliance. Mobile
electrical support equipment (heated cabinets, dish carts, etc.) and counter
appliances mounted on mobile stands (mixers, food cutter, toaster, coffee makers,
microwave ovens, etc.) shall have cord/cap assembly with cord-hanger as provided by
the manufacturer.
18.9.4 Switches and Controls: Each motor-driven appliance or electrically-heated unit

shall be equipped with control switch and overload protection per UL 197 and UL 471.
Switches, controls, control transformers, starters, equipment protection and
enclosures shall be Industry standards for the equipment environment.
18.9.5 Motors: Motors at 120, 240, 208/240 and 460/480 volts shall have starter with
overload protection and short circuit motor protection per manufacturer standards.
18.9.6 Heating Elements: Electrically-heated equipment shall have thermostatic

controls. Water heating equipment shall be equipped with a positive low-water shut-
off.
18.9.7 Final Electrical Connection Provisions: Final electrical connection points of

equipment shall be tagged with item number, name of devices on the circuit, total
electrical load, voltage, and phase. Fabricated equipment containing electrically-
operated components or fittings, indicated on utility connections drawings to be
direct-connected, shall have each component, fitting, or group thereof prewired to a
junction box for final connection. Refer to the drawings for circuit loading. Field-
assembled equipment (example, prefabricated cold storage assemblies, conveyor systems,
exhaust hoods) shall have electrical components completely interconnected by this
section for final connection as indicated on utility connection drawing. The following
groups of cold storage assembly electrical devices shall be prewired to a top-mounted
junction box for final connection per compartment grouping, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Light fixtures, switches, and heated pressure-relief vent.
b. Door/jamb heater and temperature monitors/alarms.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 128
c. Evaporator fans, defrost elements, freezer fan door switch, and drain line
heaters.
18.9.8 Lamps: Food service equipment containing light fixtures shall have standard
appliance type bulbs or energy efficient appliance type bulbs as indicated on the
drawings. Exposed fluorescent lamps above or within a food zone shall have plastic
coated T-8 energy efficient lamps or standard lamps, sleeved in plastic tube with end
caps.
18.10 INSTALLATION
Equipment shall be installed at locations shown in accordance with NSF Product Listing
and the manufacturer's written instructions. The Contractor shall make provision for
the plumbing, heating, and electrical connections and for equipment indicated as being
furnished and installed by the Government.
18.10.1 Equipment Connections: Equipment connections shall be complete for all

utilities. Unless otherwise specified, exposed piping shall be chromium-plated copper
alloy. Steam operating pressure shall be as indicated.
18.10.2 Backflow Preventers: Backflow preventers shall be furnished as specified in

the plumbing sections of the specifications. The Contractor is responsible to install
backflow preventers as shown on the contract drawings and at all other locations
necessary to preclude a cross-connect or interconnect between a potable water supply
and any source of nonpotable water, or other contaminant. Backflow preventers shall be
installed at all locations where the potable water outlet is below the flood level of
the equipment, or will be located below the level of the contaminant. Backflow
preventers shall be provided of sufficient size to allow unrestricted flow of water to
the equipment, and preclude the backflow of waste or other contamination into the
potable water system.
18.10.3 Plumbing Work: Plumbing final connection points of equipment shall be tagged,
indicating item number, name of devices or components, and type of utility (water,
drain). Extensions of indirect waste fitting shall be provided to open-sight hub
drain, floor sink or floor drains from food service equipment
18.11 CONSTRUCTION OF FABRICATED EQUIPMENT
18.11.1 Grinding, Polishing, and Finishing: Exposed welded joints shall be ground
smooth and finished to match the adjoining material. Wherever materials have been
depressed or sunken by welding operation, such depressions shall be hammered and
peened flush with the adjoining surface, and again ground to eliminate high spots.
Ground surfaces shall then be polished or buffed to match adjoining surfaces. Care
shall be exercised in the grinding operations to avoid excessive heating of the metal
and metal discoloration. Abrasives, wheels, and belts used in grinding shall be free
of iron and shall not have been used on carbon steel. In all cases, the grain of rough
grinding shall be removed by several successively finer polishing operations. The
texture of the final polishing operation shall be uniform, smooth, and consistent. The
grain direction of horizontal stainless steel surface shall be longitudinal, including
the splash back. Polishing at right angle corners shall provide a mitered appearance.
Butt and contact joints shall be close fitting and not require solder as a filler.
Wherever brake bends occur, the bends shall be free of open texture or orange peel
appearance. Where brake work does mar the uniform appearance of the material, such
marks shall be removed by grinding, polishing, and finishing. Sheared edges shall be
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 129
free of burrs, projections, and fins. Where miters or bullnosed corners occur, such
miters and corners shall be finished with the underage of the material and ground to a
uniform condition. Overlapping of material is not acceptable. Exposed stainless steel
surfaces shall have a No. 3 or 4 finish. Finishes of materials, other than stainless
steel, shall be comparable in appearance to commercial mill finish. Exposed surfaces
shall include:
a. Exterior surfaces exposed to view.
b. Interior surfaces exposed to view in doorless cabinets.
c. Undersides of shelves shall have a ground finish of No. 90 grit or finer.
18.11.2 Fastening Devices: Fastening devices shall be of the same material as the
metal being joined when joint pieces are of similar metal. Fastening devices shall be
stainless steel when stainless steel is joined to dissimilar metal. Stud bolts shall
be a minimum of 1/4-20 stainless steel with length necessary to accept washers, and
required nuts, and shall be welded 9 inches on center maximum. Exposed surfaces of
equipment shall be free of bolts, screws, and rivet heads. Stainless steel stud bolts
shall be used to fasten tops of counters or tables to angle framing and trim to other
surfaces. Such bolts shall be of the concealed type. Threads of stud bolts which are
on the inside of fixtures and are either visible or might come in contact with a
wiping cloth, shall be capped with chrome plated washers, lock washers, and chromium-
plated brass cap nuts. Wherever bolts are welded to the underside of trim or tops, the
reverse side of the welds shall be finished uniform with the adjoining surface of the
trim or the top. Dimples at these points will not be acceptable.
18.11.3 Welding:
18.11.3.1 Welding Rods: Welding shall be done with welding rods of the same
composition as the sheets or parts welded.
18.11.3.2 Weld Quality: Welds shall be strong and ductile. Welds shall be free of
imperfections such as pits, runs, spatter, cracks, low spots, voids, and shall be
finished to have the same color as the adjoining surfaces. Butt welds made by welding
straps under seams, or by filling in with solder, or by grinding will not be
acceptable. Welded joints shall be homogeneous with the sheet metal. Spot welding
shall not be substituted for continuous welding. Joints in tops of counters, tables,
drainboards, exposed shelving, and sinks shall be joined by heli-arc welding or a
process other than carbon-arc welding or one that will permit carbon pick-up. Joints
shall be fully welded. Counter tops shall be factory welded into lengths as long as
practical in order to reduce field welded joints to a minimum. Exposed welds shall be
ground smooth, flush with adjacent surface and free of burrs and sharp edges. Wherever
welds occur on nonfood contact surfaces not suitable for grinding or polishing, such
welds and the accompanying discoloration shall be sandblasted and coated in the
factory with a nontoxic metallic-base paint. Bolts and screws shall be welded by a
process that will minimize the possibility of carbide precipitation. Welds in
galvanized steel made after galvanizing, and the adjacent areas where galvanizing is
damaged, shall be cleaned and coated with galvanizing repair compound.
18.12 TESTING
Equipment shall be inspected and tested under operating conditions after installation.
If inspection or test shows defects, such defects shall be corrected, and inspection
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 130
and test shall be repeated.
18.12.1 Performance Tests: A detail written test procedure shall be submitted prior to
performance of tests. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments, test equipment,
and personnel required for the tests; Government will furnish the necessary water and
electricity for the installed equipment. Evidence shall be submitted that the
instruments have been properly calibrated by an independent laboratory at the
Contractor's expense. Performance tests for refrigeration system shall be in
accordance with Section 23 63 00.00 10 COLD STORAGE REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS.
18.12.2 Operating Tests: An operating test shall be performed on all items after
complete installation and adjustment. The failed test item shall be corrected and the
test shall be rerun.
18.12.3 Clean and Adjust: Debris resulting from this work, as the installation
progresses, shall be removed from the jobsite. All food service equipment, prior to
demonstration, shall be cleaned and polished, both interior/exterior. Drawer slides
and casters shall be lubricated and adjusted. Pressure regulating valves, timed-delay
relays, thermostatic controls, temperature sensors, and exhaust hood grilles shall be
adjusted, as required, for proper operation. Faucet aerators and line strainers shall
be cleaned or replaced. Damage to painted finishes shall be touched up.
18.12.4 Equipment Start-Up/Demonstration: The Contractor shall obtain the services of

the manufacturer's representative experienced in the installation, adjustment and
operation of the equipment specified. The representative shall supervise the start-up,
adjustment, and testing of the equipment, prior to the demonstration. Selected items
of equipment and attendees shall be scheduled, with the Contracting Officer, at least
2 weeks in advance of demonstration periods. Equipment shall be carefully tested,
adjusted, and regulated in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and shall
be so certified in writing. A thorough operational demonstration shall be provided of
all equipment and instructions furnished for general and specific care and
maintenance. The Contractor shall submit maintenance manuals as specified in the
Submittals paragraph containing the following:
a. Front and rear protective covers with labeled project name.
b. Index indicating item number, quantity, description, manufacturer's name,

and model number.
c. Maintenance instructions for stainless steel and plastic laminate.
d. Manufacturer's catalog specification sheets and manufacturer's detail and

control drawings.
e. Manufacturer's operation manual outlining the step-by-step procedures for

equipment installation, startup, basic operation features, and operation
shutdown.
f. Manufacturer's maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures,

possible breakdowns, repairs, and troubleshooting guides. The instructions shall
include simplified diagrams for the equipment as installed.
g. Manufacturer's list of parts and supplies with current unit price and
address of manufacturer's parts supply warehouse.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 131
18.13 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT LIST SCHEDULE (Contractor Furnished and Installed)
Item #1 – Storage Shelving
Storage shelving shall consist of steel shelf frames and posts with epoxy finish. Each
shelf shall have a perimeter frame with removable molded polypropylene open grid mats.
Removable mats shall have built-in antimicrobial protection and shall be in 12" and
18" sections that will fit in the dishwasher. Corner of each shelf shall have a quick
release adjustment handle and shall be adjustable without using tools. Each shelf
shall hold 800 pounds up to 48" length and 600 pounds up to 72" length. Each post
shall be 74" tall and shall be constructed with a triangular shape and a reinforced
nylon adjustable foot. Shelves shall be adjustable on 1" increments. Shelving shall be
in the lengths and widths shown on the plan. Each section of shelving shall have five
shelves and four posts except in the corners as indicated where shelves shall be
supported with corner hooks. Shelving sizes shall be field verified to fit the space
available. Shelving shall be installed as shown on plan with the shelves spaced
equally and with the bottom of the lowest shelf 6" above the floor.
Item #2 – Walk-In Refrigerator and Walk-In Freezer
Walk-in refrigerator and walk-in freezer shall be a metal clad polyurethane insulated
walk-in in the size, shape and arrangement as indicated on the plan, measuring overall
approximately 21'-2" long x 6'-9-1/2" deep x 8'-3-3/4" high. Walk-in refrigerator and
walk-in freezer shall have floorless construction and shall be installed on an
insulated building floor in accordance with Detail #1/K100.
Walk-in refrigerator and walk-in freezer shall be constructed in accordance with the
Underwriters Laboratories and the National Sanitation Foundation standards. Walk-in
shall comply with the Energy Independence Act of 2007. Walk-in shall be built with 4"
thick pre-fabricated sectional panels. Panels shall consist of precision roll formed
inner and outer metal pans separated by foamed-in-place rigid urethane insulation.
Insulation shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E-84
and shall be certified with a UL label. The insulated panels in the refrigerator shall
have an "R" factor no less than 29. The insulated panels in the walk-in freezer shall
have an "R" factor not less than 32. Panels shall have "tongue and groove" shaped
foamed edges with cam locking assemblies foamed-in-place at time of fabrication. Each
panel shall be completely filled with foamed-in-place urethane insulation and shall be
tested for voids before leaving the factory. Double PVC gaskets shall be permanently
foamed-in-place on the interior and exterior edges of the "tongue" rail. The bottom of
the wall panels shall be mounted on 1-3/4" high vinyl floor screeds which shall be
secured to the breaker strips and sealed to floor as shown on detail.
The interior walls of both compartments shall be .040" stucco embossed aluminum. The
interior ceilings of both compartments shall be .032" stucco embossed aluminum with a
factory pre-painted white finish. The unexposed exterior walls and top shall be 26
gauge stucco embossed galvalume. The exposed exterior front shall be .040" stucco
embossed aluminum. The entire exterior front shall be equipped with 36" high 1/10"
thick aluminum diamond tread wainscot. Wainscot shall extend all the way down to the
top of the vinyl floor screeds. The wainscot shall have the minimum number of joints
with hairline butt seams. Wainscot shall be installed with stainless steel screws and
sealed to the wall panels and floor.
Walk-in shall be provided with in-fitting flush self closing entrance doors located
and hinged as indicated on the plan. Door openings shall measure 34" wide x 78" high.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 132
The interior and exterior of each door and the interior of each door section, at the
sides of the door opening, shall be equipped with 36" high, 1/10" thick aluminum
diamond tread wainscot to match the front of walk-in. Doors shall be insulated with 4"
thick urethane foam. All door hardware shall be heavy duty cast alloy construction
with powder coated finish. Doors shall have three heavy duty cam lift hinges and a
door closer at the top. Each handle shall have a keyed cylinder lock, padlock
capability and inside safety release. Each door shall be fitted with a 14" x 24"
triple pane glass vision panel with heated glass and frame. Door jambs shall be
equipped with perimeter anti-condensation heaters. Door jambs shall be fabricated with
fiberglass reinforced plastic for high impact strength. The bottom of each door shall
be equipped with a double sweep gasket that seals the bottom of the door to the floor.
Each door shall be equipped with a bumper to prevent the door from marring the face of
the walk-in when opened completely. Each door shall have a 14 gauge stainless steel
flat threshold plate with heater wires below in a recessed channel. The contractor and
the walk-in installer shall coordinate a recess in the breaker and floor below the
finished floor line at the door to allow for the threshold heater channel. The heater
wires shall be easily replaced without the need of special tools. The threshold plate
shall be installed with pan head stainless steel screws so the threshold plate is
flush with the building floor, all as shown on Detail #1/K100.
Each door section shall have a vapor proof light fixture centered above the door as
indicated on the plan with light switch and pilot light and cover plate mounted on
door jamb. All electrical components of each door section shall be pre-wired in
concealed conduit within the panel to a junction box on the exterior top of the walk-
in. Both compartments shall be furnished with additional ceiling mounted light
fixtures in locations and quantities as indicated on the plan. Each light fixture
shall be furnished with a 26 watt compact fluorescent light bulb with ballast suitable
for the operating at -10 degrees F. temperature. The ceiling mounted light fixtures
shall be field wired with the conduit and wiring extended on the exterior top of the
walk-in. The interior and exterior of all electrical conduit penetrations through the
walk-in panels shall be sealed. Each door section shall be furnished with a flush
mounted digital thermometer on the exterior of the walk-in above the light switch.
Thermometer sensing bulbs shall be extended away from the door openings and secured to
the wall. Sensing bulbs and leads shall be protected with a 1/2" high inverted "V"
light gauge stainless steel hat channel secured and sealed to the wall. The walk-in
freezer compartment shall be equipped with a heated air vent as indicated on Sheet
#K200.
Provide and install matching stucco embossed aluminum trim strips to close the gap
between the walk-in and the building walls. The trim strips shall be located at both
sides of the walk-in. The trim strips shall extend from the floor to the finished
ceiling and shall be mounted to the building walls and walk-in wall in a concealed
manner with mastic and sealed. Contractor shall also provide matching stucco aluminum
closure panels extending from the top of walk-in to the finished ceiling on the
exposed exterior front and partial left end. Top of panels shall be formed in and
secured to the ceiling. Panels shall extend down to conceal the joints of the ceiling
panels. Bottom of panels shall have a hug edge and shall be secured to the walk-in
with mastic. The joints of the closure panels shall align with the walk-in panel
joints.
The refrigerator compartment shall be capable of maintaining 35o to 38o Fahrenheit

temperature and the walk-in freezer compartment shall be capable of maintaining 0o to -
10o Fahrenheit temperature. The refrigerator compartment shall be equipped with a 3/4
HP air cooled welded hermetic pre-assembled remote refrigeration system wired 208-60-1
phase. The walk-in freezer compartment shall be equipped with a 2 HP air-cooled welded
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 133
hermetic pre-assembled remote refrigeration system wired 208-60-1 phase. Both systems
shall use R404A refrigerant. Refrigerator evaporator shall be wired 120-60-1 phase and
walk-in freezer evaporator shall be wired 208-60-1 phase. Each system shall be
provided with evaporator coil, condensing unit, thermostatic expansion valve, solenoid
valve, temperature control, sight glass, drier, suction filter, pressure control, time
clock, and pre-wired control panel. Both evaporators shall have coated coils and high
efficiency fan motors. Field wiring for the refrigerator system shall be a two point
connection. Condensing unit and the evaporator shall be wired separately eliminating
the need for inter-wiring. Field wiring for the walk-in freezer system shall be a one
point connection. All wiring shall be run to the condensing unit with the time clock
located at the condensing unit. Inter-wiring will be required from the condensing unit
and time clock to the evaporator.
The condensing units shall be located outdoors on the ground outside the kitchen as
shown on plan. Condensing units shall be mounted on a concrete pad which shall be
furnished by the general contractor. Condensing units shall be secured to the pad in
an approved manner. Condensing units shall be supplied with individual hinged
weatherproof housings, crankcase heaters, and low ambient controls. Condensing units
shall be factory pre-wired. Walk-in shall be complete with all the above specified
equipment including refrigerant and all additional refrigeration equipment and
accessories required to make complete refrigeration systems including refrigerant line
runs, refrigerant charging and leak checking. A complete cycle test shall be performed
on each system as part of final testing.
All refrigeration lines shall be extended from the condensing units on the roof to the
evaporators, and insulated only after each system has been thoroughly checked for
refrigerant leaks. The insulation shall be continuous for the full length of all
copper lines. Refrigerator system insulation shall be 1/2" thick and walk-in freezer
system insulation shall be 3/4" thick. All joints in the insulation shall be sealed
with insulation sealer. Exposed refrigeration lines outdoors shall be covered with
plastic sleeving. The refrigeration lines shall be supported approximately every 8'-0"
and at all turns. The refrigeration installer shall size the refrigeration lines to
accommodate the line run length, routing, turns, etc. The suction lines shall have a
"P" trap 12'-0" on centers in the vertical run of the refrigeration lines. The copper
refrigeration lines shall be isolated from metal hangers. Each walk-in refrigeration
system shall be complete with all the above specified equipment including refrigerant
and all additional refrigeration equipment and accessories required to make a complete
refrigeration system including refrigerant line runs, refrigerant charging and leak
checking. A complete cycle test shall be performed on each system as part of final
testing. Each system shall be complete and installed in accordance with Part 4 of
these specifications.
Each evaporator shall be provided with a 3/4" copper drain line which shall pitch for
complete drainage of all condensation. Drain lines shall extend through sleeves
through the walk-in walls and building walls to the floor drain in the dry storage
room and to the janitor sink in the janitor closet as shown on Sheet #K200. Drain
lines shall have a "P" trap outside the walk-in, just above the floor drain. All
portions of the drain lines within the walk-in freezer compartment shall be completely
wrapped in electric heater cable and shall then be fully insulated to prevent any
freezing of condensation within the drain line.
All penetrations of insulated panels for electrical conduit and wiring, refrigeration
lines, drain lines and/or other services shall be made through vapor tight sleeves
that pass completely through the panels and are sealed to the interior and exterior
metal surfaces to prevent the infiltration of air into the insulated cavities.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 134
Interior of all sleeves shall be filled with low temperature caulking.
The kitchen equipment contractor shall erect this walk-in in place, carefully sealing
the walk-in to the building floor with non-hardening caulking compound all in
accordance with this manufacturer's recommendations. The refrigeration systems shall
be completely installed as indicated on the drawings with the electrical contractor to
connect all condensing units, evaporators, components as previously specified and make
all interconnecting wiring between the evaporators and/or condensing units and
controls. Each unit shall be charged and adjusted and after the initial start-up and
adjustment, the installing contractor shall furnish a one year refrigeration service
policy on a local level including all labor, materials, refrigerant and mileage. Walk-
in refrigerator and walk-in freezer and all refrigeration equipment shall otherwise be
in accordance with this manufacturer's standard specifications.
Item #3 – Freezer Shelving
Freezer shelving shall be the same as the storage shelving, Item #1 except shelving
shall have no corner hooks. Sizes and quantities shall be as shown on the plan.
Item #4 – Dunnage Racks (2)
Each dunnage rack shall measure 30" long x 20" wide x 12" high. Each rack shall have 4
lateral tubes and four legs constructed of 1-1/2" x 1-3/4" x .070" wall Type 6063-T5
high tensile extruded aluminum tube. All joints shall be heli-arc welded and the feet
shall be capped and welded. Dunnage rack shall have a minimum weight capacity of 3,000
pounds.
Item #5 – Refrigerator Shelving
Refrigerator shelving shall be the same as the freezer shelving, Item #3. Sizes and
quantities shall be as shown on the plan.
Item #6 – Refrigerator
Refrigerator shall be a two section self-contained unit with 56 cubic feet capacity,
measuring overall approximately 51-3/8" wide x 34-3/4" front to back x 84-1/4" high.
Refrigerator shall have stainless steel interior and exterior, full height doors
hinged on the outside ends and 6" high stainless steel legs with stainless steel
adjustable feet. The doors shall be fitted with cam-lift hinges, concealed light
switches and chrome plated hardware with keyed locks. The interior of the refrigerator
shall be equipped with ten epoxy coated wire shelves. The refrigerator shall be
equipped with a top mounted 1/2 H.P. condensing unit with automatic defrost and hot
gas condensate evaporator. The refrigerant shall be R134a. Refrigerator shall be wired
120-60-1 phase with cord and plug. The refrigerator shall be furnished with all
standard equipment. Refrigerator shall be by the same manufacturer as the Freezer,
Item #7. Refrigerator shall have the thermometers on the outside.
Item #7 – Freezer
Freezer shall be a single section self-contained unit with 31 cubic feet capacity,
measuring overall approximately 29" wide x 34-3/4" front to back x 84-1/4" high.
Freezer shall have stainless steel interior and exterior, full height door hinged on
the left and 6" high stainless steel legs with stainless steel adjustable feet. The
door shall be fitted with cam-lift hinges, concealed light switch and chrome plated
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 135
hardware with keyed lock. The interior of the freezer shall be equipped with five
epoxy coated wire shelves. The freezer shall be equipped with a top mounted 1/2 H.P.
condensing unit with automatic defrost and hot gas condensate evaporator. The
refrigerant shall be R404a. Freezer shall be wired 120-60-1 phase with cord and plug.
The freezer shall be furnished with all standard equipment. Freezer shall be by the
same manufacturer as the Refrigerator, Item #7. Freezer shall have the thermometers on
the outside.
Item #8 – Ice Machine
Ice machine shall be a crushed type unit with an integral bin, measuring overall
approximately 26" wide x 26-1/2" front to back x 38-1/2" high. Ice machine shall have
a production capacity of 90 pounds of ice per 24 hours at 90o F. air and 70o F. water
temperatures and a storage capacity of 80 pounds. Ice machine shall produce half dice
rhomboid shaped cubes measuring 3/8" x 1-1/8" x 7/8". Ice machine shall have stainless
steel exterior panels, a plastic bin door that hinges up and slides back under the top
cover and 6" high legs with adjustable feet. Ice machine shall have an air cooled
condenser using R-404A refrigerant and shall be wired 120-60-1 phase with cord and
plug. Refrigeration system shall have intake and exhaust on the front of the ice
machine with a removable air filter and plastic louvers.
Ice machine shall be furnished with a water filter mounted on the wall above the unit
as shown on plan. The filter shall consist of a single cartridge with 1/2 micron
precoat filtration with self contained scale inhibitor feed. One replacement cartridge
shall be furnished with the filter.
Item #9 – Hand Sinks (2)
Hand sinks shall have one piece deep drawn heavy gauge stainless steel construction
with all vertical and horizontal corners coved. Hand sinks shall measure overall
approximately 17" wide x 15" front to back with a bowl size of 14" x 10" x 5" deep.
Hand sinks shall have an integral 7-3/4" high back splash with a 2" turn back on a 45o
angle. Hand sinks shall have two openings in the back splash 4" on center. Mounted to
the back splash shall be a faucet with wrist action handles and a swivel goose neck
spout with aerator. Each sink shall have a 1-1/2" stainless steel drain with a
stainless steel basket strainer. The hand sinks shall be furnished with stainless
steel support brackets for mounting the sinks to the wall. Support brackets shall be
secured to the sides of the sinks and shall slope back to the wall on an angle. Hand
sinks shall be installed with the front rim at 34" above the finished floor. Paper
towel and soap dispensers shall be furnished and installed by the government. Provide
ASME 112.18.1M copper alloy center set ABA compliant,infrared sensor activated, hard-
wired (battery operated not acceptable) faucets with aerator and perforated grid
strainers.
Item #10 – Mop Rack
Mop rack shall be a 36" long stainless steel unit with 4 mop holders. Mop rack shall
be 5" high and shall hold the mops 3-1/4" from the wall. The exposed end shall be
fully enclosed with a stainless steel filler. Mop holders shall have an anti-slip
spring loaded rubber cam to grip handles 7/8" to 1-1/4" in diameter. Mop rack shall be
mounted and sealed to the building wall at 6'-0" above the finished floor in the
location shown on plan.
Item #11 – Janitor Shelving
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 136
Janitor shelving shall be the same as the storage shelving, Item #1. Size shall be as
shown on the plan.
Item #12 – Utensil Storage Racks (2)
Utensil storage racks shall be the same as the freezer shelving, Item #3. Sizes and
quantities shall be as shown on the plan.
Item #13 – Clean Dish Table
Clean dish table shall be custom fabricated as indicated on the plan, measuring
overall approximately 7'-0" long x 2'-6" wide x 2'-10" high at the dishwasher. The top
shall be constructed of one piece 14 gauge stainless steel with the front and right
end edges formed up into a 3" high x 1/1/2" wide square channel rim. The rear shall be
formed up into a 10" high x 2" thick back splash. The left end of the back splash
shall be returned to the dishwasher with an 10" high single thickness splash on a 90
degree angle. A portion of the left end of the clean dish table shall be formed down
into the dishwasher and secured and sealed in a watertight manner. The top shall have
a built-in pitch toward the dishwasher. The entire table shall be mounted on an open
tube base. The underside of the table shall be braced to support the booster heater
without deflection. The under bracing of the top, above the booster heater, shall
accommodate the slide mounting brackets of the booster heater. The base of the table
shall be equipped with a 16 gauge stainless steel undershelf from the booster heater
to the right end.
Mounted to the wall above the table shall be a shelf, 6'-0" long x 1'-0" wide. Shelf
shall be custom fabricated of 16 gauge stainless steel with the free edges formed down
1-1/2" square. The rear edge abutting the wall shall be formed up 1-1/2" square and
sealed to the wall. The shelf shall be mounted 1'-8" above the work surface. The shelf
shall be mounted to the wall with stainless steel solid cantilever type brackets.
Item #14 – Booster Heater
Booster heater shall be an electric compact booster heater measuring overall 13" wide
x 21" deep x 14" high. Booster heater shall have a 6 gallon tank with ceramic coating,
fiberglass insulation and stainless steel front panel, body and base. Booster heater
shall be mounted to the underside of the clean dish table, Item #13, on angle slide
brackets. Booster heater shall have 6.0 kilowatt elements wired 480-60-3 phase.
Heating elements shall be metal sheathed, controlled by close tolerance immersion
thermostats. The booster shall be protected with high temperature limit switch and low
water cut-off. Booster shall also be furnished with temperature/pressure relief valve,
pressure reducing valve, two temperature/pressure gauges, shock absorber and an on-off
switch and pilot light.
Item #15 – Dishwasher
Dishwasher shall be a straight through, semi-automatic door type, high temperature

single tank machine wired 480-60-3 phase. Dishwasher shall have a capacity of 58 racks
per hour with a maximum rinse consumption of 0.74 gallons per rack. Dishwasher shall
measure 25" long between tables x 28" x 66-1/2" high. Wash tanks and chamber shall be
constructed of 16 gauge stainless steel. Dishwasher shall have stainless steel frame,
front panel, feet and legs. Dishwasher shall have coupled slide up counter-balanced
doors at each end and on the front. The drain valve shall be actuated by closing the
doors. Dishwasher shall have removable stainless steel upper and lower wash and rinse
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 137
arms, removable stainless steel self flushing strainer pans and a large deep stainless
steel scrap basket.
Dishwasher shall have a 2 horse power squirrel cage, induction type motor with solid
state thermal protection and grease packed ball bearings. Pump shall have a stainless
steel impeller integral with the motor and a removable impeller housing. Pump shaft
seal shall have carbon ceramic sealing interface. Pump shall have a capacity of 160
GPM. Dishwasher shall have a 5 kilowatt electric immersion heating element for tank
heat. Heater shall be controlled by solid state controls with positive low water
protection.
Motor and tank heat shall be wired to a single electrical connection point in a
stainless steel control panel mounted in the front of the machine. Control panel shall
house a microcomputer based control system to automatically control fill, wash, dwell
and rinse cycles. Unit shall have 1, 2, 4 and 6 minute wash cycles. Control panel
shall have digital LED wash and rinse temperature readout, manual by-pass switch and
magnetic power switch. Furnished with the dishwasher shall be 19-3/4" x 19-3/4" full
size plastic racks in gray color. Provide three peg type racks with extended height
and three flat type racks.
Item #16 – Condensate Hood
Condensate hood shall be a factory built wall mounted canopy style condensate
ventilator constructed and installed in accordance with Detail #4/K100 on the
drawings. Hood shall be an exhaust only, Type II unit designed specifically for
removal of moisture laden air in non-grease applications. Hood shall measure 3'-6"
long x 3'-6" front to back x 2'-0" high. Exhaust hood shall be constructed in
accordance with the latest requirements of NFPA Bulletin #96 and shall be fabricated
according to the National Sanitation Foundation Standard #2 and shall bear the NSF
seal. The exhaust hood shall be constructed of 18 gauge type 304 stainless steel with
a #4 finish. All exposed welds shall be ground smooth and polished to the original
finish of the metal. Internal seams shall be filled with NSF approved non-hardening
sealer. Hood shall include full length removable condensate baffles constructed of 18
gauge type 304 stainless steel. Baffles shall be pitched to drain into a 1-1/2" wide
full perimeter welded condensate collecting gutter with a 1/2" N.P.T. stainless steel
drain fitting at the right rear corner. Drain line shall be extended from the hood to
the floor sink below. Top of hood shall have a 10" x 10" exhaust duct collar,
exhausting 615 CFM at 0.10" static pressure at duct collar.
Hood shall be furnished with necessary hanger rods and brackets to secure it to the
building structure above and the wall behind the hood. Hood shall be supplied with 18
gauge stainless steel closure channels as required to close the gap between the top of
the exhaust hood and the finished ceiling. All exhaust hoods throughout the project
shall be by the same manufacturer.
Item #17 – Soiled Dish Table
Soiled dish table shall be custom fabricated in the size, "L" shape and arrangement as
indicated on the plan, measuring overall approximately 11'-0" long x 2'-8" wide on the
left leg and 10'-0" long x 2'-6" wide on the right leg x 2'-10" high to working level
at the dishwasher, Item #15. The top and sink compartments shall be constructed of one
piece 14 gauge stainless steel with the edges against the building walls formed up
integrally into a 10" high x 2" thick back splash. The splash shall be mitered into
the dishwasher as indicated on the plan. The right end of the top shall be formed down
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 138
into the dishwasher and secured and sealed in a water tight manner. The front and left
end of the table shall be formed up into a 3" high x 1-1/2" square channel rim. The
top shall have a built-in pitch to the sinks and dishwasher.
The left leg of the table shall have three sink compartments and a left drain board
3'-0" long. All three sink compartments shall measure inside 20" wide x 28-1/2" front
to back x 12" deep. The center bottom of each sink shall be fitted with a twist handle
drain. A 14 gauge stainless steel tab shall be stud bolted to the bottom of each sink
to support the drain handle. Mounted to the back splash and centered over the sink
partitions shall be two backsplash mounted faucets in accordance with Section
18.8.1.2. All faucets throughout the project shall be by the same manufacturer.
Welded integrally into the right leg of the dish table as indicated on the plan shall
be a pre-rinse sink measuring approximately 22" x 22" x 6" deep. Bottom of sink shall
be fitted with a 2 H.P. commercial disposer wired 208-60-3 phase. The disposer shall
be equipped with a 6-5/8" diameter sink mounting assembly with splash baffle and
stopper. The 6-5/8" stainless steel collar shall be integrally welded into the bottom
of the pre-rinse sink. Disposer shall have a corrosion resistant stainless steel grind
chamber, cast nickel chrome alloy stationary and rotating shredding elements, 3/4"
rubber mounting above the grind chamber with chrome plated cover, double tapered
roller bearings and triple lip motor seals. Motor shall be 2 H.P. totally enclosed fan
cooled induction motor with built-in thermal overload protection. The disposer shall
be equipped with a 2" waste outlet. Disposer shall be equipped with a control center
with solid state control circuit, printed circuit board, stainless steel NEMA 4 water
tight enclosure, automatic reversing magnetic contactors with reversing delay,
adjustable post water flush feature from 0 to 10 minutes, solenoid valve, line
disconnect switch and all standard equipment. The control center shall be mounted on a
14 gauge stainless steel bracket secured in a rigid manner to the underside of the
dish table to the right of the pre-rinse sink. The face of the control panel shall be
recessed 2" back from the front face of the sink. Rear of the sink shall have a water
inlet connected through the solenoid valve. All disposers throughout the project shall
be by the same manufacturer.
Supplied to fit the pre-rinse sink shall be a stainless steel removable rack guide to
allow dish racks to slide across pre-rinse sink. Rack guide shall have two 1" x 1-1/2"
x 1" 16 gauge stainless steel channels connected with two 1" diameter stainless steel
tubes integrally welded together. Top of rack guide shall be flush with the dish table
surface and the channels shall be supported on 1/4" thick stainless steel tabs welded
to the sides of the sink.
Mounted to the back splash over the pre-rinse sink shall be a pre-rinse faucet. Faucet
shall have 1/2" NPT female inlets spaced 8" on center, internal check valves and
ceramic cartridges. Faucet shall have a 3/8" NPT female outlet with an 18" long
vertical riser with a wall mounted support bracket. Connected to the riser shall be a
hose with a stainless steel sheath, coil spring, insulated handle, and a spray valve.
Pre-rinse unit shall have a hook to hold the spray valve in position. All faucets
throughout the project shall be by the same manufacturer.
The soiled dish table shall be mounted on an open tube base. Base shall be open to the
floor without front rail bracing below the three sink compartments, below the pre-
rinse sink and just to the left of the pre-rinse sink for a length of approximately
2'-6" to accommodate a trash bin furnished by the government. The remaining area of
the base from the trash bin to the corner and below the left drain board shall have a
stainless steel undershelf.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 139
Mounted to the building wall above the right leg of the table as shown on drawing
shall be a cup and glass rack shelf designed to hold 20" x 20" cup and glass racks.
Shelf shall measure 5'-6" long and shall be constructed of one piece 14 gauge
stainless steel with the front edge formed into a 1-1/2" wide drain trough, with a 1-
1/2" wide square channel rim. The rear edge shall be formed up 1-1/2" square to the
contour of the wall. Ends of shelf shall be welded closed with 14 gauge stainless
steel fillers formed to the front and rear edges. Shelf shall be pitched to the left
end with the low end of trough fitted with a 1" O. D. stainless steel drain tube
welded integrally to trough. Drain line shall extend on an angle back to the wall,
straight down the wall, through the back splash, below the undershelf and over to the
funnel of the floor drain below. Where the drain line penetrates the back splash it
shall be sealed. The drain line shall be secured to the underside of the undershelf.
Rack shelf shall be mounted to the wall with three 14 gauge stainless steel all welded
closed type brackets. Shelf shall be constructed on a 25 degree angle with the bottom
of the shelf approximately 15" above working level.
Mounted to the wall above the left leg of the table as shown on plan shall be an
elevated shelf measuring 9'-0" long x 1'-0" wide. The shelf shall be constructed of 16
gauge stainless steel with the rear edge formed up 1-1/2" square and sealed to the
wall. The front and end edges shall be formed down 1-1/2" square. The shelf shall be
mounted 1'-8" above the drain board surface. The shelf shall be mounted to the wall
with three stainless steel all welded closed type brackets.
Mounted to the wall above the elevated shelf as shown on plan shall be a single
utensil rack 7'-0" long. Utensil rack shall be located 1'-3" from the rear wall with
the top of the band 7'-0" above the floor. Utensil rack shall be constructed of 1/4" x
2" stainless steel band. The center and each end of the band shall have a stainless
steel solid type angle bracket secured to the wall. Furnished with the utensil rack
shall be sixteen double sided stainless steel sliding pot rack hooks.
Item #18 – Open Rack
Open rack shall be an all welded aluminum rack measuring approximately 20-1/2" wide x
26-1/2" deep x 69" high. Rack shall have 12 pairs of wide angle slides welded to the
frame 5" on center. Each set of slides shall hold (1) 18" x 26" pan or (1) 12" x 20"
pan. The rack frame shall be constructed of 1" square all welded aluminum tubing. Rack
shall have corner bumpers and 5" diameter swivel casters.
Item #19 – Heated Cabinet
Heated cabinet shall measure overall approximately 33" wide x 33" deep x 69" high.
Cabinet shall have 20 gauge stainless steel exterior, 24 gauge stainless steel
interior, fiberglass insulation, 1" square steel tube welded base frame and an
extended 1-1/2" wide full perimeter vinyl bumper. Cabinet shall have a full height
stainless steel door hinged on the right as shown on drawing. Door shall have edge
mount hinges, high temperature gaskets, full grip door handle and positive latch.
Cabinet shall have a 1" x 3/8" solid chrome plated steel push bar at each side and
shall be mounted on 5" diameter all swivel polyurethane tired casters. Heated cabinet
shall be furnished with 12 pairs of rod style universal tray slides designed to
support trays on the bottom and adjustable at 1-1/2" increments. Each set of slides
shall accommodate (1) 18" x 26" pan or (2) 12" x 20" pans. Cabinet shall be wired 120-
60-1 phase with cord and plug. Heating system shall have a stainless steel heating
element, fan cooled blower motor, removable stainless steel humidifying chamber and a
removable stainless steel water pan. Controls shall include a thermostat adjustable up
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 140
to 190o F., thermometer, power supply light, and thermostat cycling light.
Item #20 – Exhaust Hood
Exhaust hood shall be a factory built wall style canopy type compensating hood
measuring overall approximately 14'-0" long x 2'-0" high x 4'-9" front to back. Hood
shall be constructed and installed in accordance with Detail #6/K100 on the drawings.
The depth of the hood shall include an integral 3" air space at rear with the hood
sealed to the wall at the bottom and each end. The bottom edge of the exhaust hood
shall be 6'-6" above the finished floor. The exhaust hood shall be constructed of 18
gauge type 304 stainless steel with a #4 finish on interior and exterior. Hood shall
be of all welded construction with all exposed welds ground smooth and polished to the
original metal finish. Hood shall be constructed to comply with NSF, NFPA-96 and U.L.
where such listings apply. Hood shall be delivered to the job site with a "U.L. Listed
without Fire Damper" label affixed to the hood. Hood shall be supplied with a full
length stainless steel slanted interior filter frame. The filter frame shall be fitted
with 16" high stainless steel U.L. 1046 Classified and NSF Certified high efficiency
baffle type filters. Front of each filter shall have exhaust entrances at the top and
bottom with center exhaust air exits on the rear. Hood shall be fitted with a
stainless steel grease collection trough fitted with a stainless steel removable
grease receptacle. The grease trough shall pitch to the left end. Interior of hood
shall be supplied with five equally spaced incandescent light fixtures. Light fixtures
shall be equipped with a 100 watt bulb and a vapor proof globe. Light fixtures shall
be inter-wired in a concealed manner on top of hood to a junction box on left end.
Light switch shall be furnished by the electrical contractor in the building wall as
shown on the utility requirement plan. Front of hood shall be fitted with a fully
insulated tempered make-up air plenum complete with removable perforated type 304
stainless steel face panels of proper size and quantity to provide proper make-up air
distribution.
The hood shall be constructed in one section and shall have (2) 12" x 15" exhaust
outlets exhausting 2,100 CFM each at approximately 0.80" static pressure at the duct
collars. Exhaust hood shall also be supplied with (2) 12" x 24" tempered make-up air
inlets, supplying 1,680 CFM each at approximately 0.15" static pressure at the duct
collars.
The exhaust hood shall be fitted with hanger rods and stainless steel brackets to
secure the hood to the building structure above and to the building wall at the rear.
Exhaust hood shall be fitted with an 18 gauge stainless steel closure channel
extending from top of hood to the finished ceiling on front and both sides, as
required by job-site conditions.
Fire suppression system for the exhaust hood shall be provided under Item #26.
Custom fabricated 18 gauge stainless steel panels shall be provided to cover the
building wall below the full length of the exhaust hood. The panels shall extend below
the rear edge of the hood and also behind the hood, 18" to each side of the hood and
18" above the hood. The panels shall have the grain running vertically. The top of the
panels shall be secured to the wall with screws concealed by the hood. The bottom of
the panels shall extend down to meet the top of the coved base at the floor and shall
be secured to the wall with stainless steel screws. The panels shall be secured to the
wall with adhesive and sealed at all edges. The vertical ends of the panels shall be
secured to the wall in a concealed manner with stainless steel cap strips with the
slot to accommodate the 18 gauge panel tightly. Wall panels shall be in the maximum
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 141
widths to minimize the number of vertical joints and shall be equal in width. The
vertical joints between the panels shall be off-set overlapping joints. All joints
shall be sealed and the end trim pieces shall be sealed to the wall.
Item #21 – Combination Oven/Steamer
Combination oven/steamer shall be a single compartment electric boilerless unit with

the ability to cook with pressureless steam, hot air, or combination of steam and hot
air. Oven shall measure overall 42" wide x 40" front to back x 40-1/2" high. Oven
shall accommodate (10) 18" x 26" pans on wire shelves or (20) 12" x 20"x 2-1/2" pans
on channel slides. Oven shall have stainless steel interior and exterior, five
stainless steel shelves, glass door hinged on the right, rotary door handle with steam
venting safety stop, spray hose with back flow preventer and automatic cleaning
function.
Oven shall be wired 480-60-3 phase with a 43.5 amp load. Oven shall have a two speed
fan and flash steam generation without boiler. Oven shall have standard controls with
quick connect product temperature probe, steam mode, convection mode, combination
mode, retherm mode, core temperature mode, and automatic browning function.
Oven shall be mounted on a 29" high stainless steel stationary stand. Stand shall have
a bottom stainless steel shelf, pan slides and adjustable legs.
Oven shall be equipped with a filter on the steam generator water inlet. Filter shall
be provided by the oven manufacturer. Filter shall have a single cartridge with 1/2
micron filtration and shall contain siliphos to reduce scale and corrosion. The filter
shall be mounted on the wall behind the oven as shown on plan. One replacement
cartridge shall be furnished with the filter.
Item #22 – Range
Range shall be a restaurant duty electric range with four French plates on the left,
24" wide griddle on the right and two standard ovens in the base. Range shall measure
overall 51" wide x 31-7/8" deep x 36" high to the front ledge and 47" high overall.
Range shall have stainless steel front, sides, front plate shelf and an 11" high
stainless steel back riser in lieu of the standard back riser and shelf. Left half of
range shall have four 9-1/2" diameter solid cast iron French plates with 2 KW input
and infinite heat control switches. Right half of range shall have a 24" x 24" x 1/2"
thick polished steel griddle plate with two thermostat controls. Griddle shall have a
3" wide removable grease collector on the right end. Range shall have full width pull-
out crumb trays below the cooking top. Base shall have two ovens with interior
dimensions of 20-1/4" wide x 22-1/2" deep x 14-1/2" high. Each oven shall have 5 KW
elements with top browning control and thermostats adjustable from 150o to 500o F. Each
oven shall be furnished with two oven racks. Range shall be mounted on one set of 5"
swivel casters with the front two casters equipped with brakes. The electrical
contractor shall furnish a 5' cord, plug and receptacle and mount the cord on the
range.
Item #23 – Braising Pan
Braising pan shall be an open leg, electric heated, manual tilting unit measuring
overall 38" wide x 41" deep x 39" high. The rim of the pan shall be no more than 35"
above the floor. Braising pan body shall be 12 gauge type 304 stainless steel, solid
one piece welded construction with interior dimensions of 24-1/2" wide x 28-3/4" front
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 142
to back x 9-1/2" deep. Braising pan shall have a 30 gallon capacity. Interior of pan
shall have a bead blasted finish. The cooking surface shall have a 5/8" thick steel
clad bottom with a 1/16" stainless steel plate. Braising pan shall have 12.0 K.W.
heating elements, wired 480-60-3 phase. Unit shall have an adjustable electronic
thermostat with settings from 100 degrees F. to 450 degrees F. Braising pan shall have
splash proof controls. Braising pan shall have a manual tilt mechanism with a crank
handle on the right side. Unit shall be able to be tilted up to 10 degrees without the
power being turned off. Braising pan shall have a spring assisted cover with vent,
gallon/liter markings on the interior of the pan and a 2" tangent draw-off valve with
removable strainer at the left front corner. Braising pan shall be mounted on a
stainless steel open tube base with stainless steel adjustable feet.
Mounted to the wall above the left end of the braising pan as shown on plan shall be a
pot filler/spray unit. Unit shall include mixing faucet and two hoses, one equipped
with a pot filler and the other equipped with a spray valve. The unit shall be mounted
to the wall at 48" A.F.F. The wall mounted faucet shall be chrome plated brass with
1/2" inlets on 8" centers. The faucet shall have ceramic cartridges, built-in check
valves and lever handles. Faucet shall have a short riser connected to a tee swivel
equipped with two in-line continuous pressure type backflow preventers. Each side of
the tee shall be connected to a 8'-0" long hose with stainless steel sheath, an
insulated handle, and valve. One hose shall be equipped with a self closing spray
valve and the other shall be equipped with a automatic shut-off valve and hook nozzle.
Unit shall also be equipped with two chrome plated wall hooks.
Furnished with the braising pan shall be a drain trough measuring overall 24" x 24" x
6" deep. Trough shall be constructed of 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel with a #4
finish and with all joints welded integrally and ground and polished smooth. The drain
trough shall have a 1-1/2" wide edge on all sides and shall have an integral ledge on
all four sides to support the grates and reduce splash. Drain trough shall be mounted
into the floor with the top of the edge and grate flush with the finished floor. The
bottom of the trough shall be scored and pitched to a center drain opening. Welded
integrally into the drain opening shall be a stainless steel basket assembly with
removable strainer basket and perforated cover. The bottom of the assembly shall have
a stainless steel tail piece to accommodate a 3" no hub drain connection. The drain
connection shall be coordinated with the plumbing contractor. The drain trough shall
be equipped with a stainless steel subway type removable grate in two pieces running
from front to back. The bearing bars of the grate shall run front to back with the
spacer rods to run side to side to minimize splash. The bearing bars of the grate
shall be sized to prevent deflection. The front and rear of each grate shall have a
stainless steel bar welded to the ends of the bearing bars.
Item #24 – Work Tables (2)
Each work table shall be 6'-0" long x 2'-6" wide x 2'-10" high to working level. Top
shall be constructed of 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel with a 1-1/2" square turn
down edge on all four sides. Mounted to the underside of the top shall be a tool
drawer with 20" x 20" x 5" deep stainless steel removable drawer pan, 14 gauge
stainless steel full extension drawer slides with nylon rollers with ball bearings and
stainless steel drawer face with full width integral pull on the top edge. Each table
shall have four 1-5/8" inch diameter 16 gauge stainless steel legs with stainless
steel adjustable bullet shaped feet. Each table shall have a 16 gauge stainless steel
undershelf integrally and continuously welded to the legs.
Item #25 – Work Table
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 143
Work table shall be custom fabricated in the size, shape and arrangement as indicated
on the plan, measuring approximately 9'-0" long x 4'-8" wide x 2'-10" high to working
level. Top shall be one piece, constructed from one 5'-0" wide sheet of 14 gauge
stainless steel. All four edges of the top shall be formed down 1-1/2" square. Secured
and sealed to one end of the top as shown on plan shall be a can opener. The can
opener shall be an N.S.F. approved stainless steel manual can opener with a shank
sized to open cans up to 14" tall. Can opener shall have a cast stainless steel base
and stainless steel gears and blade. The can opener shall have a pull pin for easy
disassembly for cleaning and replacing blades.
Welded integrally into the top, as shown on plan, shall be a two compartment sink. The
first compartment on the left shall measure inside approximately 20" wide x 22" front
to back x 6" deep and shall be fitted with a disposer. Disposer shall be the same as
specified for Item #17 except it shall be a 1-1/2 horsepower unit. The 6-5/8" diameter
stainless steel drain collar shall be welded integrally into the bottom of the sink.
The control panel shall be mounted to the underside of the right sink compartment with
a 14 gauge stainless steel bracket. The switch face shall be recessed 2" back from the
front face of the sink body. Disposer shall be equipped with a water inlet installed
in the rear of the sink. All accessories of the disposer that require mounting shall
be mounted by the kitchen equipment contractor. The second sink compartment on the
right shall measure inside approximately 20" wide x 22" front to back x 10" deep and
shall be fitted with a twist handle drain. A 14 gauge stainless steel tab shall be
stud bolted to the bottom of sink to support the drain handle. The drain shall be
extended to the floor sink below by the plumbing contractor. Mounted to the top behind
the two compartment sink shall be a counter top faucet in accordance with Section
18.8.1.3. All faucets throughout the project shall be by the same manufacturer.
The table top shall be mounted on an open tube base. The base next to the dishwashing
area shall be equipped with a common drawer housing fitted with a tier of three
drawers on each working side. Drawer housing shall be closed on all sides including
bottom and shall be mounted on 6" high stainless steel legs with stainless steel
adjustable feet. The opposite end of the table shall be open to the floor on both
working sides to accommodate two trash bins furnished by the government. The base
shall also be open to the floor without front rail below the two sinks. The remaining
area of the base between the sinks and the drawer housing and between the trash bin
and the drawer housing shall have a one-piece "L" shaped stainless steel undershelf.
The edge of the undershelf adjacent to the drawer housing shall be formed up 1-1/2"
square and tack welded and sealed to the drawer housing. All legs not welded to the
undershelf or to rail bracing in two directions shall have flanged feet secured and
sealed to the floor.
Mounted 18" over this table and centered in width shall be a full length elevated
shelf measuring 18" wide. Shelf shall be constructed of one piece 16 gauge stainless
steel with all edges formed down 1-1/2" square. Shelf shall be supported to the table
top at each corner with a 1-1/2" square stainless steel post tack welded and sealed to
the top. Posts shall be at the extreme corners of the shelf with the kink backs on the
turn down edges notched to accommodate the posts. The center of the shelf shall be
supported by a 1-1/2" square stainless steel post with wing brackets. The post shall
be tack welded and sealed to the center of the table top.
Mounted above the elevated shelf shall be a oval utensil rack approximately 8'-0" long
x 2'-0" wide x 7'-0" high. The rack shall consist of a top perimeter band and a single
middle band supported to the table with two standards. The standards shall be 1-5/8"
O.D. stainless steel tubing which shall extend down through the elevated shelf and
shall be integrally welded to the center of the top. Standards shall be integrally
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 144
welded to the shelf where they penetrate. The top of the standards shall be welded
closed. The top bands shall be 2" high x 1/4" thick stainless steel with circular
ends. The middle band of the rack shall be mounted 10" lower than the top band and
shall be a single 1/4" thick stainless steel band integrally welded to the two
standards. The mid point of the utensil rack shall have a stainless steel support band
welded to the top bands and middle band. The utensil rack shall be equipped with 48
stainless steel double prong hooks.
Recessed in the end of the drawer housing shall be two electrical outlet boxes.
Mounted to the underside of the top at the opposite end of the table shall be two cast
aluminum single faced pedestal type electrical outlet boxes. All four outlet boxes
shall be furnished with duplex convenience receptacles. Also recessed in the end of
the drawer housing shall be an electrical outlet box with a single 208-60-1 phase 15
amp receptacle to accommodate the plug of a future toaster. All receptacles shall have
stainless steel cover plates and shall be located as shown on Sheet #K200. Receptacles
shall have wiring and conduit extended in a concealed manner to junction boxes on the
underside of the undershelf near the electrical rough-ins in the floor.
Item #26 – Fire Suppression System
The exhaust hood, Item #20, shall be supplied with a liquid agent fire suppression
system located to the left of the exhaust hood as shown on plan. The system shall be a
pre-engineered, liquid agent, cartridge operated type with a fixed nozzle agent
distribution network. The system shall be capable of automatic detection and actuation
with local or remote manual actuation. The extinguishing agent shall be a potassium
carbonate, potassium acetate-based formulation designed for flame knockdown and
securement of grease related fires. The stainless steel liquid agent storage tank
shall be housed in a stainless steel cabinet. The system shall include all necessary
duct, plenum and surface nozzles required by code. The system shall include all
microswitches, contactors, or relays necessary to work with the fuel and power shut-
off systems. The system shall be complete with a remote manual pull station which
shall be located in the exit path near the office as shown on the utility requirement
plan. Pull station shall be recessed in the wall in accordance with Detail #7/K100.
Wet chemical piping and conduit for fusible link detection system shall be concealed
inside the exhaust and supply plenums and above the hood and ceiling as much as
possible. Any exposed piping or conduit shall be chrome plated or chrome sleeved. The
fire suppression system shall be installed in accordance with the Underwriters
Laboratories listing, NFPA-96 and 17A and shall conform to the local authorities
having jurisdiction over this fire suppression system. Upon completion of the
installation of the system, a licensed chemical distributor or dealer shall inspect
the system and shall make the final nozzle adjustments and certify in writing that
this system meets all codes. The electrical contractor shall connect to the
microswitch on the fire suppression system and shall run concealed conduit and wiring
to fuel and power shut-off devices for all appliances located under the hood. All
shut-off devices shall be furnished and installed by the plumbing and/or electrical
contractor. Fire suppression system shall otherwise be furnished and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's standard specifications.
19. OUTDOOR PLAY ENVIRONMENT
19.1 CERTIFICATIONS
Contactor shall retain an Early Childhood Outdoor Play specialist for the final
design of the outdoor play environment. The specialist shall have the following
qualifications/certifications:
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 145
• Person(s) retained should be neutral consultant(s) without financial ties to any

specific playground manufacturer/company/supplier of playground equipment and
surfacing.
• Person(s) retained should have expertise/education in the design and/or operation
of early childhood outdoor play environments.
• Person(s) retained should have expertise in all current ASTM standards and CPSC
guidelines that pertain to the development of Early Childhood Outdoor Play
Environments.
• Person(s) retained should have certification(s) in outdoor playground safety.
• Preferred certification: Early Childhood Outdoor Play Area Inspector.
• Acceptable certification: S.A.F.E. certification and/or Certified Playground
Safety Inspector.
19.3 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
19.3.1 Design
The contractor and the Early Childhood Outdoor Play specialist shall work with the
Training and Curriculum Specialist and Base CDC Director. They shall be responsible
for 100% design of the outdoor play environments to include all hardscapes and
softscapes, berms, landscaping, fixed equipment, solar shades and selection of loose
furnishings (equipment and toys). The design analysis for outdoor play environments
will be split into two sections; one for all equipment and materials associated with
construction or equipment installation and one for all loose furnishings to be
procured by the User.
The contractor shall submit for approval a comprehensive design package for all
outdoor play environments. No construction, procurement or installation of equipment
shall take place until the design is approved.
The contractor and the Early Childhood Outdoor Play specialist is responsible for the
selection, but not procurement, of any loose furnishing which will be used in the
outdoor play environments. The contractor shall provide cut sheets and/or procurement
forms for all loose furnishings that are approved as part of the design. These forms
will be provided to the User for their use in procurement of the loose furnishings.
For each outdoor play environment, the entire environment shall create a natural
playscape. Natural playscape/spaces use a blend of natural areas, water and local
plants to interest children in learning about the wonders and secrets of the natural
world. Swings and slides may still be present, but new-style playgrounds also offer
other activities. The learning environment should be extended from the activity rooms
to the outdoor play environments.
The following examples shall be incorporated into the natural playscapes. Drawing O-
101 identifies the relationships between specific play areas and the overall outdoor
play environment for each age specific group of children that shall be adhered to
during design:
• Hills – provides children with new heights and vantage points
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 146
• Water – provides opportunities for endless play and experimentation

• Plants – provide moods, seasonal interest, secret places to play, and natural
shade (select plants for their shape, colors, foliage, effects in the wind and
scents)
• Sunflowers – the perfect natural playscape plant
• Pathways – the more choices of materials and surfaces the better
• Sand – engaging for all ages
• Stages/Platforms – a flat place to get on top of to sing, dance, perform, etc.
• Artwork – places to create or display murals, sculptures and mosaics, etc.
• Sound – provide opportunities for different types of sound; musical instruments,
bells, chimes, natural elements, etc.
• Hideouts – a safe small and secure place that still offers some visibility
• Open Areas – wide-open space for running and roaming
• Seating – a place to rest
• Gardens – provides opportunities to observe the cycles of life
Reference Natural Playscapes by Rusty Keeler for additional information. In the event
of conflict, strictest standards in documents referenced herein shall prevail.
Reference drawings for required locations of the Infant, Pre-Toddler, Toddler, and
Pre-School Outdoor Play Environments.
Infant Outdoor Play Environment #1 and #2 are suggested as optional if funding is not
available. The Base shall determine and confirm the requirement for this outdoor play
environment. See Appendix A for further detail.
Locations of play areas shown are a suggested way to configure as described in each
age group narrative. Contractor is responsible for determining the final location of
play areas within each outdoor play environment.
The minimum size of each outdoor play environment shall be calculated as follows:
provide a minimum of 75 square feet per child for each child of that age group using
the outdoor play environment at one time. Figure the number of children using the
outdoor play environment at one time at 50 percent of the capacity of the CDC for each
age group. Facilities with less than 100 total children shall use the total capacity
for the number of children using the outdoor play environment at one time.
19.3.2 Construction
Upon receiving written approval of the design the contractor is responsible for
furnishing and installation of all fixed assets in the outdoor play environments to
include all hardscapes and softscapes, berms, landscaping, fixed equipment, permanent
play houses, solar shades, perimeter fencing and activity area buffers. The
installer(s) shall be certified by the National Playground Contractors and Installers
Association, certified by S.A.F.E. or have the Certified Playground Safety Inspection
credentials.
Subgrade preparation for the placement of loose matting shall be considered

construction; however, the loose matting shall be considered as equipment and procured
by the User. Poured in place matting or fall protection shall be considered part of
construction. Construction of sand play areas shall include the furnishing of sand.
19.4 INFANT
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 147
19.4.1 Concepts
The creation of this area is based on the following physical, emotional, social, and
intellectual developmental concepts:
• Physical: visual tracking, reaching, kicking, stretching, grasping, sitting,

rolling, crawling and scooting.
• Emotional: love, joy, anger, temperament, sadness, curiosity, interest in
environment and personality.
• Social: Bonding, mimicking, connecting to caregiver, reciprocity of affection,
separation anxiety, and solitary play.
• Intellectual: Listening, watching what happens.
19.4.2 Activity Areas
The following four (4) activity areas shall be provided. Only commercial equipment
developmentally appropriate for children ages six (6) months to 12 months shall be
located in the infant outdoor play environment. Specific requirements for equipment
and surface shall be met. Contractor shall use the following percentages of total
outdoor play environment square footage as guide for individual play area square
footages (percentage includes surrounding grassed areas for circulation):
• Loose Parts Area – 35%

• Gross Motor Area – 30%
• Sensory Area – 20%
• Garden/Nature Area - 15%
19.4.2.1 Loose Parts Area
General Purpose
A variety of loose parts materials shall be provided to encourage pincher grasping,

eye-hand coordination, body awareness, ownership, self-regulation, functional play,
purposeful communication, visual discrimination, and labeling.
Equipment Suggested (Funding Source)

• Buffers consisting of play panels (Contractor provided)
Requirements
• Loose part materials must conform to CPSC and pass Air Force choke test guidelines
and regulations.
• A ratio of three (3) loose part materials per one (1) child should be present in a
designated area at one time in order to foster exploration, movement, and
manipulation.
• Buffers shall be used to discourage free flow of loose parts to other activity
areas (portable storage).
Equipment Exclusions
• Composite playground equipment structures
Surface Characteristics Required

• Area surface shall be solid and soft; concrete with rubber inlay or concrete with
portable surface mat appropriate for outdoor and infant use.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 148
19.4.2.2 Gross Motor Area
General Purpose
An area for the location of low lying equipment structures to encourage gross motor
skills shall be designated. This area may also have play panels to encourage reaching,
stretching and standing activities as well as act as a buffer between the infant and
pre-toddler outdoor play environments.

• Portable mats appropriate for outdoor and infant use (FF&E)
• Play Panels (Contractor provided)
Requirements
• It shall be located further away from the facility to minimize distraction of the
indoor classrooms.
• Any play equipment in the area must be in conformance with ASTM F-2373.
• Play panels maximum height shall not exceed 32 inches above the ground.
• Equipment pieces shall be stable and firmly secured in place.
• Equipment pieces shall be durable and easily cleaned.
• Large composite structures or complex infant mazes.

• Area surface shall be solid and soft; concrete with rubber inlay or concrete with
portable surface mat appropriate for outdoor and infant use.
• If equipment is placed on surface with critical fall height of 32 inches, surface
must conform to ASTM 1292 for impact attenuation.
19.4.2.3 Sensory Area
General Purpose
An area for sensory activities shall be designated. This area shall include items for
infants to touch, feel, listen and see. This may include incorporating items along
the barrier between the infant and pre-toddler outdoor play environments, and if
against a facility, include the painting of a mural or scene appropriate to age group.

• Sensory boxes (FF&E)
• Sensory panels (Contractor provided)
Requirements
• Equipment shall be free of any pinch, crush, or sheering mechanisms.
• Equipment shall be free of any entrapment areas.
• Panels that do not provide for sensory activities.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 149
• Area should be primarily level.

• Surface shall be a variety of textures; grass, dirt, concrete, rubber, and/or
wood.
19.4.2.4 Garden/Nature Area
General Purpose
There shall be a designated area for interaction with the natural environment. This
area shall be in addition to the natural playscape model of the entire outdoor play
environment.
Material Suggested (Funding Source)

• Native, non-poisonous plants, bushes and trees (Contractor provided)
Requirements
• This area should be located at one end of the outdoor play environment to act as a
buffer/screen at its perimeter; see Outdoor Play Environment plan.
• If water experience desired within this activity area, it shall be located near
facility to facilitate use of water source.
Material Exclusions
• Poisonous plants
• Hard/sharp planting bed borders

• Provide both level and sloped berm grass surfaces. Berm slope shall not exceed
five (5) percent.
• Concrete and asphalt are not permitted.
19.5 PRE-TODDLER
19.5.1 Concepts
The creation of the outdoor play environment is based on the following physical,
emotional, social, and intellectual developmental concepts:
• Physical: Pinching, balancing, standing, eye-hand coordination, body awareness,

walking, and eye-foot coordination.
• Emotional: Individualization from the environment, mental representation of
emotions, self-identity, ownership, intent, and self-regulation.
• Social: Pretend play, individuation from caregiver, functional play, sense of
trust, and purposeful communication.
• Intellectual: Object permanence, visual discrimination, labeling, generalizing,
and cause and effect.
The following 10 activity areas shall be provided. Only equipment and materials
developmentally appropriate for children ages 12 months to 24 months shall be located
in the pre-toddler outdoor play environment. Specific requirements for equipment and
surface shall be met. Total square footage of the pre-toddler outdoor play
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 150
environment shall be a minimum of 75 square feet per child, with 50% of the total
number of pre-toddlers occupying the environment. Contractor shall use the following
percentages of total outdoor play environment square footage as guide for individual
play area square footages (percentage includes surrounding grassed areas for
circulation):
• Push-Pull/Loose Parts Area - 25%

• Sensory Area - 10 %
• Garden/Nature Area - 10 %
• Water Play Area - 10 %
• Sand Play Area - 10 %
• Building Blocks Area - 5 %
• Equipment Area - 15 %
• Drama/Imagination Area - 5%
• Music Area - 5%
• Art Panels Area - 5 %
19.5.2.1 Push-Pull/Loose Parts Area
General Purpose
A variety of loose parts materials shall be provided to encourage pincher grasping,

eye-hand coordination, body awareness, ownership, self-regulation, functional play,
purposeful communication, visual discrimination, and labeling.

• Toys (FF&E)
• Blocks(FF&E)
• Wheeled Toys (FF&E)
Requirements
and regulations.
• A ratio of three (3) loose part materials per one (1) child should be present in a
designated area at one time in order to foster exploration, movement, and
manipulation.
• Buffers consisting of portable storage bins or play panels shall be used to
discourage free flow of loose parts to other activity areas.
• Large composite equipment structures with multiple play events

• Area surface shall be solid and soft; concrete with rubber inlay.
• Area surface shall conform to ASTM F1292 impact attenuation protocol for a
critical fall height of three (3) feet.
General Purpose
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 151
pre-toddlers to touch, feel, listen and see. This may include incorporating items
along the barrier between the pre-toddler and infant outdoor play environments.

• Sensory boxes, moveable (FF&E)
• Sensory boxes, permanent (Contractor provided)
• Sensory panels (Contractor provided)
Requirements
• Panels that do not provide for sensory activities.

• Area should be primarily level.
wood.
General Purpose
There shall be a designated area for interaction with the natural environment. This
area shall be in addition to the natural playscape model of the entire outdoor play
environment.

• Native, non-poisonous plants, bushes and trees (Contractor provided)
• Planting beds with soft borders (Contractor provided)
Requirements
• This area shall be located at one end of the outdoor play environment to act as a
buffer/screen at its perimeter as shown on suggested outdoor play environment
plan; see Outdoor Play Environment plan.
Material Exclusions

• Provide both level and slightly sloped bermed grass surfaces a maximum of five (5)
percent.
19.5.2.4 Water Play
General Purpose
An area designated for children to interact and manipulate water. Used for sensory
stimulation and investigation of cause and effect.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 152
• Portable water tables and chutes (FF&E)

• Pails, containers, and water toys (FF&E)
Equipment Requirements
• Water play area shall be placed near the nature area as shown on the drawings; see
Outdoor Play Environment plan.
• A portable water system may be employed, if no outside water connection is
available.
• Area shall have good drainage and grass to avoid standing water.
• None

• Fluctuations in elevation should not allow ponding of water.
• Optional: surface can be grass.
19.5.2.5 Sand Play
General Purpose
An area designated for children to interact and manipulate loose fill materials used
for digging, dumping and filling, investigation of cause and effect, and manipulation
of loose parts.

• Permanent Sandbox(es) (Contractor provided)
• Portable Sandbox(es)(FF&E)
• Sand (Contractor provided)
• Sand toys (FF&E)
Requirements
• Permanent sandbox(es) shall have an easily removable cover to protect the sand
when not in use.
• Sandbox(es) shall have a shade cover.
• Sand activity area shall not be adjacent to rubber, poured in place or solid
surface area to prevent possible slip/sliding problems.
• Sand shall meet the requirements of ASTM F355, ASTM F1292 and CSA Z614.
• Non-sand equipment

• Area shall be level.
• Shall be at least 12 feet away from any permanent synthetic surface such as rubber
mats/tiles or poured-in-place.
19.5.2.6 Building Blocks
General Purpose
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 153
An area designated where children can stack, manipulate, or build using plastic blocks
of various sizes.

• Blocks (FF&E)
Requirements
• Blocks of varying sizes and shapes. No square block should exceed a one (1) foot
by one (1) foot dimension. No round block should exceed a nine (9) inch diameter.
• Blocks shall pass all choke tests.
• Wooden blocks or blocks with sharp edges and corners.
Surface Characteristics Required (Contractor provided)

19.5.2.7 Equipment Area
General Purpose
Equipment shall be designed to encourage movement including: balancing, standing,

cruising, walking, eye-foot coordination, self-regulation, individualization from
caregiver, functional play, sense of trust, communication, and cause and effect.

• Crawl tubes (Contractor provided)
• Mazes (Contractor provided)
• Step bridges (Contractor provided)
• Step decks (Contractor provided)
Requirements
• Any play equipment in the area must be in conformance with ASTM F-2373.
• Equipment shall be less than 32 inches above the ground. Equipment pieces shall
be stable and firmly secured in place.
• Equipment area shall be located further away from the facility to minimize
distraction of the indoor classrooms.
• Commercial equipment comprised of portable slides, composite structures and
climbers.
• Equipment higher than 32 inches above the ground.

• Surfaces in the play equipment area with a playing surface over one (1) foot (12
inches) in height shall be in compliance with ASTM F-1292 for impact attenuation.
19.5.2.8 Drama/Imagination
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 154
General Purpose
There shall be a designated area for dramatic and imaginative play.

• Play houses or panel store fronts (FF&E)
Requirements
• Play houses shall have non-climbable surfaces and be low to the ground.
• This area can act as a buffer between the loose parts area and the equipment area;
see Outdoor Play Environment plan.
• Staff shall be able to easily see the movement of children in and out of
equipment.

• Fluctuations in elevations shall not permit ponding of water or prohibit movement
in and out of play houses.
• Impact attenuation surface is not required as equipment shall be non-climbable.
• Surface shall be grass.
19.5.2.9 Music Area
General Purpose
There shall be a designated area for musical activities/movement to occur to promote

body awareness, spatial awareness, and rhythmic movement.

• Permanent musical instruments (Contractor provided)
• Portable musical instruments (FF&E)
Requirements
• This activity area should have access to a portable sound system if possible.
Portable storage bins and musical panels can act as a buffer for this area.

• Area shall be primarily level.
• Fluctuations in elevations that shall not allow ponding of water.
• Surface shall be grass except in areas where stable surface is required to mount
equipment.
19.5.2.10 Art Area
General Purpose
There shall be an area where outside art activities can take place that promote
working with various materials, textures, and non-toxic paints.

• Art Easels (FF&E)
• Two (2) child-size work tables (FF&E)
• Art supplies (FF&E)
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 155
Requirements
• Any easels need to be placed no higher than 30 inches off the ground.
• Tables shall be durable and washable intended for outdoor use.

19.6 TODDLER
19.6.1 Concepts
• Physical Concepts: Moving, large motor activities, running, filling and dumping,
singing, throwing, and small motor activities.
• Emotional Concepts: Ego, ownership, autonomy, aggression, assertiveness, testing
limits, fantasy vs. reality, uniqueness, rationalized emotions, and flexibility.
• Social Concepts: Constructive play, receptive language, parallel play, signing
(ASL), and expressive language.
• Intellectual Concepts: Matching, patterning, using space relationships,
pretending, classifying, and performing tasks in a sequence.
The following nine (9) activity areas shall be provided. Only equipment and materials
developmentally appropriate for children ages two (2) to three (3) years of age shall
be located in the toddler outdoor play environment. Specific requirements for
equipment and surface shall be met. Activity areas shall be connected by a handicap
accessible pathway. Contractor shall use the following percentages of total outdoor
play environment square footage as guide for individual play area square footages
(percentage includes surrounding grassed areas for circulation):
• Tricycle Path Area – 20%

• Push-Pull/Loose Parts Area – 20%
• Sensory Area – 10%
• Water Play Area - 5%
• Sand Play Area - 5%
• Equipment Area – 20%
• Art/Music Area - 5%
19.6.2.1 Tricycle Path
General Purpose
A variety of wheeled equipment shall be provided to encourage development of gross

motor activities, autonomy, and using space relationships.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 156
Equipment Required (Funding Source)

• Permanent tricycle storage (Contractor provided)

• Tricycles (FF&E)
• Cozy coupes (FF&E)
• Signs, storefronts, crosswalks (FF&E)
• Helmets (FF&E)
Requirements
• Wheeled toys/tricycles shall not have sharp points/edges.
• Tricycle path shall not be a means of travel or require to be crossed to get to
another activity area.
• Tricycle path shall not be designed as an oval or circle.
• Tricycle storage shall be outside of the path.
• Maximum width of path shall be five (5) feet. Minimum width of path shall be the
distance between tricycle handlebars.

• Surface of tricycle path shall provide a variety of textures; rumble strips, and
shapes; straight, curved.
• Tricycle path surface shall be solid; concrete.
• Concrete shall be flush to the ground.
• Grass is required between tricycle pathways.
19.6.2.2 Loose Parts Area
General Purpose
A variety of loose parts materials shall be provided to encourage development of small

motor activities, filling and dumping, testing limits, constructive play, receptive
language, expressive language, matching, patterning, classifying, and performing tasks
in a sequence.
Requirements
and regulations.
• Buffers consisting of portable storage bins, play panels, and/or plants shall be
used to discourage free flow of loose parts to other activity areas.
• Permanent structures

• A solid surface shall be provided; concrete with rubber inlay.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 157
General Purpose
toddlers to experience matching, patterning, classifying, signing (ASL) and expressive
language. This may include incorporating items along the barrier between the toddler
and infant outdoor play environments.

• Panels and sensory boxes that promote sensory experiences (Contractor provided)
Requirements
• Composite pieces.

• Slight elevations permissible.
wood.
General Purpose
There shall be an area designated for interaction with the natural environment. Area
may have a designated pathway that is up/down and bordered by plants. This area shall
be in addition to the natural playscape model of the entire outdoor play environment.

• Designated planting beds (Contractor provided)
Requirements
• If raised plant beds/containers are used, they should be made of recycled
materials and not contain sharp edges.
Material Exclusions

percent.
• Fluctuations in elevations shall not permit ponding of water.
19.6.2.5 Water Play
General Purpose
An area designated for children to interact and manipulate water. Used for sensory
stimulation and investigation of cause and effect.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 158
Equipment Suggested (FF&E)

• Portable water tables and chutes (FF&E)
• Pails, containers, and water toys (FF&E)
Requirements
• Water play area shall be placed near the nature area; see Outdoor Play Environment
plan.
• Area shall have good drainage and grass to promote no standing water.

• Fluctuations in elevations shall not permit ponding of water.
• Water activity area shall not be adjacent to rubber, poured in place or solid
19.6.2.6 Sand Play
General Purpose
There shall be an area designated for manipulating of sand or similar material.

• Permanent sandbox (Contractor provided)
• Portable sand tables (FF&E)
• Sand (FF&E)
Requirements
when not in use.
• Permanent sandbox(es) shall have a shade cover.
• Non-sand equipment

• Shall be at least 12 feet away from any permanent synthetic surface such as rubber
mats/tiles or poured-in-place.
General Purpose
Play equipment installed in the toddler outdoor play environment should encourage a
variety of experiences; space relationships, gross and fine motor skills, repetition,
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 159
and development of leg strength.

• Straight slides (Contractor provided)
• Double slides (Contractor provided)
• Spring loaded rockers (Contractor provided)
• Seesaws (Contractor provided)
• Stand alone gross motor play (Contractor provided)
• Balance beams (Contractor provided)
• Stepping pods (Contractor provided)
Requirements
• Equipment in this activity area shall be in conformance with ASTM F- 1487 and the
Consumer Product Safety Guidelines for Public Playground Equipment.
• The equipment area shall be free of loose parts and extraneous toys to avoid
tripping and other hazards.
• Stand alone or small play components shall contain not more than four (4) gross
motor play events, excluding play panels.
• Straight slides shall be no higher than four (4) feet.
• Balance beams, stepping pods, or other standing balance equipment shall be no more
than six (6) inches off the ground.
• Spring loaded rockers and seesaws shall conform to requirements of the Handbook
for Playground Safety.
• Large commercial composite structures containing more than two slides and overhead
climbers.
• Horizontal ladders
• Arch climbers
• Flexible climbers
• Parallel bars
• Dome climbers
• Sliding poles
• Spiral slides
• Merry-go-rounds
• Swings
• Spiral Slides

• Surface in the play equipment area with a playing surface over one (1) foot (12
inches) in height shall be in compliance with ASTM F-1292 for impact attenuation
• Pea gravel and other loose fill materials are not permitted.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 160
• Proper Use zones under and around equipment shall be maintained with Surface
materials in conformance with ASTM 1292.
General Purpose
There shall be an area designated for dramatic and imaginative play.

• Non-climbable permanent play houses (FF&E)
• Panel storefronts (FF&E)
• Climbable equipment
• Temporary plastic equipment

19.6.2.9 Art/Music Area
General Purpose
There shall be an area designated for art and music.

• Child-size work tables (FF&E)
• Permanent musical instruments (Contractor provided)
Requirements
• Area shall be located near the drama/imaginative play activity area.
• As available, it shall be located near the facility to give access to a sound
system.
• Equipment not related to fostering art or musical experiences.

equipment.
19.7 PRE-SCHOOL
19.7.1 Concepts
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 161
• Physical Concepts: Stacking with stability, rhythm, stringing, two-foot stairs,

ascending stairs, jumping, pumping on a swing, galloping, descending stairs,
hopping, skipping, and dancing.
• Emotional Concepts: Accomplishment, emotional memory, self-esteem, embarrassment,
appreciation, empathy, sympathy, self-help, impulse control, confidence, emotional
stability and competiveness.
• Social Concepts: Observing, associate play, toleration, manners, fairness,
dramatic play, sharing, taking turns, explaining, conflict resolution,
cooperation, collaboration, perspective taking, rules.
• Intellectual Concepts: Finding likenesses, investigating, creating (fluency),
creating (flexibility), measuring, creating using manipulatives, evaluating
relationships, inductive reasoning, predicting, hypothesizing, part/whole
relationships, inquiry/questioning, finding differences, recording data,
evaluating, inferring, deductive reasoning, creating using media, and writing.
19.7.2 Activity Areas:
The following 10 activity areas shall be provided. Only equipment and materials
developmentally appropriate for children ages three (3) to five (5) years of age shall
be located in the pre-school outdoor play environment. Specific requirements for
equipment and surface shall be met. Total square footage of the pre-school outdoor
play environment shall be a minimum of 75 square feet per child, with 50% of the total
number of pre-schoolers occupying the environment. Activity areas shall be connected
by a handicap accessible pathway. Contractor shall use the following percentages of
total outdoor play environment square footage as guide for individual play area square
footages (percentage includes surrounding grassed areas for circulation):
• Tricycle Path - 20%

• Science Work Area - 5%
• Social Classroom Area - 5%
• Building/Construction Area - 15%
• Sand Play Area - 5%
• Equipment Area - 25%
• Art/Music Area -5%
• Game Area - 10%
19.7.2.1 Tricycle Path
General Purpose
A variety of wheeled equipment shall be provided to encourage development of gross

motor activities, accomplishment, impulse control, confidence, sharing and taking
turns.
Equipment Required (Funding Source)

• Permanent Tricycle storage (Contractor provided)
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 162
• Tricycles (FF&E)
• Scooters (FF&E)
• Signs, storefronts, crosswalks (FF&E)
• Helmets (FF&E)
Requirements
• Wheeled toys/tricycles shall not have sharp points/edges.
• Tricycle path shall not be a means of travel or require to be crossed to get to
another activity area.
• Tricycle storage shall be outside of the path.
• Maximum width of path shall be five (5) feet.
• Non-wheeled toys and equipment

• Surface of tricycle path shall provide a variety of textures; rumble strips, and
shapes; straight, curved.
• Tricycle path surface shall be solid; concrete.
• Grass is required between tricycle pathways.
19.7.2.2 Science Work Area
General Purpose
This area should be designed to promote observation, investigating, measuring,

evaluating relationships, inductive reasoning, predicting, hypothesizing,
inquiry/questioning, finding differences, inferring, and deductive reasoning.

• Storage shelves/cubbies (FF&E)
• Portable Sorting tables (FF&E)
Requirements
• This activity area shall be located adjacent to the science/nature activity area.
• Breakable containers (no glass).
• Materials with loose strings.

• Level area with good drainage.
19.7.2.3 Social Classroom Area
General Purpose
This activity area shall be located adjacent to the science activity area.

• Portable tables to seat a classroom of children at a time (FF&E)
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 163
• Tables not designed for three (3) to five (5) years of age.

• Level surface with good drainage.
• Optional: surface may be concrete.
19.7.2.4 Building /Construction Area
General Purpose
There shall be a designated area for building, manipulation, and creating with a
variety of loose materials. The area should encourage development of small motor
activities, finding likenesses, investigation, measuring, evaluating relationships,
inductive reasoning, predicting, finding differences, recording data and inferring.

• Blocks, wood, chutes (FF&E)
• Work benches as a buffer (FF&E)
Requirements
• Loose part materials shall be large enough to build items but small enough to be
easily handled.
and regulations.
• Loose toys that are not stackable or cannot be used in construction; dump trucks,
wheeled toys.

General Purpose
Children should be able to collect, dig, and explore in the area. This area shall be
in addition to the natural playscape model of the entire outdoor play environment.

• Designated planting beds (Contractor provided)
• Hand trowels, pots, etc. (FF&E)
Requirements
• This activity area shall be easily accessible to the science/nature and social
classroom activity areas.
• If raised plant beds/containers are used, they should be made of recycled
materials and not contain sharp edges.
Material Exclusions
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 164
• Thorny vegetation.
• Poisonous vegetation.
• Vegetation with berries.
• Hard, sharp planting bed borders.

percent.
19.7.2.6 Sand Play
General Purpose
There shall be an area designated for manipulation of sand or similar material.

• Permanent sandbox (Contractor provided)
• Portable sand tables (FF&E)
• Sand (FF&E)
Requirements
when not in use.
• Permanent sandbox(es) shall have a shade cover.
• Non-sand equipment.

• Area should be at least 12 feet away from any permanent synthetic surface such as
rubber mats/tiles or poured-in-place.
• Optional: surface may be grass.
General Purpose
There shall be an area where permanent playground equipment shall be placed.

Equipment shall provide a variety of gross motor and physical developmental skills
including climbing, sliding, development of arm strength, balance, and coordination,
as well as aerobic exercise.

• Stand alone components or composites (Contractor provided)
• Balance beams (Contractor provided)
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 165
• Stepping pods (Contractor provided)

• Spring loaded rockers (Contractor provided)
• Seesaws (Contractor provided)
• Dual slides (Contractor provided)
• Opposition climbing structures (Contractor provided)
• Elevated crawl tubes (Contractor provided)
Requirements
• Equipment in this activity area shall be in conformance with ASTM F- 1487 and the
Consumer Product Safety Guidelines for Public Playground Equipment.
• The equipment area shall be free of loose parts and extraneous toys to avoid
tripping and other hazards.
• Balance beams, stepping pods, or other standing balance equipment shall be no more
than 12 inches off the ground.
• Belted/Bucket Swings shall only be installed if pre-schooler can use without
assistance of a caregiver. If present, swings shall be on the edge of this
activity area.
• A ratio of two (2) ways up to one (1) way down should be found on all elevated
structures.
• Spring loaded rockers shall conform to requirements of the Handbook for Playground
Safety.
• Commercial equipment comprised only of slides.
• Horizontal ladders (not to be used by three year olds, appropriate for 4-5 year
olds.
• Arch climbers (as the sole means of access to equipment).
• Flexible climbers (as the sole means of access to equipment).
• Parallel bars
• Dome climbers
• Sliding poles
• Merry-go-rounds
• Spiral Slides (more than 360 degrees)
• Swings

• Surface in the play equipment area with a playing surface over one (1) foot (12
inches) in height shall be in compliance with ASTM F-1292 for impact attenuation.
• Pea gravel and other loose fill materials are not permitted.
• Proper use zones under and around equipment shall be maintained with surface
materials in conformance with ASTM 1292.
• Poured-in-place surfacing in the equipment use zone shall be a different color and
than bordering poured-in-place surfacing.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 166
General Purpose
There shall be an area designated for dramatic and imaginative play.

• Non-climbable play houses (FF&E)
• Panel storefronts (FF&E)
Requirements
• Accessible pathway not required through this activity area.
• Climbable equipment

19.7.2.9 Art/Music Area
General Purpose
There shall be an area designated for art and music.

• Permanent musical pieces (Contractor provided)
• Sound system (FF&E)
Requirements
• Areas shall be located near the drama/imaginative play activity area.
• As available, it shall be located near the facility to give access to a sound
system.
• Non-musical or art equipment pieces

equipment.
19.7.2.10 Game Area
General Purpose
There shall be a designated area for active games and movement activities that promote
running and throwing.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 167

• Game markings (FF&E)
Requirements
• This area shall be located between active and passive activities, and solid and
grass surfaces.
• Game markings shall be placed on solid surface area.
• Permanent structures
• Playground equipment

• The ground in the area shall be level without holes.
• Area shall be divided between solid surface; concrete and grass.
19.8 GENERAL LAYOUT AND STANDARDS
19.8.1 Barriers: The designated infant outdoor play environment area shall be
separated from the pre-toddler and toddler outdoor play environments by a barrier
comprised of panels and natural features. Construction shall include these barriers.
Barriers shall be designed such that children are not able to move from one outdoor
play environment to another.
19.8.1.1. Play panels used as a barrier that separate infant outdoor play
environments or buffers that separate activity areas shall be flush to the ground,
less than 3.5 inches above the ground, or greater than nine (9) inches above the
ground. The panels shall not exceed a height of 32 inches. Panels should encourage a
variety of experiences including individualization from environment, self-identity,
intent, self regulation, purposeful communication, visual discrimination, labeling,
and cause and effect.
19.8.1.2 Fencing shall not be used as a barrier between outdoor play environments;
infant and pre-toddler, and infant and toddler.
19.8.2 Fencing at the exterior of the outdoor play environments shall be at a minimum
height of six (6) feet. Reference 5.3 Civil Design Requirements for additional
fencing requirements. If a fence is provided between the toddler and preschool
outdoor play environments it shall be 4 ft. high with a pedestrian gate. See Appendix
A for further detail for any additional requirements.
19.8.3 Shade: Shade shall be provided by natural and artificial means. Natural means
shall include trees no less than six (6) feet tall and no less than six (6) inches in
diameter. Artificial means shall include, but not be limited to, shade structures
(gazebos, umbrellas, canvas covers, sails, etc.) and the CDC facility. The minimum
area of shall be whichever is greater; 10% of outdoor play environment surface area or
15 square feet per maximum number of children using the outdoor play environment.
During the hours of 9:00 a.m. to 12:00 p.m. and 2:00 p.m. to 5:00 p.m., a minimum of
50% of the outdoor play environment surface area shall be exposed to direct sunlight.
Per Base specific needs or orientation of CDC facility, additional requirements may
need to be met; see Appendix A for further detail.
Shade structure shall not be of type that requires professional removal and
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 168
installation.
19.8.4 Sidewalks shall be provided outside the door of each activity room.
Construction methods shall be used to ensure that sidewalk does not settle creating a
vertical drop from door threshold. Per Base specific environmental conditions,
additional requirements may need to be met; see Appendix A for further detail.
19.8.5 Surfacing: Loose fill surfacing shall not be used in any activity area.
Solid soft surface includes rubber tiles and shock-absorbing outdoor mats. Consult
with surface manufacturers to determine appropriate subgrade preparation. To avoid
absorption of heat, surface shall not be a dark color. Surface shall not be white.
Color of surface shall be light and neutral colors to avoid burns, and shall be
consistent with Base architectural standards; see Appendix A for further detail.
19.8.6 All areas shall be level, unless otherwise specified, and allow for proper
drainage.
19.8.7 Softscape areas within the outdoor play environment shall contain grass, non-
poisonous and inedible plant materials as appropriate. All grass within the activity
area shall be solid sodded.
Contractor shall consult with base turf manager to determine the most suitable grass
for the application. Artificial turf shall not be permitted.
19.8.8 The outdoor play environment shall be free of any electrical or mechanical
units, including but not limited to air conditioners, transformer boxes, heating, and
power lines.
19.8.9 There shall be no drainage pipes, gutters, cleanouts, or other utility surface
features within the outdoor play environment.
19.8.10 The outdoor play environment shall be free of blind spots and hidden crawl
spaces as a result of facility and equipment placement. Place convex mirrors as shown
on Outdoor Play Environment plan and where blind spots are determined to be
unavoidable.
19.8.11 All equipment manufacturers shall provide certifications that products meet
ASTM F1487 and/or F2373 standard. All surfacing materials under and around playground
equipment must meet ASTM F1292.
19.8.12 Contractor shall demonstrate how specific pieces of equipment meet the
physical, emotional, social, and/or intellectual needs of the specific age group as
outlined in 19.4.2, 19.5.2, 19.6.2 and 19.7.2 of this document.
19.8.13 Each outdoor play environment shall have access to outdoor outlets. Outlets
shall be inaccessible to children. See electrical section for standards regarding
outlets. Outlets shall be listed tamper-resistant receptacles and be located at a
minimum height of 54-inches from the center of the receptacle above the finished
floor.
19.8.14 Each outdoor play environment shall be equipped with mass notification
speakers. Speakers shall be inaccessible to children. See electronics section for
standards regarding mass notification speakers.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 169
19.8.15 Each outdoor play environment shall have access to an outdoor intercom
system. One (1) intercom shall be located at a central point along the face of each
wing in conjunction with the first aid cabinet. Intercom shall be inaccessible to
children. See electronics section for standards regarding the intercom system.
19.8.16 Each outdoor play environment shall have access to a permanent lockable
weatherproof first aid cabinet. One (1) cabinet shall be located at a central point
along the face of each wing in conjunction with the intercom system. Cabinet shall be
inaccessible to children.
19.8.17 Wall Hydrant/Hose Connection: Each outdoor play environment shall have a
minimum of two (2) wall hydrant per face of each wing. See mechanical section for
standards regarding wall hydrants.
19.8.18 Wall Hydrants shall be non-freeze and concealed. They shall serve the
garden, nature, water and other play areas as determined by the Base. Final locations
shall be coordinated with location of play areas to ensure that no hose runs across
the outdoor play environment to avoid creating a tripping hazard.
19.8.19 Each outdoor play environment shall have access to an outdoor trash
receptacle. Receptacle shall be small, anchored and a non-licensed product. See
architectural section for standards regarding trash receptacles.
20. ROOM DATA SHEETS
Room Data Sheets immediately follow.
SECTION 01 10 10
8/4/2009
Page 170
Design-Build RFP, Child Development Center (CDC)
ROOM DATA SHEETS

LEGEND OF ABBREVIATIONS
GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS:
Admin. Administration
No. Number
LF Linear Foot
SF Square Foot
Contractor Furnished, Contractor
CFCI
Installed
Government Furnished,
GFGI
Government Installed
Dwg. Drawing
Qty. Quantity
Arch. Architecture/Architectural
Mech. Mechanical
Elec. Electrical
ARCHITECTURAL ABBREVIATIONS:
Acoust. Acoustical
ACT-1 Acoustical Ceiling Tile
ACT-2 Humiguard Acoustical Tile
CONC-S Concrete – Sealed
CPT Carpet
CR Chair Rail
CWT Ceramic Wall Tile
CWB Ceramic Wall Base
EP Epoxy Floor System
EX-P Exposed - Painted
FW-AWP Fabric Wrapped Acoustical Panel
GYP Gypsum Board
GYP-EP Gypsum Board – Epoxy Paint
GYP-P Gypsum Board - Painted
GYP-WR Gypsum Board – Water Resistant
HM Hollow Metal
HW Hardware
IRW Impact Resistant Wainscot
IWB Integral Wall Base
P Indicates paint system
PT Porcelain Tile
RF Resilient Flooring
VCT Vinyl Composition Tile
WC Wall Covering
WD Wood
WO Walk-off Mat
WR Water Resistant
ROOM NUMBER: 101

ROOM NAME: ENTRY
GENERAL INFO. MECHANICAL

Functional Area Building Circulation Temperature (Winter / Summer): Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Vestibule Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Secure Requirements: Humidity Tolerance: Within Range
Sound Attenuation: Final Filtration Requirement: MERV 8
No. Rooms 1 Minimum Air Changes: None
Occupants per Room - Minimum Outside Air: Per UFC 4-740-14
Exhaust Air Requirement: None
ARCH. FINISHES: Room Pressurization: Positive
Floor Material: Recessed Walk-off Internal Loads See Comment # 1
Mat/Porcelain Tile
Base Material: Resilient Wall Base Room Criteria: 35 RC (N)
Wall Finish: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 9.4.1.
Wall Construction: Gypsum board/Glass
Ceiling/ Height: Gypsum board
DOORS (sizes on dwgs): PLUMBING

Personnel Doors: Aluminum (exterior) Fixture (Qty / Type): None
Door Frames: Aluminum Drain (Qty / Type) None
Door Hardware: HW- 11
Automatic Sliding Doors: Aluminum (interior) FIRE PROTECTION
Suppression Type: Wet Pipe
ARCH. SPECIALTIES Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
Plastic Lam Arch. Millwork (LF) - MNS Yes
Marker boards: - Pull stations Yes
Tack boards: - Smoke detection Yes
Recessed Walk-off Mat 4’-6”x10’ Field Verify Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
MNS Yes
Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
FF&E ITEMS: Knox Box If required by the Base
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No
SIGNAGE: Tamper Resistant Outlets: No
Tactile exit signs Yes
Data: Yes
Phone: No
Intercom: Yes
Multi-level Switching: Yes

Lighting Level: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 14.9.1
Emergency Lighting Yes
EQUIPMENT (CFCI)
SECURITY
Camera Coverage Yes
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Flat Panel Displays:
Comments:
1. Use plug load of 0.22 W/sqft and preliminary lighting load of 1 W/sqft; see this sheet for # of occupants and
equipment.
2. Provide remote fire alarm annunciator panel.
3. Provide Knox Box on exterior of building near main entrance door.
ROOM NUMBER: 102

ROOM NAME: LOBBY

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Lobby Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Sound Attenuation: STC 45 Final Filtration Requirement: MERV 8
Occupants per Room 10 Minimum Outside Air: Per UFC 4-740-14
Exhaust Air Requirement: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.2.
Floor Material: Refer to Section 01 10 Internal Loads See Comment # 2
10 para 9.4.1
Base Material: Porcelain Tile Base Room Criteria: 35 RC (N)
10 para 9.4.1
Wall Construction: Gypsum board PLUMBING
Ceiling/ Height: ACT / Gyp./ Varies Fixture (Qty / Type): None
Drain (Qty / Type) None
DOORS (sizes on dwgs):
Personnel Doors: FIRE PROTECTION
Door Frames: Suppression Type: Wet Pipe
Door Hardware: Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
MNS Yes
ARCH. SPECIALTIES Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Solid Surface Arch. Millwork Yes, See Comment 3 Pull Stations Yes
(LF)
Marker boards: Smoke detection Yes
Tack boards: Yes, See Comment 3 Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
Signage: Yes
Tactile exit signs yes ELECTRICAL
Wall & Corner Guards: Yes GFCI Outlets: No
Display Rail System: Yes, See Comment 3 Tamper Resistant Outlets: Yes
Data: For reception

FF&E ITEMS: Phone: For reception
Intercom: Yes

10 para. 14.9.1
EQUIPMENT (CFCI) CO Detection If natural gas is used
CCTV Monitors: Refer to Section 01 10 SECURITY
10 para 9.4.1
Camera Coverage Yes
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Comments:
1. Provide Pendant Lighting above Reception Desk
equipment.
3. Determined during Final design.
ROOM NUMBER: 103

ROOM NAME: RESOURCE ROOM

Functional Area General Admin Temperature (Winter / Summer): Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Library/Waiting Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
Floor Material: Carpet Tile Internal Loads See Comment # 2
Base Material: Resilient Base Room Criteria: 35 RC (N)
Wall Finish: Paint/Wall covering
Wall Construction: Gypsum board
Ceiling/ Height: ACT / 9’-0”

Personnel Doors: Fixture (Qty / Type): None
Door Frames: Drain (Qty / Type) None
Door Hardware:
FIRE PROTECTION
Marker boards: MNS Yes
Tack boards: 1 each Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Custom Shelving: 13 LF Smoke detection Yes
Wall & Corner Guards: Yes Chimes or voice for audible yes
notification
FF&E ITEMS:
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No
Tamper Proof Outlets: No
Data: Each workstation

Phone: Each workstation
Intercom: No
EQUIPMENT (CFCI)
10 para. 14.9.1
EQUIPMENT (GFGI) CO Detection If natural gas is used
SECURITY
Camera Coverage No
Comments:
1. Provide additional convenience outlets at 12 foot on center.
equipment.; see this sheet for # of occupants, equipment, and lighting loads.
ROOM NUMBER: 104

ROOM NAME: FACILITY SUPERVISOR

Functional Area General Admin. Temperature (Winter / Summer): Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: RHD Office Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
Wall Finish: Paint

Personnel Doors: WD Fixture (Qty / Type): None
Door Frames: HM Drain (Qty / Type) None
Door Hardware: HW-1
FIRE PROTECTION
MNS Yes
Marker boards: 1 each Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
Tack boards: Smoke detection Yes
Wall & Corner Guards: Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Window Treatment:
FF&E ITEMS
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No
Data: 1 outlet per wall

Phone: 1 outlet per wall
Intercom: Yes

10 para. 14.9.1
CO Detection If natural gas is used
EQUIPMENT (CFCI) SECURITY
Camera Coverage No
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Computer 1
Comments:
equipment.
ROOM NUMBER(S): 105, 118, 148, 206, 209, 251

ROOM NAME: GENERAL STORAGE

Functional Area Building Support Temperature (Winter / Summer): Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Storage Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Sound Attenuation: NA Final Filtration Requirement: MERV 8
10 para. 11.3.2.
ARCH. FINISHES: Room Pressurization: Negative
Floor Material: Rubber Flooring Internal Loads See Comment # 1
Wall Finish: Paint

Door Hardware: HW-4
FIRE PROTECTION
Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
ARCH. SPECIALTIES MNS Yes
Plastic Lam Arch. Millwork (LF) - Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Marker boards: - Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
Tack boards: - Smoke detection Yes
Storage Shelving (LF): See Comment 2
Wall & Corner Guards: -
Signage: Yes
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No
Data: No
FF&E ITEMS Phone: No
Intercom: No
Multi-level Switching: No
10 para. 14.9.1

Camera Coverage No
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Comments:
equipment.
2. Storage requirements shall be determined during final design by DOR.
ROOM NUMBER(S): 106, 125, 140, 210, 247

ROOM NAME: Uni-sex Toilet

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Toilet Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Occupants per Room Varies Minimum Outside Air: Per UFC 4-740-14
10 para 11.3.2.
Floor Material: Epoxy Flooring Internal Loads See Comment # 1
System - Troweled
Base Material: Integral Epoxy Base Room Criteria: 35 RC (N)
Wall Finish: Paint/Ceramic Wall
Tile Refer to Section
01 10 10 para. 9.4.11
Ceiling/ Height: Gypsum board/ 9’-0”

Personnel Doors: WD Fixture (Qty / Type): 1 Water Closet (Adult
Size)
Door Frames: HM 1 Adult Size
Countertop Lavatory
Door Hardware: HW-5 Drain (Qty / Type) 1 Floor Drain
ARCH. SPECIALTIES
Counter Tops Solid Surface

Toilet Accessories: Towel Dispenser FIRE PROTECTION
Soap Dispenser Suppression Type: Wet Pipe
Toilet Paper Dispenser Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
Handicap Handrails
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: Yes
Data: No
Intercom: No

10 para. 14.9.1
Camera Coverage No
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Comments:
equipment.
ROOM NUMBER: 107

ROOM NAME: Reception / Work Room – Copy Area

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Office Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Exhaust Air Requirement: 0.5 cfm/sqft
See Comment # 3
ARCH. FINISHES: Room Pressurization: Neutral
Wall Finish: Paint

Door Hardware: HW-1
Pass-Doors/Window (sliding): Aluminum
FIRE PROTECTION
ARCH. SPECIALTIES Suppression Type: Wet Pipe
Arch. Millwork (LF) Refer to Section 01 10 Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
10 Para 9.4.2
Reception desk Refer to Section 01 10 MNS Yes
10 para 9.4.2
Marker boards: 1 each Smoke Detection Yes
Bulletin boards: 1 each Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
Lockers: - Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Signage: Yes
Wall & Corner Guards: Yes
ELECTRICAL
FF&E ITEMS GFCI Outlets: No

EQUIPMENT (CFCI) Phone: 1 outlet per wall
Intercom: No
EQUIPMENT (GFGI) Multi-level Switching: Yes

Computer 3 each Lighting Level: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 14.9.1
CCTV Monitor(s) Refer to Section 01 10 CO Detection If natural gas is used
10 para 15.8
Copier 1 each SECURITY
Fax 1 each Camera Coverage No
POS Terminal 1 each
Comments:
equipment.
3. Provide exhaust grille in ceiling directly above copy machine.
ROOM NUMBER: 108

ROOM NAME: ISOLATION ROOM

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Sick Room Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
10 Para 9.4.6
Wall Construction: Gypsum board/Glass

Personnel Doors: WD Fixture (Qty / Type): 1 Water Closet (Child
Size)
Door Frames: HM 1 Child Size
Countertop Lavatory
ARCH. SPECIALTIES
Counter Top Lavatory: Solid Surface FIRE PROTECTION
Marker boards: 1 each Suppression Type: Wet Pipe
Tack boards: Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
Toilet Partitions: Solid Surface MNS Yes
Wall & Corner Guards: Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
Toilet Accessories: Toilet Paper Dispenser Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Handicap Grab Bars Pull stations Yes
Medicine Cabinet Smoke Detection Yes
ELECTRICAL
FF&E ITEMS GFCI Outlets: Yes
Tamper Resistant Outlets: Yes
Data: No
Phone: No
Intercom: Yes

10 para. 14.9.1
Emergency lighting Yes
Exit signs Prohibited
EQUIPMENT (CFCI)
Under counter Refrigerator SECURITY
Camera Coverage Yes
Comments:
equipment.
ROOM NUMBER: 109

ROOM NAME: SECURITY

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Security Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
Wall Finish: Paint

Door Hardware: HW-10
ARCH. SPECIALTIES FIRE PROTECTION

Marker boards: 1 each Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
Tack boards: MNS Yes
Storage Shelving: LF Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Cylinder Racks: Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
Signage: Yes Smoke detection yes
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No
Data: As req’d by equipment

FF&E ITEMS Phone: By door
Intercom: No

10 para. 14.9.1
Camera Coverage No
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Computer
CCTV Monitoring
Comments:
1. Provide minimum one communication outlet and electrical receptacle per wall.
2. Provide rack mounted receptacles.
equipment.
ROOM NUMBER: 110, 147, 200, 205, 213, 253

ROOM NAME: CORRIDOR

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Circulation Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Floor Material: Rubber Flooring, Internal Loads See Comment # 5
Refer to Section 01 10
10 Para 9.4.12
Wall Finish: Paint/Wainscot,
See Comment 3
Ceiling/ Height: ACT / Varies, Fixture (Qty / Type): See Comment # 6
Comment 7
Drain (Qty / Type) None
DOORS (sizes on dwgs):
Personnel Doors (exit doors): HM FIRE PROTECTION
Door Frames: HM Suppression Type: Wet Pipe
Door Hardware: HW-7 (panic device) Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
ARCH. SPECIALTIES
Plastic Lam Arch. Millwork (LF) Comment 2 MNS Yes
Marker boards: Chimes or voice for audible Yes

notification
Tack boards: Yes Pull Stations Yes
Display Rails: Yes, Comment 4 Smoke detection Yes
Wall & Corner Guards: Yes, Outside Corners, MNS Yes
10 Para 9.4.12
Signage: Yes Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Tactile exit signs yes
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No
FF&E ITEMS Tamper Resistant Outlets: Yes
Data: No
Phone: No
Intercom: No
EQUIPMENT (CFCI)
10 para. 14.9.1
EQUIPMENT (GFGI) Emergency Lighting Yes
SECURITY
Camera Coverage Yes
Comments:
2. Provide Custom Bench with storage below at alcoves to Infant and Pre-Toddler Activity Rooms.
3. High Impact Resistant Wainscot shall be installed at a height of 48” AFF with Paint above. Refer to Section 01 10
10 paragraph 9.4.11.
4. Display Rails shall be placed at a height of 48” as a cap for wainscot and at adult height (7’-0”). Refer to
Section 01 10 10 paragraph 9.4.11.
equipment.
6. Provide one pair of electric water coolers in Corridor 110 and Corridor 200. Refer to floor plan for location.
7. Ceiling height shall vary giving the opportunity to incorporate natural lighting through clerestory windows.
ROOM NUMBER: 111, 114, 135, 142, 145

ROM NAME: INFANT ACTIVITY ROOM

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Classroom Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
10 Para 9.4.13 & 6.2.2
Base Material: Integral Wall Base Room Criteria: 30 RC (N)
10 Para 9.4.13 & 14.1
Ceiling/ Height: ACT / 9’-0” Fixture (Qty / Type): 1 Water Closet (Child
Size) see Comment #3
2 Child Size
Countertop Lavatories
DOORS (sizes on dwgs): 1 Adult Size
Countertop Lavatory
Personnel Doors: WD 1 Countertop Sink
Door Frames: HM 1 Countertop Kitchen
Sink
Door Hardware: HW-2 & HW-3 1 Glass Filler
Folding Acoust. Panel Doors Drain (Qty / Type) 1 Floor Drain
FIRE PROTECTION
Arch. Millwork (LF) Comment 1 Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
Tack boards: Comment 1 Smoke Detector Yes
Cubbie Storage: 2 each Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
Diaper Changing Station: 1 each Pull stations Yes
Toilet Partitions: Solid Surface ELECTRICAL
Toilet Accessories: Toilet Paper Dispenser GFCI Outlets: No
Soap Dispenser Tamper Resistant Outlets: Yes
Signage Yes Data: Yes, 1 outlet for future

use
Art Display Rail: Comment 1 Phone: No
Wall & Corner Guards: Yes – Outside Corners Intercom: Yes
FF&E ITEMS Multi-level Switching: No
10 para. 14.9.1
EQUIPMENT (CFCI) CO Detection If natural gas is used
Refrigerator – under counter 1 each Exit signs Prohibited
EQUIPMENT (GFGI) Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
SECURITY
Camera Coverage Yes
Comments:
1. Refer to Architectural Plans for layout of millwork required for Activity Room.
equipment.
3. Provide rough-in plumbing only for this water closet. Do not install the water closet.
ROOM NUMBER: 112, 121, 133, 143, 215, 220, 233, 238, 243
ROOM NAME: NURSING ROOM / STORAGE

Functional Area Storage Temperature (Winter / Summer): Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Storage and Lactation Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
Room 10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Humidity Tolerance: Within Range
Secure Requirements: Final Filtration Requirement: MERV 8
Sound Attenuation: STC 45 Minimum Air Changes: None
No. Rooms 9 Minimum Outside Air: Per UFC 4-740-14
Occupants per Room 1 Exhaust Air Requirement: None
Room Pressurization: Neutral
ARCH. FINISHES: Internal Loads See Comment # 2
Floor Material: Rubber Flooring Room Criteria: 30 RC (N)
Base Material: Resilient Base
Wall Finish: Paint
Ceiling/ Height: ACT / Varies
PLUMBING
DOORS (sizes on dwgs): Fixture (Qty / Type): None
Personnel Doors: WD Drain (Qty / Type) None
Door Frames: HM
Door Hardware: HW-4
ARCH. SPECIALTIES
Storage Shelving (LF): TBD – Comment 1
Car Seat Storage Racks: TBD – Comment 1
Wall & Corner Guards:
Metal Lockers: Double Tier – 3 each
Signage: Yes FIRE PROTECTION
FF&E ITEMS ELECTRICAL

GFCI Outlets: No
Tamper Proof Outlets: Yes
Data: No
Phone: No
EQUIPMENT (CFCI) Intercom: No
EQUIPMENT (GFGI) Multi-level Switching: Yes

10 para. 14.9.1
SECURITY
Camera Coverage No
Comments:
1. Quantities shall be determined during final design and shall be specific to the Base CDC.
equipment.
ROOM NUMBER: 113, 115, 122, 124, 128, 131, 134, 136, 144, 146, 216, 218, 221, 223, 226, 231, 234,
236, 239, 241, 244, 246
ROOM NAME: STORAGE

Functional Area General Storage Temperature (Winter / Summer): Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Storage for Activity Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
Rooms 10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Wall Finish: Paint

Door Hardware: HW-4
FIRE PROTECTION
Storage Shelving: TBD, Comment 1 Smoke detection Yes
Wall & Corner Guards: - Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
FF&E ITEMS
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No
EQUIPMENT (CFCI) Data: No

Phone: No
Intercom: No
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
10 para. 14.9.1
SECURITY
Camera Coverage No
Comments:
1. Shall be determined during final design phase and for Base-specific CDC.
equipment.
ROOM NUMBER: 116, 141, 227

ROOM NAME: MECHANICAL ROOM

Functional Area Building Support. Temperature (Winter / Summer): Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Mechanical Room Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Sound Attenuation: STC 45 Final Filtration Requirement: None
No. Rooms 3 Minimum Air Changes: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.2.
Occupants per Room - Minimum Outside Air: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.2.
10 para.11.3.2.
ARCH. FINISHES: Room Pressurization: N/A
Floor Material: Sealed Concrete Internal Loads See Comment # 1
Base Material: Resilient Base Room Criteria: N/A
Wall Finish: Paint
Wall Construction: Concrete Masonry
Ceiling/ Height: Exposed

Personnel Doors: HM Fixture (Qty / Type): Hose Bibb
Door Frames: HM Drain (Qty / Type) (Varies) Floor Drains
Door Hardware: HW-8
FIRE PROTECTION
If fire alarm control panel is Provide one heat
located in this room detector over the fire
alarm control panel
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No
Data: For req’d equipment

Intercom: No
10 para. 14.9.1

Camera Coverage No
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Comments:
1. Internal loads will be dependent on equipment provided.
ROOM NUMBER: 117

ROOM NAME: KITCHEN

Functional Area Staff Area Temperature (Winter / Summer): Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Food Prep Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
Occupants per Room 4 Minimum Outside Air: See Comment # 5
Exhaust Air Requirement: See Comment # 6
System, See Comment
11
Base Material: Integral Epoxy Base Noise Criteria: 45 RC (N)
Wall Finish: Stainless Steel/GFRP See Comment # 5
Comment 10
Comment 1

Personnel Doors: HM Fixture (Qty / Type): See Comment # 8
Door Frames: HM Drain (Qty / Type) See Comment # 8
Door Hardware: HW-9
Overhead Doors:
Folding Acoust. Panel Doors
ARCH. SPECIALTIES
Marker boards: 1 each
Tack boards: -
Storage Shelving: -
Wall & Corner Guards: Yes – Comment 2
FIRE PROTECTION
FF&E ITEMS Suppression Type: Wet Pipe; See
Comment # 9
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: Yes
Data: For workstation

Phone: By door and
workstation
EQUIPMENT (CFCI) Intercom: Yes
Storage Shelving 6 sections
Walk-In Refrigerator/Freezer 1 each Multi-level Switching: Yes
Freezer Shelving 4 sections Lighting Level: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 14.9.1
Dunnage Racks 2 each CO Detection If natural gas is used
Refrigerator Shelving 4 sections SECURITY
Refrigerator 1 each Camera Coverage No
Freezer 1 each
Ice Machine 1 each
Hand Sinks 2 each
Mop Rack 1 each
EQUIPMENT (CFCI) (cont.)

Janitor Shelving 1 section
Utensil Storage Racks 2 each
Clean Dish Table 1 each
Booster Heater 1 each
Dishwasher 1 each
Condensate Hood 1 each
Soiled Dish Table 1 each
Open Rack 1 each
Heated Cabinet 1 each
Exhaust Hood 1 each
Combination Oven/Steamer 1 each
Range 1 each
Braising Pan 1 each
Work Tables 2 each
Work Table 1 each
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Computer 1 each
Mixer and Stand 1 each
Toaster and stand 1 each
Slicer and Stand 1 each
Utility Carts 2 each
Delivery Carts 8 each
Trash Bins 3 each
Comments:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Tile specified shall be appropriate for Kitchen applications – High Moisture Resistent .
2. Stainless Steel crash rail shall be specified.
3. Light fixtures shall be for wet locations.
4. Separate panelboard with shunt trip main breaker.
5. Minimum outside air shall be as required by the exhaust requirements for the kitchen exhaust hoods.
6. Exhaust rates for the grease hood and dishwasher hood shall be as required by size provided.
7. Refer to this sheet for # of occupants. Refer to kitchen equipment provided to determine equipment load. Use
preliminary lighting load of 1 W/sqft.
8. Coordinate plumbing fixture and drain requirements with Section 01 10 10 para. 18.0 Food Service Equipment
and kitchen layout.
9. Kitchen grease hood shall be provided with a wet chemical fire suppression system. All power and natural gas (if
any) shall be shut off during a fire alarm to all kitchen equipment located under the grease hood.
10. Stainless Steel wall panels shall be installed under hood area. Glass Fiber Reinforced Panels shall be installed full
height in all other areas of food prep areas.
11. Refer to Section 01 10 10 Paragraphs 9.4.8 and 9.6.4 for more information.
ROOM NUMBER: 119, 207

ROOM NAME: JANITOR’S CLOSET

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Janitor’s Closet Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Occupants per Room - Minimum Outside Air: None
10 para. 11.3.2.
Wall Finish: Ceramic tile / Paint
10 para. 9.4.10
Wall Construction: WR Gypsum board
Ceiling/ Height: ACT 9’-0”

Personnel Doors: HM Fixture (Qty / Type): 1 Mop Sink
Door Frames: HM Drain (Qty / Type) 1 Floor Drain
Door Hardware: HW-4
ARCH. SPECIALTIES
Mop Sink:
Storage Shelving: See Comment 2
FIRE PROTECTION
FF&E ITEMS Suppression Type: Wet Pipe
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: Yes
EQUIPMENT (CFCI)
Data: No
Phone: No
EQUIPMENT (GFGI) Intercom: No
10 para. 14.9.1
SECURITY
Camera Coverage No
Comments:
equipment.
2. Shelving requirements shall be determined during final design.
ROOM NUMBER: 120, 123, 126, 214, 217, 224

ROOM NAME: TODDLER ACTIVITY ROOM

Functional Area Staff/Parent Area Temperature (Winter / Summer): Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
SCIF Requirements: Humidity Tolerance: Within Range
10 para. 11.3.2.
ARCHITECTURE: Room Pressurization: Positive
10 Para 9.4.13 & 6.2.2
Wall Finish: Refer to Section 01 10 PLUMBING
10 Para 9.4.13 &
9.6.2.2 & 9.6.3.2
Wall Construction: Gypsum board Fixture (Qty / Type): 2 Water Closets (Child
Size)
Ceiling/ Height: ACT / 9’-0” 4 Child Size
1 Adult Size
Countertop Lavatory
DOORS (sizes on dwgs): 1 Countertop Sink
Personnel Doors: WD 1 Countertop Kitchen
Sink
Door Frames: HM 1 Glass Filler
Door Hardware: HW-2 & HW-3 Drain (Qty / Type) 1 Floor Drain
Folding Acoust. Panel Doors FIRE PROTECTION

ARCH. SPECIALTIES Notification Appliance: Per NFPA 72
Solid Surface Arch. Millwork Comment 1 Pull Stations Yes
(LF)
Tack boards: Comment 2 Smoke detectors Yes
Cubbie Storage: 4 each Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
Diaper Changing Station: 1 each Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Toilet Partitions: Solid Surface ELECTRICAL
Toilet Accessories: Soap Dispenser GFCI Outlets: No
Toilet Paper Dispenser Tamper Resistant Outlets: Yes
Data: For play computers
Signage: Yes Phone: No
Wall & Corner Guards: Yes Intercom: Yes
Art Display Rail: Comment 2 Emergency Lighting Yes
FF&E ITEMS Lighting Level: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 14.9.1
SECURITY
Camera Coverage Yes
FF&E ITEMS (cont.)
EQUIPMENT (CFCI)
Refrigerator 1 each
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Comments:
2. Shall be determined by Base-specific RFP Appendices.
3. Play Equipment shall be selected by Base-specific RFP end users and shall be included in Base-specific RFP
Appendices.
equipment.
ROOM NUMBER: 127, 130, 225, 230

ROOM NAME: NURSING ROOM/STORAGE

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Storage/ Lactation Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
Room 10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Wall Finish: Paint
Ceiling/ Height: ACT / Varies

Door Hardware: HW- 4
FIRE PROTECTION
Notification Appliance: Per NFPA 72
Storage Shelving (LF): TBD – Comment 1 Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Car Seat Storage Racks: TBD - Comment 1 Smoke detection Yes
Wall & Corner Guards: Chimes or voice for audible yes
notification
Lockers: Double Tier – 3 each
Signage: Yes
FF&E ITEMS
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No
Data: No
Phone: No
EQUIPMENT (CFCI) Intercom: No

EQUIPMENT (GFGI) Lighting Level: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 14.9.1
Comments:
1. Quantities shall be determined during final design and shall be specific to the Base-specific RFP.
equipment.
3. Provide Knox Box on exterior of building near main entrance.
ROOM NUMBER: 129, 132, 232, 235, 242, 245

ROOM NAME: PRE-TODDLER ACTIVITY ROOM

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
10 para. 9.4.13
Base Material: Integral Base Room Criteria: 30 RC (N)
Wall Finish: Refer to Section 01 10 PLUMBING
10 para. 9.4.13 &
9.6.2.2 & 9.6.3.2
Wall Construction: Gypsum board Fixture (Qty / Type): 1 Water Closet (Child
Size) see Comment #4
Ceiling/ Height: ACT / 9’-0” 2 Child Size
1 Adult Size
Countertop Lavatory
Sink
Door Hardware: HW-2 & HW-3 Drain (Qty / Type) 1 Floor Drain
Solid Surface Arch. Millwork Comment 1 MNS Yes
(LF)
Marker boards: Smoke Detectors Yes
Tack boards: Comment 2 Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Cubbie Storage: 2 each Pull stations Yes
Diaper Changing Station: 1 each Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
Toilet Accessories: Towel Dispenser
Soap Dispenser
Toilet Paper Dispenser ELECTRICAL
Signage: Yes GFCI Outlets: No
Art Display Rail: Comment 2 Tamper Resistant Outlets: Yes
Wall & Corner Guards: Yes Data: For play computer
Phone: No
FF&E ITEMS Intercom: Yes
CO Detectors If natural gas is used
10 para. 14.9.1

EQUIPMENT (CFCI) Exit signs Prohibited
Refrigerator – Under counter 1 each SECURITY
Camera Coverage Yes
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Comments:
2. Shall be determined by Base-specific RFP Appendices.
equipment.
4. Provide rough-in plumbing only for this water closet. Do not install the water closet.
ROOM NUMBER: 137, 208

ROOM NAME: LAUNDRY ROOM

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Laundry Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
Occupants per Room 2 Minimum Outside Air:
Wall Finish: Epoxy Paint
one-hour fire rated
Ceiling/ Height: Gypsum board
one-hour fire rated

Personnel Doors: ¾-hour fire rated Fixture (Qty / Type): 1 Laundry Tub; See
w/vision panel Comment # 3
Door Frames: HM Drain (Qty / Type) 1 Floor Drain; See
Comment # 3
Door Hardware: HW-4
ARCH. SPECIALTIES
Plastic Lam Arch. Millwork (LF) See Comment 5
Marker boards: 1 each
Tack boards: -
Base Cabinet (LF): See Comment 5
Upper Cabinet (LF): See Comment 5
FIRE PROTECTION
Signage Yes Suppression Type: Wet Pipe
Wall & Corner Guards: Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: Yes
FF&E ITEMS Tamper Proof Outlets: No
Data: No
Phone: No
Intercom: Yes
EQUIPMENT (CFCI) Multi-level Switching: Yes

Stacking Washer/Dryer 4 each, Comment 1 Lighting Level: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 14.9.1
EQUIPMENT (GFGI) SECURITY
Camera Coverage No
Comments:
1. Specify Commercial Grade Washer and Dryer with one ABA compliant washer and dryer.
equipment.
3. Provide hot and cold water and drain connections for 4 clothes washers.
4. Provide separate clothes dryer vent exhaust for each dryer.
5. Refer to Appendix for individual site requirements.

ROOM NUMBER: 138

ROOM NAME: ELECTRICAL ROOM

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Electrical Room Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Sound Attenuation: Final Filtration Requirement: None
10 para. 11.3.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
Wall Finish: Paint

Personnel Doors (pair): HM Fixture (Qty / Type): None
Door Hardware: HW-8
FIRE PROTECTION
MNS Yes
Smoke detection Yes
Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No
Data: As req’d for

equipment
Intercom: No
10 para. 14.9.1

Camera Coverage No
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Comments:
2. Internal loads will be dependent on equipment provided.
ROOM NUMBER: 139

ROOM NAME: COMMUNICATIONS ROOM

Functional Area General Support Temperature (Winter / Summer): Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Bldg Support Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Occupants per Room - Minimum Outside Air: None
Floor Material: Seal Concrete Internal Loads See Comment # 4
Wall Finish: Paint

Personnel Doors: HM Fixture (Qty / Type): None
Door Hardware: HW-9
ARCH. SPECIALTIES
FIRE PROTECTION
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No
Data: As req’d by equipment

Intercom: No

10 para. 14.9.1

Camera Coverage No
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Comments:
2. Provide rack mounted receptacles.
4. Coordinate equipment loads with Communications equipment provided; use preliminary lighting load of 1 W/sqft.
ROOM NUMBER: 149

ROOM NAME: DIRECTOR’S OFFICE/ CONFERENCE ROOM

Functional Area General Admin Temperature (Winter / Summer): Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
Wall Finish: Paint/ Wallcovering

Door Hardware: HW-1
FIRE PROTECTION
Marker boards: 1 each Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
Wall & Corner Guards: Smoke detection yes
Signage: Yes
FF&E ITEMS
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No

Intercom: No

10 para. 14.9.1
Camera Coverage No
CCTV Viewing Ability Yes
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Computer 1
CCTV Monitor 1
Comments:
equipment.
ROOM NUMBER: 150

ROOM NAME: ASSISTANT DIRECTOR’S OFFICE/CONFERENCE ROOM

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
Wall Finish: Paint/Wallcovering

Door Hardware: HM-1
FIRE PROTECTION
MNS Yes
Marker boards: 1 each Smoke detection Yes
Wall & Corner Guards: Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Signage: Yes Chimes or voice for audible yes
notification
FF&E ITEMS
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No

Intercom: No

10 para. 14.9.1
Camera Coverage No
CCTV Viewing Ability Yes
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Computer 1 each
CCTV Monitor 1 each
Comments:
equipment.
ROOM NUMBER: 201

ROOM NAME: BREAK ROOM

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Public Break Area Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Occupants per Room 20 Minimum Outside Air: Per ASHRAE 62.1
Wall Finish: Paint
Wall Construction: Gypsum board / Glass

Personnel Doors: WD Fixture (Qty / Type): 1 Countertop Kitchen
Sink; See Comment #4
Door Hardware: HM-1
ARCH. SPECIALTIES FIRE PROTECTION

Marker boards: 1 each Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
Bulletin boards: 1 each MNS Yes
Wall & Corner Guards: Smoke detection Yes
Base Cabinet (LF): LF - Field Verfiy Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Upper Cabinet (LF): LF - Field Verify Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
Cabinet Material: Plastic Laminate
Tops (depth/material): LF Field Verify
Solid Surface
Signage: Yes
Café Counter Refer to Section 01 10 ELECTRICAL
10 Para 9.4.4
FF&E ITEMS GFCI Outlets: No
Data: No
Phone: No
Intercom: Yes
EQUIPMENT (CFCI)
10 para. 14.9.1
Refrigerator 2 each SECURITY
Microwave 2 each Camera Coverage No
Coffee Maker 1 each
Undercounter Ice Machine 1 each
Comments:
2. Break room can be 100 percent exhausted or 100 percent returned.
equipment.
4. Provide water connections for ice machine and refrigerator ice makers.
ROOM NUMBER: 202

ROOM NAME: TRAINING ROOM

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
Wall Finish: Paint/Accoustical
Panel

Door Hardware: HW-1

Marker boards: 12 LF MNS Yes
Bulletin boards: Comment 1 Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Projection Screens: Recessed Smoke detection Yes
Wall & Corner Guards: Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
Signage: Yes
FF&E ITEMS
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No

Phone: By door
Intercom: Yes
EQUIPMENT (CFCI)
10 para. 14.9.1
Computer 1 each SECURITY
Projector – ceiling hung 1 each Camera Coverage Yes
Flat Panel Monitor 1 each
Comments:
1. Specify Acoustical Panel System with Tackable surface for display purposes. Sizes to be specified during final
design.
equipment.
ROOM NUMBER: 203

ROOM NAME: VESTIBULE (women’s toilet)

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Entrance Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Floor Material: Porcelain Tile Internal Loads See Comment # 1
Base Material: Ceramic Tile Base Room Criteria: 35 RC (N)
Wall Finish: Paint
Ceiling/ Height: WR-ACT / 9’-0”

Door Hardware: HW-6
ARCH. SPECIALTIES
Plastic Lam Arch. Millwork (LF)
Marker boards:
Tack boards:
Lockers:
Locker Room Benches:
Projection Screens: FIRE PROTECTION
Storage Shelving: Suppression Type: Wet Pipe
Cylinder Racks: Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
Flammable Storage Cabinets:
Safety curtains: ELECTRICAL
Wall & Corner Guards: GFCI Outlets: No
FF&E ITEMS
Waste Basket 1 each Data: No
Phone: No
Intercom: Yes
10 para. 14.9.1

Camera Coverage No
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Comments:
equipment.
ROOM NUMBER: 204

ROOM NAME: WOMEN’S RESTROOM

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Primary Room Activity: Restroom Humidity Range: Refer to Section 01 10
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
System - Troweled
Base Material: Integral Epoxy Base Room Criteria: 35 RC (N)
Wall Finish: Ceramic tile / Paint
Refer to Section 01
1010 para. 9.4.11
Wall Construction: WR Gypsum board
Ceiling/ Height: WR Gyp.bd./9’-0”

Personnel Doors: WD Fixture (Qty / Type): 2 Water Closets (Adult
Size)
Door Frames: HM 2 Adult Size
ARCH. SPECIALTIES
Solid Surface Arch. Millwork 6 LF
(LF)
Toilt Accessories: Toilet Tissue
Dispenser
Towl
Dispenser/Disposal
Soap Dispenser
Sanitary Napkin
Disposal
Grab Bars FIRE PROTECTION
Mirror Glass 6 LF Suppression Type: Wet Pipe
Toilet Partitions Stainless Steel Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: Yes
Data: No
Waste Basket 1 each Intercom: No
10 para. 14.9.1
Camera Coverage No
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Comments:
1. At least one water closet and one lavatory shall be ADA compliant.
equipment.
ROOM NUMBER: 211, 212, 228, 248, 250

ROOM NAME: OUTDOOR STORAGE

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Sound Attenuation: Final Filtration Requirement: None
10 para. 11.3.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
Floor Material: Sealed Concrete Internal Loads N/A
Base Material: N/A Room Criteria: N/A
Wall Finish: Paint

Personnel Doors: HM Fixture (Qty / Type): None
Door Hardware: HW-8
ARCH. SPECIALTIES
Marker boards:
Tack boards:
Metal Lockers:
Locker Room Benches:
Projection Screens: FIRE PROTECTION
Storage Shelving: TBD, Comment 1 Suppression Type: No
Cylinder Racks: Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
Flammable Storage Cabinets:
Safety curtains: ELECTRICAL
Wall & Corner Guards: GFCI Outlets: No
Data: No
Intercom: No
Lighting Level: None

Camera Coverage No
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Comments:
1. Shall be determined during final design.
ROOM NUMBER: 219, 222, 229, 237, 240

ROOM NAME: PRE-SCHOOL ACTIVITY ROOM

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
10 Para 9.4.13 & 6.2.2
10 Para 9.4.13 &
9.6.2.2 & 9.6.3.2
Ceiling/ Height: ACT / 9’-0” Fixture (Qty / Type): 3 Water Closets (Child
Size)
4 Child Size
Sink
Door Hardware: HW-2 & HW-3
Drain (Qty / Type) 1 Floor Drain
Folding Acoust. Panel Doors
FIRE PROTECTION
Solid Surface Arch. Millwork Comment 1 Notification Appliance: Per UFC 4-021-01
(LF)
Tack boards: Comment 2 Strobes Per UFC 4-021-01
Cubbie Storage: 4 each Smoke Detectors Yes
Diaper Changing Station: 1 each Pull stations Yes
Toilet Partitions: Solid Surface Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
Toilet Accessories: Soap Dispenser
Toilet Paper Dispenser ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No
Signage: Yes Tamper Resistant Outlets: Yes
Art Display Rail: Comment 2 Data: For play computers
Phone: No
FF&E ITEMS Intercom: Yes
10 para. 14.9.1
FF&E ITEMS (cont.) CO detectors Yes, if natural gas is

used in the facility
SECURITY
EQUIPMENT (CFCI) Camera Coverage Yes
Refrigerator 1 each
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Comments:
2. Shall be determined by Base-specific RFP Appendices
3. Play Equipment shall be selected by Base-specific end users and shall be included in Base-specific RFP
Appendices.
equipment.
ROOM NUMBER: 249

ROOM NAME: BUGGY STORAGE

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
Wall Finish: Paint

Personnel Doors: Fixture (Qty / Type): None
Door Frames: Drain (Qty / Type) None
Door Hardware:
ARCH. SPECIALTIES
Storage Shelving:
Signage: Yes
FIRE PROTECTION
Notification Appliance: Per NFPA 72
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No
FF&E ITEMS
Data: No
Phone: No
Intercom: No
EQUIPMENT (CFCI)
Lighting Level: None
EQUIPMENT (GFGI)
Comments:
equipment.
ROOM NUMBER: 252

ROOM NAME: CURRICULUM SPECIALIST

10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.1.2.
10 para. 11.3.2.
Wall Finish: Paint

Door Hardware: HW-1

ARCH. SPECIALTIES Notification Appliance: Per NFPA 72
Plastic Lam Arch. Millwork (LF) MNS Yes
Marker boards: 1 each Strobes Yes
Tack boards: 1 each Smoke detection Yes
Storage Shelving: Chimes or voice for audible Yes
notification
Signage: Yes
FF&E ITEMS
ELECTRICAL
GFCI Outlets: No

Intercom: Yes
EQUIPMENT (CFCI)
10 para. 14.9.1
Computer Comment 1
Copier 2 each
Printer 1 each
Comments:
1. Specify quantity per Base-specific RFP requirements determined during final design phase.
equipment.
21 FIRE PROTECTION/PREVENTION INSPECTION
INSPECTION GUIDE
AIR FORCE CHILD DEVELOPMENT FACILITIES
FIRE PROTECTION/PREVENTION INSPECTION
Revision Date: 15 September 2008
The following items, at a minimum, will be used to determine if an Air Force Child
Development Center (CDC) conforms to the operational requirements of the National
Fire Protection Association, Life Safety Code (NFPA 101, 2006 Edition) and applicable
DoD and Air Force criteria. Compliance with NFPA 101 is required by DODI 6060.2,
Child Development Programs, and UFC 4-740-14, Design: Child Development Centers
Use this guide during each annual comprehensive fire inspection. Results will be
reviewed as part of the headquarters’ annual inspection.
A trained (task certified) senior member of the CDC staff conducts fire prevention
inspections monthly using Sections A and C of this inspection guide
This guide assumes that the CDC has already satisfactorily completed its evaluation for
fire safety using the fire safety facility certification (FSFC) program managed by the Air
Force Civil Engineer Support Agency (AFCESA). Once a building has been certified, it
is considered to remain certified unless significant modifications, alterations, or
occupancy changes have been made to the facility since the official FSFC evaluation. If
such changes are found (as described later in this inspection checklist), the existing
certification should be considered void, and the MAJCOM should request a
recertification evaluation of the CDC (POC: HQ AFCESA/CEOA, Mr. Ray Hansen,
DSN 523-6317, ray.hansen@tyndall.af.mil).
************************************************************************
Rate the CDC being inspected on each item using the following ratings:
C - Total Compliance with Standard

P - Partial Compliance with Standard
N - Noncompliance with Standard
NA - Not Applicable
______________________________________________________________________
Base: ____________________________________ Building Number:______________

Children: 0-6 mos ____; 6-12 mos ____; 12-24 mos ____; 2-3 Yrs ____; 3-6 Yrs _____
Staff: ____; ____; ____; ____; _____
Date: ________ Inspector Signature: ________________________________________
Rev 09/15/08 – available on AF Portal – AFCESA – Youth Programs Website Page 1

SECTION A: FACILITY
A-1. _____ The facility has been certified by AFCESA. The original FSFC certificate
is posted in the correct building and indicates the facility has been certified for use as a
“Day Care Occupancy”. (AFI 34-248, 2.2) List certificate number (if so marked): ______
A-2. _____ All deficiencies identified in past inspections have been corrected. If not,
list in section F.
A-3. ______ Modifications, alterations, or occupancy changes have NOT been made to
the facility since the official FSFC evaluation. Renovations that are purely cosmetic
(e.g., paint, carpet, wallpaper, or ceiling tiles) do not affect the FSFC. For other
renovations (such as additional rooms, new use of existing rooms, new walls, relocated
corridors, new laundry rooms, laundry appliances outside the laundry room, modified or
new HVAC systems, installation of fuel-fire furnaces, new kitchen cooking appliances,
etc.) some form of documentation (i.e., memorandum or e-mail) is available that
AFCESA has determined that a recertification visit is not required. (AFI 34-248, 2.2)
A-4. _____ Every required exit, exit access, and exit discharge is continuously
maintained free of all obstructions or impediments (including furnishings, decorations,
bye-bye buggies, etc.) for full instant use in the case of fire or emergency. Doors unlatch
and open easily to their maximum design position. Hold-open door devices function as
designed. Curtains or draperies have not been placed in front of exit doors. (NFPA 101,
7.1.10.1 & 7.1.10.2.1)
A-5. _____ Barriers, partitions, half-walls, or gates that divide child care spaces have
NOT been added since the official FSFC evaluation. (UFC 4-740-14, 7-1.2)
NOTE: This does not include barriers such as infant gates that can be easily pushed aside
by adults.
A-6. _____ Children’s activities are not conducted in any rooms without a direct exit
to the outside, such as a Training Room. (UFC 4-740-14, 2-15.1.4)
A-7. _____ An automatic hold open device integral to the door is installed on at least
one door to the outside from all child activity rooms housing children 24 months and
younger. (UFC 4-740-14, 2-15.1.5)
NOTE: Newer CDCs will have such devices on the exterior doors for every child activity
room. However, for facilities built before 2002, this is only required for those rooms
designated for children 24 months and younger.
A-8. _____ Full-width, flush-mounted panic hardware is installed on at least one door
to the outside from all child activity rooms housing children 24 months and younger.
(UFC 4-740-14, 2-15.1.3)
NOTE: Newer CDCs will have such panic hardware on the exterior doors in every child
activity room. However, for facilities built before 2002, this is only required for those
rooms designated for children 24 months and younger.

Example of Acceptable Panic Hardware Example of Not-acceptable Panic Hardware
(push-pad is not full-width on left side)
A-9. _____ Locks, slide bolts, hook-and-eye catches, or latches have NOT been added
to the door of any room, cabinet, or appliance since the last inspection; except that
magnetic-style locks are acceptable and may be added if they are of the design such that a
child inside could easily push open the door. (NFPA 101, 7.2.1.7.3)
Example of Prohibited Temporary Lock Example of Prohibited Slide Bolt Lock
A-10. _____ Special protective covers on electrical outlets (such as those that require a
twisting action to insert the plug) are undamaged and operational. Removable outlet caps
are installed in all other electrical outlets accessible to children unless the electrical
receptacles in the outlets are marked as “tamper resistant” (TR) or are of the GFCI-type.
NOTE: All new and replacement electrical outlets accessible to children must have
special protective covers (such as those that require a twisting action to insert the plug),

be marked as “tamper resistant” (TR),or be of the GFCI-type. Removable plugs or caps
do not meet the UFC requirement for new and replacement electrical outlets.
(NFPA 101, 17.5.1.2; UFC 4-740-14, 7-2.4.1.10 & 2-20.8.6)
A-11. _____ The personnel gate in the playground fence is unobstructed and in good
working order, and will permit the movement of children away from a hazardous area
(i.e., fire in the building, firefighting operations, etc.). The gate is either kept unlocked
whenever the CDC is occupied by children, or the gate is designed such that it can be
opened from the playground side without the need for a key or special tool. (NFPA 101,
7.7.1; UFC 4-740-14, 2-15.1.9)
A-12. _____ IF the designated evacuation meeting place has changed since the last
inspection, a smooth paved-surfaced evacuation route to a safe gathering location has
been provided. It is unobstructed and not less than 75 feet away from facility. The
evacuation path avoids street crossings to the maximum extent possible. (UFC 4-740-14,
2-15.1.9)
A-13. _____ IF new electrical outlets have been added since the last inspection, those
outlets accessible to children are located at least 54 inches above the finished floor
(measured to the top of the receptacle faceplate). Additionally, the outlets are provided
with a special protective cover (such as one that requires a twisting action to insert the
plug), use listed “tamper resistant” (TR) electrical receptacles, or use GFCI-type
electrical receptacles. GFCI-type receptacles should be used only near sinks and
outdoors.
(NFPA 101, 17.5.1.2; UFC 4-740-14, 7-2.4.1.10 & 2-20.8.6)
A-14. _____ IF the CDC is NOT protected by an automatic sprinkler system, clothing
and personal items are not stored in hallways or lobbies except in closed metal lockers.
(NFPA 101, 17.7.4.2)
A-15. _____ IF new draperies, curtains, and other loosely hanging furnishings and
decorations have been added since the last inspection, these items are flame resistant as
tested by NFPA 701, Method 1, or California State Fire Marshall Title 19 (CSFM Title
19). French test method NF P92-503 (classification M1 or M2) is also acceptable and
may be most applicable for OCONUS bases. Documentation on all new furnishings is
kept either on the item (e.g., “Do Not Remove” tags) or in a fire protection file folder
located in the CDC files. (NFPA 101, 17.7.4.1 & 10.3.1)
A-16. ____ IF window valances have been added since the last inspection, the
valences are only installed above exterior windows, interior windows, or door vision
panels. They must be of 18-inches or less in depth and mounted such that the lowest edge
of the valance is 60-inches or more above the finished floor. Window valances may not
be installed over exit doors (to the corridor or to the outside).
NOTE: The surface area of these valances must be counted against the maximum 20
percent (unsprinklered building) or maximum 50 percent (sprinklered building) of wall

space that may be used for artwork and teaching materials. (NFPA 101, 17.7.4.3). Also
see C-9.
Example of Acceptable Valance Arrangement.
A-17. _____ IF any door hardware has been changed since the last inspection: doors can
be opened with not more than one releasing operation; doors can be opened from the
inside by children; and, padlocks, deadbolts, slide bolts, hook-and-eye latches, or similar
devices are not installed on doors in the means of egress. Panic hardware (identical in
style to the replaced hardware) is provided on doors to the outside. Door hardware is
mounted no higher than 48 inches (1220 mm) above the finished floor. (NFPA 101,
7.2.1.5.1, 7.2.1.5.4, 7.2.1.5.9.1 & 7.2.1.5.9.2)
A-18. _____ Carbon monoxide alarm devices, if required in the facility to achieve
accreditation by the National Association for the Education of Young Children
(NAEYC), are located in each child occupied room. The alarm devices are mounted near
adult eye level (approximately 5-6 feet above the floor). The devices are not located near
diaper changing areas or near any diaper pails or other repositories for soiled diapers.
NOTE: Methane gas generated from soiled diapers will interfere with proper operation of
the carbon monoxide alarm device and may cause false alarms.
SECTION B: SUPPRESSION AND ALARM SYSTEMS
B-1. _____ All audible (chimes) and visual notification devices (strobes) are in good
working order and there has been no new construction or furniture placement that blocks
their effectiveness. (UFC 4-740-14, 7-2.3.6.4 & 7-2.3.6.5; NFPA 72, 7.5)
B-2. _____ The automatic fire alarm system connection to the designated fire station
or emergency response center is operational.
(NFPA 101, 17.3.4.4 & 9.6.4; UFC 4-740-14, 7-2.3.6.9)
B-3. _____ The automatic sprinkler system, fire detection and alarm system, exit
signs, egress and emergency lighting, fire doors, portable fire extinguishers, and similar

items of equipment required to comply with Life Safety Code are in proper operating
condition. (NFPA 101, 4.6.12, 9.6.1.6, 9.7.5; UFC 4-740-14, 7-2.3.5)
B-4. _____ The kitchen hood and duct chemical (or water) fire suppression system is
operational and in good working condition. The cooking surface is kept located under the
exhaust hood. The cooking surface has not been moved or replaced since the last
maintenance of the hood and duct fire suppression system. (UFC 4-740-14, 7-2.3.5;
NFPA 96, 4.1.3)
B-5. _____ Grease filters are kept in place when cooking. (NFPA 101, 17.3.2.3;
NFPA 96, 6.1.1)
B-6. _____ The kitchen door’s magnetic hold open device is operational and releases
upon activation of the building fire alarm system. (UFC 4-740-14, 2-15.1.12)
B-7. _____ Carbon monoxide alarm devices (when provided) are functionally checked
for operability at least monthly. Batteries are replaced annually. Documentation of the
dates of battery replacements and functional checks for each carbon monoxide alarm
device is maintained at the CDC.
SECTION C: OPERATIONS
C-1. _____ The center director or designee inspects all exits daily to ensure all doors,
stairs, and other exits are in proper condition, not obscured, unobstructed, will easily and
immediately open in the direction of egress, and all egress paths are free from debris, ice
or snow, etc. Problems are remedied immediately. (NFPA 101, 17.7.3.2)
C-2. _____ A trained (task certified) senior member of the CDC staff conducts fire
prevention inspections monthly (use Sections A, B-7, and C of this inspection guide). A
copy of the latest inspection form is posted in a conspicuous place in the facility.
(NFPA 101, 17.7.3.1)
C-3. _____ Flammable and combustible liquids are stored in appropriate containment
areas (an enclosed and sprinklered closet if inside the building) accessible only to the
director and janitor, or their designees. (NFPA 101, 17.3.2.1(2) & 8.7.3.1)
C-4. _____ Flammable and combustible liquids are limited to those used for cleaning.
C-5. _____ Flammable and combustible liquids and gases are not stored or handled in
any areas where egress paths could be compromised. (NFPA 101, 8.7.3.2)
C-6. _____ During renovation or construction activities at the CDC, use of flammable
or explosive substances/equipment is not permitted when children are occupying the
building.

C-7. _____ Each room for children, 24 months or younger, has a crib or other mobile
device with a minimum of four-inch (100 mm) diameter wheels, located within easy
reach of the primary exit (i.e., direct outside exit) for emergency evacuation. (UFC 4-
740-14, 5-12.1)
C-8. _____ Furnishings or decorations of an explosive or highly flammable nature are

not used. (NFPA 101, 10.3.5)
C-9. _____ Child-prepared artwork and teaching or display materials do not cover
more than 20 percent of the wall area in any area that is not sprinklered. Artwork and
teaching materials shall not exceed 50 percent of wall area in fully sprinklered buildings.
Consider window valances in these percentages per A-15. (NFPA 101, 17.7.4.3)
C-10. _____ Staff members needed to meet the required AF or Life Safety Code staff-
to-child ratios are on-duty, alert, awake, and physically present at the facility, and are
available to help with an evacuation at all times. (NFPA 101, 17.7.5)
SECTION D: DRILLS
D-1. _____ A fire evacuation plan approved by the fire department is displayed and
practiced by all persons in the building once a month. If some drills are missed because
of severe weather for part of the year, additional drills may be held in the more temperate
months. Under no circumstances should more than two months elapse between drills.
(NFPA 101, 17.7.2.2; AFI 34-248, 2.3.3)
D-2. _____ The director, assistant director, or training-and-curriculum specialist

(T&C), observes the fire evacuation in a different room each month, rotating the
responsibility each quarter.
D-3. _____ Facility fire alarms are sounded for every drill. (NFPA 101, 17.7.2)
D-4. _____ Drills are executed at different hours of the day and evening, including
when children are resting or sleeping. (NFPA 101, 17.7.2.1 & 4.7.4)
D-5. _____ During drills or evacuations, staff and children leave the building in a
brisk orderly manner and do not run. (NFPA 101, 17.7.2 & 4.7.3)
NOTE: The desirable evacuation time is two minutes or less when activity rooms
have exits directly to the outside. If children are sleeping, evacuation time will
likely be somewhat longer. (Evacuation time is measured from alarm signal to
arrival of the last group at the area of refuge.) The object of the drill is not to race
but to practice the actions needed so they become routine and automatic.
Evacuation times will improve with practice. Evacuating in an orderly, safe
manner is the most important. If the observed evacuation time suddenly

increases, the root cause should be discovered and corrected. The cause will
typically be either new/untrained staff or changed room configurations.
D-6. _____ During a drill or evacuation, children are not allowed to obtain clothing or
other personal items before they leave the building. (NFPA 101, 17.7.2)
D-7. _____ During inclement weather, blankets are kept in a specified location. Staff
members bring the blankets to the evacuation point and distribute them to the children.
D-8. _____ Staff members remain calm during a drill or evacuation. Children are
taken to their designated evacuation point; the children and staff remain there until all are
accounted for and the fire department representative gives the recall signal. (NFPA 101,
17.7.2)
D-9. _____ During a drill or evacuation, the daily attendance list for each room is
taken with the group and used to determine if all children and staff in attendance have
been evacuated. The front desk staff crosschecks final names and numbers. (NFPA 101,
17.7.2)
D-10. _____ Staff members have the capability for immediate reentry from the outside
directly into a child activity room without the need for assistance from any persons inside
the facility. (UFC 4-740-14, 2-15.1.6)
SECTION E: EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
E-1. _____ Written emergency procedures are posted in a conspicuous location. If

exit routes are not immediately obvious, diagrams are posted for clarification.
(NFPA 101, 17.7.1, 4.8; AFI 34-248, 10.12.1)
E-2. _____ Staff members are familiar with emergency procedures, including those
for carbon monoxide alarms, severe storm warnings, and other natural disasters.
E-3. _____ Staff members are familiar with primary (directly to the outside) and
secondary evacuation routes (through corridors). (NFPA 101, 17.7.1 & 4.8)
E-4. _____ Staff members are trained in and use proper procedures for contacting the
designated fire department and/or emergency services using the fire alarm system and the
telephone. (NFPA 101, 17.7.1 & 4.8; AFI 34-248, 10.12.1)
E-5. _____ Staff members are assigned for each shift to search toilets and other areas
for children under their supervision prior to departing the area during a drill or
evacuation.

E-6. _____ If an alarm system is out of service for more than four hours, the CDC is
closed or alternate measures are taken (such as continuous fire watch).
(NFPA 101, 9.6.1.6)
SECTION F: SPECIAL CONDITIONS
List below any approved special conditions, features, deviations, and/or compensatory
actions (e.g., severe climatic conditions, contracts, or host country issues) to any of the
preceding checklist items. Identify the item number, specific variation, the supporting
rationale, and approving authority.
ITEM VARIATION
______ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________
_____ ______________________________________________________________

Design Requirements ADAL Youth Center - 231

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Design Requirements ADAL Youth Center - 231

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Child Development Center (CDC)

1.1 DOCUMENT INTENT

Section 01 10 10 supplements UFC 4-740-14 and the drawings contained herein.

1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

This project is for design and construction of a single story Child

basis of design is identified, the Contractor shall use materials and

If Appendix A is referenced in the Section 01 10 10 but no information is

2.3 SPECIFICATION INTENT

The intent of this specification section is to further describe the

2.4 COORDINATION BETWEEN THE VARIOUS DISCIPLINES

The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination between disciplines

2.5 QUALITY OF WORK

Construction documents shall be of sufficient detail to afford a clear

details on the drawings and the specifications. The Contractor shall

2.6 RFP DESIGN AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA

A preliminary code research has been performed as part of the creation of

Architectural detail, materials and finishes are paramount to the success of

Contractor is responsible to perform RADON testing of the entire facility

The Contractor is responsible for providing documentation verifying that

2.6.1 Section 01 10 10 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: Specification Section 01 10 10

2.6.2 Section 01 10 12 DESIGN AFTER AWARD: Specification Section 01 10 12

2.6.3 Technical Specifications: The contractor shall develop the technical

2.7 DESIGN CODES, STANDARDS AND CRITERIA

In addition to the specific codes, standards and criteria referenced

ABA Architectural Barriers Act

ANSI American National Standards Institute Standards

2.8 DESIGN UNITS

The design shall be developed using English units.

2.9 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

AASHTO American Association of Highway and Transportation Officials

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance

2.10 CODES AND REFERENCES

• A policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets, AASHTO

• Guiding Principles for Federal Leadership in High Performance and Sustainable

• NFPA 90B – Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air

4. GEOTECHNICAL AND FOUNDATIONS

4.1 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

4.1.1 Conflicts: Where conflict occurs between project-specific Appendix A

Material shall be classified in accordance with ASTM D 2488 (visual/manual only)

4.3 SOIL TREATMENT

4.4 CAPILLARY WATER AND VAPOR BARRIERS

Floor slabs-on-grade of all buildings shall be underlain by a minimum 6-inch (loose

Floor slabs-on-grade to receive a covering or coating of any kind shall be underlain

4.5 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS

4.5.1 Existing Geotechnical Subsurface Information: Results of geotechnical subsurface

4.5.2 Contractor Performed Subsurface Investigation: The geotechnical investigation

4.5.3 Soil expansion: The Contractor’s geotechnical engineer is responsible for

4.6 CONTRACTOR’S FINAL GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

The Contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer shall provide a final geotechnical report

The Contractor’s final geotechnical report shall, at a minimum, include the

4.6.1 Previous Construction Activity: A discussion of previous construction

4.6.2 Subsurface Conditions: Subsurface conditions expected at the site shall be

4.6.3 Grading Recommendations: Provide grading recommendations taking into

4.6.6 Pavement Subgrade Recommendations: Provide recommendations for flexible and

4.6.10 Seismic Hazards: Perform a review of geologic information, and provide a

4.6.11 Excavation Requirements: A section of the final geotechnical report shall

4.6.13 Expansive, Dispersive, Liquefiable or Collapsing Conditions: An evaluation of

4.6.14 Evaluation of Karst or Sink Hole Potential: An evaluation of the potential of

4.6.16 Storm Water Retention: As a part of the contractor’s final geotechnical

02 32 00 Subsurface Drilling, Sampling and Testing (if required by the

5.1 CODES AND REFERENCES

Refer to Section 2.10 for all codes and references.

5.2 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS